Home

Profile XP System Guide

1. E ommo Sommo oeo Redundant RAID Controller Optional PFC500E Expansion Chassis PFC500E Epansion Chassis Exp Out Exp In 0624 15 Redundant Link Controller 338 Profile XP System Guide 13 May 2005 PFR500 Fibre Channel RAID Chassis PFR500 Fibre Channel RAID Chassis 7 Segment LED displays chassis address Fibre Host Fibre Channel Serial Ethernet Channel Port Loop Port Port Port S 3 oko OG O it 5 GA RAID Controller B oo 00000 OC000 aaa OG CJ E RAID Controller A ono a O O ZA PFR500 cr Fibre Ethernet Serial Host Fibre Channel Port Port Channel Port Loop Port 7 Segment LED displays chassis address PFR500E Expansion Chassis 7 Segment LED displays chassis address Left Right Fibre Channel Serial Ethernet Fibre Channel Loop Port Port Port Loop Port a r Loop Bypass Board B 90000 J 00000 asa B 1 sa O E mm pem
2. 0625 18 DupliDisk CD ROM Superdrive or Indicator Panel Drive 0 Floppy Drive Profile XP System Guide 31 FC Disk Port A Network Reference In RS 422 Breakout a 5 b O D Z as o ogr oz 5 co c 2 O Ogg 2c Za 5 z o we cl um occa oeno ell Me OGFEEEEEEEEEEO network opt O00000000000000000 o09000000000000000 O00000000000000UT O0000000000000000 0900900000000000000 O00000000000000000 0O0000000000000000 O0000000000000000 O0000000000000000 O0000000000000000 0O0000000000000000 O0000000000000000 0O0000000000000000 O0O0000000000000000 o00900000000000000 O00000000000000000 090000000000000000 O0000000000000000 O0000000000000000 O00000000000000000 O0000000000000000 O0000000000000000 0O90000000000000000 O0000000000000000 o0900000000000000 O0000000000000000 O0000000000000000 00000000000000000 O0000000000000000 00000000000000000 FC Disk LTC Video GPI Port B Video I O VideoOut or Video Monitor equipment are located in Appendix C Rack Mounting Information and Rear Panel Profile XP Media Platform The figure shows the rear panel connectors Rear panel drawings for peripheral Drawings Rear Panel View Chapter I Introducing the Profile XP Media Platform KDP D Power Power Cord Good LED az az ooo sec Go cv Or v 2 vo ss
3. a S3 88898 D S NI 4 V A JN 4 SN Out XLR216 rear mounted PAC Breakout c O N LU lt Digital AES EBU 5 Ox Oo o0 Ref Audio I O 1 16 Connector 1 2 A O V O 0220 BNC216 rear mounted 1 2 1 2 O O In Out 0624 8 13 May 2005 Profile XP System Guide 336 PAC216 Profile Audio Chassis PAC 216 Profile Audio Chassis Digital Connector 9 Analog Digital AES EBU AES Analog Connector 1 1 8 9 16 Ref Monitor A A ia Vg j j j S992 4 D D W W LW D D AD D D D an DE i Jo OE PAC216 Main PAC Audio I O Breakout Digital Connector 1 Analog Digital AES EBU Analog Connector 9 9 16 1 8 Spares DO R 89889888881 ee Sse Audio I O PACXLR rear mounted 0624 7 I O Panel I O Panel ATi Ali LTC In Out GPI In Out RS 422 13 May 2005 Profile XP System Guide 337 T Chapter C PFC500 Fibre Channel RAID Chassis PFC500 Fibre Channel RAID Chassis D oo 8 oo oo
4. Configuration for Timecode Track 1 Timecode Input Timecode Output s L None gt L TC Generator Any O Refln VITC In4J3 ea SDI VITC Indal SDI VITC 1nB J7 SDI VITC In 19 SDI VITC 1nB J9 LTC ln1 J3 _ LTC ln2 J3 C LTC In3J3 LJ LTC ln4dJ3 TC Generator Crosspoints Cancel Help 5 Click Finish to save your settings 13 May 2005 Profile XP System Guide 229 T Chapter 7 Modifying a Channel Timecode Settings 230 Profile XP System Guide 13 May 2005 Chapter 8 Modifying a Channel Ancillary Data You can record and play back ancillary data on your high definition record or play channels You can also extract time code from ancillary data and record it as either LTC or VITC and play it back in that form This chapter describes how to set up your system to record and play ancillary data About Profile XP series ancillary data The ancillary data supported by the Profile XP media platform for high definition video complies with the following SMPTE standards or recommended procedures e SMPTE 291M 1998 Ancillary Data Packet and Space Formatting the standard which defines the formatting of the data packets in the serial digital video stream e SMPTE 334M Vertical Ancillary Data Mapping for Bit Serial Interface which contains the DID SDID assignments for the standard data types RP 188 1996 Transmission of Time Code and Control Code in the Ancillary Data Space o
5. Manual Detection Clear the Detect the VITC signal automatically check box then type or select the line numbers where the VITC pair can be found 4 Click Finish to save your settings 222 Profile XP System Guide 13 May 2005 Generating VITC on a video output Generating VITC on a video output To generate VITC on a video output you must e Select the video output as a timecode output for the channel Set up the VITC generator on the output for the correct vertical interval lines Selecting the video output as a timecode output for the channel To select VITC as the timecode output 1 Select Channel Configuration in the Configuration Manager window 2 Click the tab for the channel you want to configure 3 Click on a timecode track in the configuration tree or click Add Track to add a new one Channel Configuration Profile1 y vn v 8 ves vea 13 May 2005 Rj Video H Track 1 Audio Q Track 1 amp 2 Add Track j um Delete Track Configuration for Timecode Track 1 Type Add Channel in MPEG Player Recorder Remove Channel Summary Timecode Input Refln VITC IndJ3 SDIVITC In 7 SDIVITC InB J7 SDIVITC In J9 SDI VITC INB J9 LTC n1 J3 LTC ln2J3 LTC In3 J3 LTC In4 J3 H L TC Generator Any Timecode Outputs la lt None gt LISDI VITC OutaJ CI LTC 0ut1 J3 O LTC Dut2 J3 O LTC 0ut3
6. Summary Configuration for Video Track 1 Browse Video Encoder Browse Video Quality VHS Quality 1 5 Mb s 7 d Low 0 8 Mb s Draft 0 5 Mb s L MPEG Rec 4 Custom 1 5 Mb s Custom2 1 5 Mb s Custom3 1 5 Mb s C 4 1 5 Mb Browse Video VBI Encoding Advanced Crosspoints Cancel Help 4 To view the properties for the video quality preset you select click the Video Quality settings button Hj next to the Browse Video Quality drop down list 160 Profile XP System Guide 13 May 2005 Selecting browse video quality settings for a channel I MPEG 1 Browse Video Quality Settings 5 Click Finish to save your changes and close the Channel Configuration dialog box 13 May 2005 Profile XP System Guide 161 T Chapter 5 Modifying a Channel Video Settings Defining and selecting a custom video quality preset You can modify the custom presets provided in both the Video Quality and Browse Video Quality drop down lists Using custom settings you can more closely manage signal quality and record capacity by choosing the chrominance sampling method group of picture length GoP and bit rate best suited for your application To modify the settings for a custom video quality preset 1 Choose Channel Configuration in the Configuration Manager window The Channel Configuration dialog box appears 2 Click the tab for the channel you want to modify If you want to m
7. T Chapter 5 Modifying a Channel Video Settings 3 Click VBI Encoding By default Compress VBI is selected and no VBI information is recorded in uncompressed form Channel Configuration PORTAS Audio Q Track 1 amp 2 Qi Track 3 amp 4 ld Timecode a K Data i Track 1 LEAVE tie IGllawitig Ines UnCoMpPiesseu M Adaline Remove LIne 4 To store VBI information in uncompressed form clear the Compress VBI checkbox A list of lines that will not be compressed is displayed By default no lines are listed 164 Profile XP System Guide 13 May 2005 Recording VBI information uncompressed Channel Configuration Profile1 Pr MPEG Payerecore fj Track 3 amp 4 ey Timecode Remove LIfe 5 To add lines to the uncompressed lines list a Click Add The Add VBI line dialog box appears Add YBI Line b Select a line number using the Line drop down list c Select whether to preserve Luma or Chroma Preserving luma and chroma requires two lines of data d Click OK to add the line to the list of uncompressed lines e Repeat step a through step d to add other lines to the uncompressed lines list You can add up to six lines 13 May 2005 Profile XP System Guide 165 Chapter 5 Modifying a Channel Video Settings 6 To remove lines select a line number then click Remove 7 Click Finish to save your changes NOTE If the channel is currently in use by
8. Profile XP NT Workstation running Profile Remote Applications 13 May 2005 Profile XP System Guide 257 T Chapter 11 Setting up a Simple Network About the Fibre Channel video network option The Fibre Channel video network actually relies on two separate networks Fibre Channel and Ethernet The Fibre Channel network is part of the Real Time Processor subsystem which manages the flow of video data in and out of the system refer to High level block diagram on page 34 in Chapter 1 Introducing the Profile XP Media Platform The Fibre Channel network provides the high speed connection between network devices The Ethernet network is part of the Windows NT computer system in the Profile XP and is used for control and transport of data associated with the discovery and identification of video clips within the system This network can be either 10BaseT or 100BaseT Ethernet Both networks use TCP IP network protocol Ethernet 10 100BaseT Fibre Channel 1Gbs Control amp clip database High speed video transfers Profile XP 0624 14 258 Profile XP System Guide 13 May 2005 About the Fibre Channel video network option How s it connected together How the network is physically connected together refers to what is called the network topology or layout The Ethernet and Fibre Channel network layouts can differ so we ll talk about the Ethernet network first Ethernet network layou
9. 13 May 2005 Profile XP System Guide 67 GE T Chapter 3 Working with RAID Storage Using GVG Disk Utility Refer to the PFR600 Instruction Manual for service information including monitoring the front and rear panel LED status indicators and replacing serviceable modules PFR700 product description The PFR 700 Series contains five ten or fifteen half height 3 5 Fibre Channel Arbitrated Loop FC AL disk drives The chassis also supports one or two hardware RAID Controllers in one 3U high rack mountable chassis The PFR 700 Series currently uses 36GB 73GB or 146GB drive capacities With 15 drives one chassis holds up to 540GB 1 095TB or 2 19TB depending on the disk drive option Drives are numbered 0 to 14 in the PFR 700 RAID Chassis The PFR 700E RAID Expansion Chassis provides additional storage capacity One PFR 700E RAID Expansion Chassis can be connected to a single PFR 700 comprising a single disk array storage system with a total of 30 drives and 1 08TB 2 19TB or 4 38TB of storage depending on the disk drive option This provides for cost effective storage expansion as requirements grow Drives are numbered 16 to 30 in the PFR 700E RAID Expansion Chassis There is no drive 15 between the PFR 700 RAID Chassis and the PFR 700E RAID Expansion Chassis The PFR700 utilizes dual FC AL technology allowing two loop configurations within a single chassis Loop integrity is maintained during failures without user intervention Each
10. Chapter Modifying a Channel Timecode Settings You can customize timecode settings for your record or play channels For example you can change the number of timecode tracks per channel or change the timecode source and destinations This chapter describes how to modify your timecode settings About Profile XP series timecode To record or play timecode you must assign one or more timecode tracks to the channel using Configuration Manager After adding a timecode track you can choose the timecode source or destination for the track Timecode sources include four LTC inputs internal timecode generators and VITC VITC can be read on all standard video inputs including the system reference input If ancillary data is present in the video stream time code can also be read from that data Timecode outputs include four LTC outputs and VITC on any standard video output or high definition output 13 May 2005 Profile XP System Guide 211 T Chapter 7 Modifying a Channel Timecode Settings Using the internal timecode generators Profile XP software provides a timecode generator for each Profile XP channel The internal timecode generator appears as a source in the timecode input list for each channel You can configure how the timecode generator runs such as drop frame or non drop frame fixed or time of day The timecode generators are referenced to the Applications Processor real time clock Selecting the internal generator as a
11. NOTE The Drop Frame control is hidden if your Profile system is configured for the 625 video standard 4 To choose drop frame click on the Drop Frame check box To compensate for the 29 97 frame rate in NTSC drop frame timecode synchronizes the rate with elapsed time Drop frame timecode drops two frames per minute except on the tenth minute PAL on the other hand has a constant rate of 25 frames per second and never requires drop frame timecode 5 Click Finish to save your settings and close the Channel Configuration dialog box 216 Profile XP System Guide 13 May 2005 Recording VITC Recording VITC The system reference input and all video inputs have VITC readers To record VITC you must first select the reference input or a video input as a timecode source For standard definition inputs you must then verify that the VITC reader for the input is set up properly to read VITC Selecting a VITC input for a channel To select VITC as the timecode source 1 Select Channel Configuration in the Configuration Manager window 2 Click the tab for the channel you want to configure 3 Click on a timecode track in the configuration tree or click Add Track to add a new one 4 Click the Crosspoints button then select the VITC source in the Timecode Input list Channel Configuration Profile 1 x a vi ver ves ve Name Type Add Channel in MPEG Player Recorder 7 Remove Channel aA Virl Ely Video 6 Tr
12. for more information on using Channel Configuration Profile Channel Configuration Profile1 Co ioe C Black 13 May 2005 Profile XP System Guide 53 54 T Chapter 2 Working with Configuration Manager Viewing hardware settings summary dialog boxes Use summary dialog boxes to view hardware settings in Configuration Manager Summary dialog boxes are displayed when you click the Finish button on a configuration page The Video Monitor Summary dialog box is shown here as an example Video Monitor Page 2 of 2 x Video Monitor Text Setup Monitor Dut J11 Background Monitor OutCJ11 Transparent zi Monitor DutD J11 Text Net 2 Video Monitor Summary x Configuration Manager will reconfigure the hardware with the following settings Monitor OutdJ11 Text Mar n Background Timecode M Smal F7 Brigh 7 Outline M Dither 7 Pedestal Monitor OutBJ11 Text Background Timecode M Small F Bright F Outline M Dither 7 Pedestal Monitor OutCJ11 Text Background Timecode M Smal F7 Bright F Outline M Dither 7 Pedestal 00 0C I Show timecode and a System Profilet lt Back f Clicking Back in a summary dialog box returns you to the configuration page without saving your settings Clicking the OK closes the summary dialog box and saves your settings Profile XP System Guide 13 May 2005 Viewing hardware settings summary dialog boxes
13. Disabling a PFR600 RAID controller for removal P332 P332 Up to date with 1 0 Settings 200000204621 7979 Aflower 10 16 42 63 Active P332 P332 Up to date with 1 0 Settings 200000204621 7933 B upper 10 16 42 64 Profile XP System Guide This feature is provided for PFR 600 RAID chassis that have redundant RAID controller modules installed In the event that one of the RAID controllers appears operational but also reports faults through various log files and status indicators you can choose to disable the controller and replace it Disabling the controller and removing it in this way avoids interruptions in signal output that can occur if the module fails or if it is simply hot swapped while it is the active controller When the replacement RAID controller module is installed it is automatically enabled and becomes the backup controller NOTE Refer to the PFR600 Instruction Manual for procedures on removing and replacing the RAID controller module To disable a controller 1 Start the GVG Disk Utility 2 Expand the tree view to display the controllers 3 Right click a controller icon in the tree view then select Advanced Disable A Controller or Disable B Controller 13 May 2005 Performing PF R600 maintenance tasks E GYG Disk Utility iol x File View Tools Help PFRE00 mm Microcode Version P332 P332 Bind LU
14. Disk UnBound Disks 8 Disk Subsystem Status Pane displays status of the selected item 13 May 2005 Profile XP System Guide 75 DL Chapter 3 Working with RAID Storage Using GVG Disk Utility Checking storage subsystem status NetCentral monitoring software is available to monitor your Profile XP media platform and the attached RAID storage system however some limited status information for storage subsystems is displayed in the GVG Disk Utility This can be helpful when configuring storage You can view status information by selecting these items in the tree view Storage Model e Controller e Bound LUN e Disk 76 Profile XP System Guide 13 May 2005 Binding disks and creating a video file system Binding disks and creating a video file system 13 May 2005 Before you can use your Profile XP system you must create a video file system on the Fibre Channel RAID Storage Chassis using the GVG Disk Utility Creating a video file system involves Setting the RAID Controller Fibre Channel ID PFR 500s only Binding any unbound disk modules e Creating and naming the file system NOTE Make sure you allow adequate time for binding disk modules into LUNs PFR500 and PFR 600 controllers bind each LUN in turn but take less than a minute for each LUN PFC500 and PFR 700 controllers bind multiple LUNs at the same time yet take more than an hour to bind a LUN Large drive capacities and multiple LUNs can inc
15. KS ane o ojo aL ef D0 ilolo 28 MATE O READY Be Ea 7 EWER H Ct i SS BELLS ISA SLL SS Va WO Pe ETN palos ju HOST ID o o ojo ele COR Alelo E an 2G mate O READY alelan FAULT DISK LINK K L LAN Ethernet Port Expansion HostFibre Status Serial Expansion chassis Card Chassis Channel Port LEDs Port diagnostic connector Port PFR700E Expansion Chassis Expansion Adapter 1 Expansion Adapter 0 A 29 ai le OAS RT i 0 o ler o o I ETV IET SSS RKA X Rd N 4 o H LX Y D AD ZN o Sol ir W AABE aes KISS Q p SW ESK O Chassis Expansion chassis Status RAID Expansion chassis address diagnostic address LEDs chassis diagnostic connector switch switch Port 13 May 2005 Profile XP System Guide 341 T Chapter C 342 Profile XP System Guide 13 May 2005 Index A AC 3 202 accessories 33 adding channels 126 AES EBU audio I O input status checking 201 selecting 197 AES EBU Breakout Panels BNC216 192 XLR216 192 Agile Output licensing 237 AMP 252 analog audio input level adjustment 205 output level adjustment 206 output line mode selecting 208 output muting 207 analog audio sele
16. Selecting analog audio output line mode You can select single ended or balanced line modes for the analog audio outputs To select analog audio line mode 1 Select Audio Output in the Configuration Manager window 2 Select an audio output in the list or click Select All 3 Select the Line Mode using the Line Mode drop down list 4 Click Finish to save your settings Audio Output Page 1 of 1 x Analog Output Boost Physical Location How much additional adjustment should be made to the output gain after playout Mute the output 12dB OdB 12dB Line Mode BALANCED BALANCED FINZL W PINSLOW S 208 Profile XP System Guide 13 May 2005 Selecting audio reference level Selecting audio reference level The audio reference level is used by Profile applications to scale audio level meters Setting the audio reference level determines the absolute value at Odb To set the audio reference level select Audio Reference Level in the Configuration Manager window then select the audio reference level used at your facility Audio Reference Page 1 of 1 The default audio setting is used by Profile applications to restore audio levels to a known default All applications are not guaranteed to use the correct default value 13 May 2005 Profile XP System Guide 209 T Chapter 6 Modifying a Channel Audio Settings Changing how audio sounds during jog You can change how the au
17. Show or hide summary dialog boxes 13 May 2005 You can choose to hide the summary dialog boxes This allows you to click the Finish button on configuration pages to store your settings without displaying the summary To show or hide summary dialog boxes in the Configuration Manager View menu choose Show Summary Profile1 View Profile XP System Guide 55 56 Chapter 2 Working with Configuration Manager Viewing board location information Selecting Board Location in the View menu allows you to view the location and type of circuit boards installed in your Profile XP To view board location information 1 Select View Board Location The Profile Board Location window appears ts Profile1 yx grass valley BoardName Location Revision Status Motherboard Jo 2 Running lt Empty gt J1 Fibre Channel J2 0 Running Real Time System J3 0 Running Fibre Channel Disk J4 1 Running SDI 2ln 20ut J5 1 Running MPEG2 Enc J6 2 Running lt Empty gt J MPEG2 Dec J8 1 Running Video Monitor J3 1 Running lt Empty gt J10 lt Empty gt J11 lt Empty gt J12 lt Empty gt J13 Audio J14 1 Running 2 Click Ok to close the window Profile XP System Guide 13 May 2005 Saving and restoring your system settings Saving and restoring your system settings You can use Configuration Manager to save a copy of your hardware settings and channels in named configuratio
18. T Chapter 4 Adding or Removing Channels Selecting playout aspect ratio conversion An HD SD MPEG Player channel allows you to play SD and HD MPEG 4 2 0 clips through the same output either HD SDI or SD SDI If you select an HD output all SD material is up converted to HD When this takes place you can specify how the aspect ratio of your material is modified for the 16 9 HD display Similarly if you use an SD output all HD material is down converted to SD The aspect ratio of your HD material is adjusted for the SD display NOTE Ifyou define two HD SD MPEG Player channels using HD decoders on the same board both must use the same output type either standard definition SDI or high definition HD SDI If you want to use different output types for HD SD MPEG Player channels you must use HD decoders on different boards Once you have selected the output to be used with your HD SD MPEG Player you can select the default up or down conversion for clips played on that channel You can override this setting by modifying the clip s properties using Media Manager Channel Configuration P S 3000 x a vert S ver By vis vea Name Type Add Channel in HD SD MPEG Player 7 Remove Channel W vii iy Video HI Track1 AddIrack Audio Q Track 1 amp 2 Delete Track ly Timecode BSE Track 1 Ei Data Summary Configuration for Video Track 1 Decoder video Guals Any Cust
19. is the timecode input NOTE Leave the Timecode Generator selection to Any unless you are using the same generator for two or more channels Refer to Using the same TC generator for multiple channels on page 213 Channel Configuration Profile1 x a v ver By vis vea Name J e Audio Track 1 amp 2 ly Timecode H Track 1 Configuration for Timecode Track 1 Type Add Channel in MPEG Player Recorder 7 Remove Channel Add Track Delete Track Summary Timecode Generator lt None gt TC Gen 1 LI TC Gen 2 LI TC Gen 3 U TC Gen 4 LI TC Gen 5 L TC Gen 6 L TC Gen 7 L TC Gen 8 LI TC Gen 9 LI TC Gen 10 LI TC Gen 11 TOC H1 Generator Mode Fixed start time 00 00 00 00 C Time of day Format IV Drop Frame TC Generator Crosspoints Cancel Help 2 Choose a generator mode You can start timecode using a fixed time or the time of day Click Time of Day to use the Applications Processor Windows NT clock or click Fixed Start Time to set a timecode value under Starting Value 13 May 2005 Profile XP System Guide 215 T Chapter 7 Modifying a Channel Timecode Settings 3 If you selected fixed time you can use the default of 00 00 00 00 Hours Minutes Seconds Frames under Starting Value or set a new fixed starting time This setting takes effect the next time you click the Record button
20. tr us A O Optional Power 4 Supply 8112 1 13 May 2005 Profile XP System Guide 32 Standard accessories Standard accessories The Profile XP Media Platform is shipped with the following standard accessories 13 May 2005 Manuals Include Installation Guide Profile XP System Guide Profile XP User Manual Profile XP Service Manual Profile XP Release Notes Software package which includes the Profile XP Software CD ROM Windows NT software package Keyboard and mouse I O Panel and cables provides LTC RS 422 amp GPI interfaces Power cable Rack mounting slides Ethernet cable System rebuild CD ROM Profile XP System Guide 33 T Chapter 1 Introducing the Profile XP Media Platform Profile XP Media Platform system overview The Profile XP Media Platform system is an extension to a standard PCI bus based Windows NT computer This standard is enhanced to add functionality and performance necessary to deliver an industrial grade broadcast guality disk based video server This section discusses the major architectural blocks what they do and how they interconnect High level block diagram The Profile XP Media Platform has three subsystems Application Subsystem Real Time Subsystem and Storage Subsystem User Interface Control Video I O Audio I O Configuration Media Networking IPM Fibre Channel Channel Application Real Time Subsystem Subsystem Media Storage Subsyst
21. 40 or 50 Mb s from the Video Quality drop down list Channel Configuration PYS 3000 MPEG DTD iev Aecoda El 4 vti J Video Be J Audio Qi Track 1 amp 2 A Timecode gt fH Track 1 Constant 50 Mb s Constant 40 Mb s Constant 30 Mb s Ba SU I UuteJ5 5 Click Finish to save your changes and close the Channel Configuration dialog box NOTE If the channel is currently in use by an application it must be reselected within the application before your changes will take effect Refer to the User Manual for the Profile application you are using 13 May 2005 Profile XP System Guide 159 T Chapter 5 Modifying a Channel Video Settings Selecting browse video guality settings for a channel When browse video is enabled you can make settings for the MPEG 1 video guality in much the same way as you do for the MPEG 2 video To select channel video guality 1 Choose Channel Configuration in the Configuration Manual window The Channel Configuration dialog box appears 2 Select the tab for the channel you want to modify then click the Browse Video button 3 Use the Browse Video Quality drop down list to select a browse video quality preset Channel Configuration Profile1 x By vert 8 verz j VideoOnly Audion Name Type Add Channel in MPEG Player Recorder Remove Channel 3 vti Ey Video V H Track 1 Add Track Audio ly Timecode Delete Track
22. Configuration for Video Track 1 Default Down Conversion Method F Letterbox 9 000 Black bars at top and bottom Half Letterbox e gt Cx Smaller bars some detail lost Crop X No bars more detail lost Up Conversion Down Conversion Compress s o0 16 9 image compressed to 4 3 frame FHA Advanced Crosspoints Cancel Help 4 Select the desired aspect ratio conversion from the available options Letterbox The 16 9 aspect ratio is maintained centered on the screen with black bars filling the top and bottom portions of the 4 3 display Half Letterbox The picture aspect ratio is maintained but the image is slightly enlarged The left and right sides the image are slightly cropped and thin black bars fill the top and bottom portions of the 4 3 display Crop The picture aspect ratio is maintained but the image is enlarged so that it vertically fills the SD display The left and right sides of the 16 9 HD image are cropped to fit in the 4 3 SD display Compress The picture aspect ratio is distorted The image fills the screen horizontally without cropping and is stretched vertically to fill the 4 3 display This conversion generates Full Height Anamorphic FHA 16 9 SD material 138 Profile XP System Guide 13 May 2005 Selecting audio channels for each audio track Selecting audio channels for each audio track To select audio channels for each audio track 1 Double cl
23. Loop Bypass Board A PFR500E 8136 2 Left Ethernet Serial Right Fibre Channel Port Port Fibre Channel Loop Port Loop Port 7 Segment LED displays chassis address 13 May 2005 Profile XP System Guide 339 T Chapter C PFR600 Fibre Channel RAID Chassis 7 Segment LED displays chassis address Fibre Host Fibre Serial Ethernet Channel Channel Port Port Port Loop Port aln OG O je bA W RAID Controller B hh ooo O00000 J 00000 asa a Oc MS Fo cas r RAID Controller A a 7 y e J PFR600 Fibre Ethernet Serial Host Fibre Channel Port Port Channel Port Loop Port 7 Segment LED displays chassis address PFR600E Expansion Chassis 7 Segment LED displays chassis address Left Right Fibre Channel Serial Ethernet Fibre Channel Loop Port Port Port Loop Port 1 a r Loop Bypass Board B r Loop Bypass Board A M EE cam oc oF PFR600E Left Ethernet Serial Right Fibre Channel Port Port Fibre Channel Loop Port Loop Port 7 Segment LED displays chassis address 340 Profile XP System Guide 13 May 2005 PFR700 Fibre Channel RAID Chassis PFR700 Fibre Channel RAID Chassis RAID Controller 1 RAID Controller 0 gt
24. Other user manuals you received with optional Profile applications 13 May 2005 Profile XP System Guide T Preface Manual Descriptions e Installation Guide for your Profile XP Model Provides step by step instructions for installing the Profile XP Media Platform using factory default settings for all record play channels Factory default settings are indicated within the guide After installing the Profile XP system using this installation guide you can refer to this Profile XP System Guide to customize system settings for your installation Profile XP User Manual Contains complete instructions for using Profile applications to operate the Profile XP Media Platform Profile XP Service Manual Contains information for servicing the Profile XP Media Platform and monitoring systems using NetCentral II Lite Procedures are included for following tasks Setting up and using NetCentral to monitor and diagnose problems on local and remote Profile XP systems Problem analysis using symptom possible problem solution tables Running diagnostics Replacing field replaceable units e NetCentral User Guide Contains information for using NetCentral to monitor various types of broadcast equipment including Profile XP systems from a central monitoring station Profile XP Release Notes Contains the latest information about the Profile hardware and the software release shipped on your system This information includes softwa
25. VITC timecode is inserted To blank lines in the vertical interval 1 Choose Video Output in the Configuration Manager Window The Video Output dialog box appears 2 Click Next to navigate to Video Output page 2 of 3 Video Output Page 2 of 3 x Vertical Interval Setup rVertical Ancillary Data Packets Which lines will be reserved for vertical ancillary data packets SDI OutB J5 V Clear lines between fr and 12 m VITE Generation Which lines should be used after vertical ancillary data packet insertion IV Generate VITC timecode on Line 1 12 7 Line 2 14 3 Select a video output from the list or click Select All to configure all the video outputs at the same time 4 Perform one of the following Ifyou do not want to erase any lines clear the Erase lines between check box If you want to erase lines in the vertical interval select the Erase lines between check box then select the starting and ending lines numbers using the sliders 176 Profile XP System Guide 13 May 2005 Ancillary Data insertion Ancillary Data insertion You can select the lines on which you insert Ancillary Data for each output On standard definition you can also chose to insert VITC on the desired lines of the output To insert ancillary data in the vertical interval 1 Choose Video Output in the Configuration Manager Window The Video Output dialog box appears 2 Click
26. Video quality and crosspoints remain the same after changing channel type NOTE The Browse Video option is available only in media platforms equipped with standard definition MPEG encoders or video codecs configured as MPEG encoders Browse video is not available with high definition MPEG encoders Channel Configuration KEY1 x y vu v ves Name Type Add Channel e3 MPEG D10 Player Recorder 7 _Bemove Channel vt S Video MPEG D10 Player Recorder H Track 1 Add Track Audio fj Track 1 amp 2 Delete Track Track 3 amp 4 N ly Timecode Y Track 1 Summary Configuration for Video Track 1 Codec Video Quality Any Constant 50Mb s H I Browse vides Video Input Video Output s PJ lt None gt 1 SDI 0ut4 19 C SDI OutBJ9 1SDI OutC J9 O SDI OutDJ39 SDI Dut J5 SBI OurB J5 O SDI Out4 J7 O SDI OutB J7 Browse Video Advanced Crosspoints Einish Cancel Help eme 13 May 2005 Profile XP System Guide 129 T Chapter 4 Adding or Removing Channels Selecting video guality and crosspoints You ll need to select which video inputs and outputs you want a channel to use as well as the video guality for channels that can record The Channel Configuration dialog box allocates all available outputs so that you can monitor your crosspoint selections The black video input available only as an SD input can be used to
27. cable is connected to the correct physical port P1 P8 Ethernet PortServer is not running on Start PortServer on remote Cannot connect to a remote remote machine machine Refer to Running machine PortServer to enable remote operation on page 251 Ethernet The Profile XP system has a Refer to Common Ethernet When running an application remotely you cannot find the Profile XP system listed in the Remote Host List problem with the Ethernet connection network problems on page 297 Profile XP System Guide 13 May 2005 Common Ethernet network problems Common Ethernet network problems This troubleshooting aid provides corrective action for some common Ethernet network problems Search the table for the problem you are experiencing then try the corrective action Some problems have more than one corrective action 13 May 2005 Problem Possible Cause s Corrective Action Windows NT reports there is an Two ormore Profile XP systems Refer to the procedure Set IP address conflict have the same Ethernet IP machine name and IP address on address each Profile XP system on page 264 Only the local Profile XP Missing network connection Check that the port link system is listed in Network Neighborhood indicator is lit on the hub or switch the Profile XP Ethernet cable is connected to If not make sure the network cable is properly connected then refer to t
28. cabling connecting 281 common setup problems 303 entering network settings 277 HOSTS file editing 279 installing 277 testing using Media Manager 282 expanding storage 73 87 exporting channel settings 59 hardware settings 59 13 May 2005 Index F failover RAID Controller 66 FCC Emission Control 17 FCC Emission Limits 18 Fiber Channel video network common setup problems 298 Fibre Channel Disk board description 42 Fibre Channel disk cable specifications Fibre Channel disk cable 325 Fibre Channel network cable specifications 326 Fibre Channel RAID Chassis 42 about configuring storage 72 configuring storage 71 100 107 113 configuring to include hot spare drives 83 configuring without hot spares drives 77 controller settings PFR500 104 PFR600 109 disk initialization PFR500 104 PFR600 109 disk settings PFR500 106 expanding storage 73 87 forcing disk rebuild PFR500 103 hot spare drives 73 starting disk rebuild PFR600 108 storage capacity 69 Fibre Channel switch 259 273 Fibre Channel video network available bandwidth 70 cabling connecting 272 entering network settings 269 HOSTS file editing 270 installing 268 IP address choosing 260 machine name choosing 260 testing with Media Manager 273 troubleshooting 299 Fixed Start Time timecode generator setting 215 forcing disk rebuild 103 front panel description 29 30 31 Profile XP System Guide 345 T Index G general information specifications 309
29. down converted HD One NTSC PAL analog composite w time code burn in and text overlay down converted HD Output Timing Range Requirement 21 2 H to 148 H Digital Format Supplemental Data Complies with standards listed in SMPTE 292M Table Source format parameters Bit Rate Supplemental Data 1485 Mb s Source Impedance Supplemental Data 750 Return Loss Supplemental Data gt 15 dB from 5 MHz to 1500 MHz DC Offset Requirement 0 0 5V Rise and Fall Times Requirement No greater than 270ps and shall not differ by more than 100ps measured at the 20 and 80 amplitude points Jitter Requirement lt 134ps As per SMPTE 292 Table 5 Profile XP System Guide 311 Chapter A Characteristics Description Input Level Supplemental Data 800 mV p p 10 Supplemental Data Input voltages outside this range may cause reduced receiver performance Serial Receiver Requirement Proper operation with up to 20 dB loss at 750 MHz Equalization Range using coaxial cable having 1 Y loss characteristics 800 mV launch amplitude Output Level Requirement 800 mV p p 10 Video Monitor Characteristics Description Number of Outputs Supplemental Data Four composite outputs Output Timing Range Supplemental Data No output timing adjustments Composite Analog Supplemental Data NTSC with or without setup or PAL Format Source Impedance Supplemental Data 750 DC Offset Supplemental Data 0 V Output Le
30. files over local area and wide area networks Both networks use TCP IP network protocol After configuring TCP IP settings for both networks the hardware can be connected using standard Ethernet hubs or switches Both Ethernet network interfaces use standard RJ 45 connectors Ethernet Hub Profilet Ethernet Hub or Switch e or Switch Video Network Windows NT Network 0624 13 13 May 2005 Profile XP System Guide 261 T Chapter 11 Setting up a Simple Network Choosing machine names and IP addresses for your Ethernet video network The default machine name for each Profile XP system is the unit serial number You may want to change the name to something more meaningful such as Profile1 or Profile2 The video network option also requires you to set up two IP addresses for each Profile XP unit one for the Windows NT Ethernet interface and the other for the Ethernet video network interface A common mistake is to choose IP addresses for the Windows NT and video network interfaces using the same network ID This is wrong the IP addresses for each network must be unique Here is an example of IP addresses for two Profile XP systems Computer Name Profile1 Windows NT Ethernet interface IP Address 192 168 99 1 Video Network Ethernet interface IP Address 192 168 101 1 Computer Name Profile2 Windows NT Ethernet interface IP Address 192 168 99 2 Video Network Ethernet interface IP Address 192 168 101 2 You can use the
31. installing 277 IP address choosing 262 machine name 262 13 May 2005 Fibre Channel video network about 258 cabling 272 entering network settings 269 HOSTS file editing 270 installing 268 IP address choosing 260 machine name choosing 260 testing with Media Manager 273 troubleshooting 299 Ping Window testing Ethernet video network 307 testing the Fibre Channel network 302 simple networks about 263 Windows NT network about 257 cabling 266 common setup problems 297 installing 264 IP address choosing 264 machine name 264 O Odetics Protocol 252 Odetics protocol 246 P PAC216 Audio Chassis about 192 power requirements 315 rear panel drawing 337 parallel connector pinouts 319 PFC500 setting system clock 117 PFC500 PFR500 PFR 600 or PFR700 see Fibre Channel RAID Chassis PFC500 rear panel drawing 338 PFC500E Expansion chassis rear panel drawing 338 PFR500 controller settings 104 disk initialization 104 disk settings 106 downloading disk firmware 101 13 May 2005 Index forcing disk rebuild 103 rear panel drawing 339 PFR500E Expansion chassis rear panel drawing 339 PFR600 controller settings 109 disk firmware downloading 107 disk initialization 109 rear panel drawing 340 replacing failed disk 108 PFR600E Expansion chassis rear panel drawing 340 PFR700 downloading disk firmware 113 rear panel drawing 341 replacing failed disk 114 PFR700E Expansion chassis rear panel drawing
32. message click OK c Repeat step a and step b for remaining controllers 6 Reboot the RAID storage and the Profile XP media platform using the System reboot procedure on page 94 NOTE If your PFR500 is part of an Open SAN disregard the previous step and refer to the instructions in the Open SAN Instruction Manual for powering off and powering on the Open SAN This concludes the Loading Disk Firmware procedure Disk firmware download Alternate procedure 13 May 2005 NOTE Perform this procedure only when you receive a warning that some disks failed to download while performing the procedure Downloading PF R500 disk drive firmware on page 100 In some cases rebooting the PFR500 RAID Controller chassis results in successful disk firmware upgrades for disks that report a download error If disks still fail to upgrade you can download firmware to a single disk After all disk are upgraded you must restore disk settings To upgrade firmware for remaining disks and restore disk settings 1 Reboot the RAID storage and Profile XP media platform using the System reboot procedure on page 94 NOTE If your PFR 500 is part of an Open SAN disregard the previous step and refer to the instructions in the Open SAN Instruction Manual for powering off and powering on the Open SAN 2 Use the following steps to verify the firmware version on all disks a Inthe GVG Disk Utility select a disk icon and note the drive
33. sifes gates v ks cu ei areira 52 Channel Configuration dd ada 53 Viewing hardware settings summary dialog DOXES ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesnaeees 54 Viewing board location information 0 0 eee aaa sssr 56 Saving and restoring your system settings 1 aaa s 57 Saving a copy of your system configuratioN 4aaaaaa ae 57 Opening saved configuration files a dd 58 Importing system Setting Srnie nro aa acne vas ies da as fis die 59 Iniporting configur tioli lt 2 s eed l Cs izs igak d ci rapia ice s di da 60 Remote configuration asine aea gida Ra nie A eee ea heehee 62 Profile XP System Guide 3 Contents Chapter 3 Chapter 4 Chapter 5 Working with RAID Storage Using GVG Disk Utility RAID chassis product descriptions iiai d ma 66 PFC500 product description asssaasaas eee 66 PFR500 product description s cs ssers sc va e esiceec seesem serar ce reesrasor ssaesss ses ra s res r ta 66 PFR600 product d s riptiONi cekas ski deste die ved eee 67 PFR700 product descriptioN sscseasasiscesssasa ces nisoria riaan naiinip rast 68 Estimating Storage capacity sasiaren tas kb aa ea d 69 Determining maximum video data rate per channel 70 Connecting RAID chassis cabling ii aiddsa aa 70 Configuring RAID storage using GVG Disk Utility ssiu adidas 71 About Configuring storage s sisien itie iaiia 72
34. with black bars filling the left and right portions of the 16 9 display Half Pillarbox The picture aspect ratio is maintained but the image is slightly enlarged The top and bottom of the image are slightly cropped and thin black bars fill the left and right portions of the 16 9 display Zoom The picture aspect ratio is maintained but the image is enlarged so that it horizontally fills the HD display The top and bottom of the 4 3 SD image are cropped to fit in the 16 9 display Stretch to Fit The picture aspect ratio is distorted The image fills the screen vertically without cropping and is stretched horizontally to fill the 16 9 display This conversion up converts Full Height Anamorphic FHA 16 9SD material Profile XP System Guide 137 T Chapter 4 Adding or Removing Channels Setting down conversion aspect ratio To select set the aspect ratio conversion for HD material on an HD SD MPEG Player channel on an SD output 1 Double click the video icon to expand the configuration tree 2 Choose a video track in the configuration tree such as Track 1 3 Click the Down Conversion button to see the aspect ratio choices Channel Configuration PYS3000 x 3 vii Vtr2 3 vir g vira Name Type Add Channel ia HD SD MPEG Player 7 Remove Channel a Virl Video 4 Track 1 Add Track Audio dj Track 1 amp 2 Delete Track a ly Timecode H Track 1 E Data Summary
35. 0000 Communications Port Status indicates activity on the RS 422 port amp Prolink P1 C x File Help 00 00 00 00 ur ae A 00 00 00 00 Q 00 00 00 00 A 00 00 00 00 O Command 250 Profile XP System Guide 13 May 2005 Running PortServer to enable remote operation Running PortServer to enable remote operation PortSever allows you to control a Profile XP remotely using Ethernet If you want to control or configure the Profile XP over the Ethernet network from a remote system or transfer media to or from a Profile XP system through the video network you must have PortServer running on all remote Profile XP systems before performing these operations After starting PortServer see the Profile XP User Manual for instructions on how to connect to a remote Profile XP system in the Profile application you are using To start PortServer to enable remote operation over Ethernet Start PortServer by double click the PortServer desktop shortcut or choose Start Profile Applications PortServer The PortServer shortcut is set up to run minimized Notice the PortServer icon label on the taskbar dynamically displays the number of remote connections Number of remote connections A Start 256 0 PortServer The Portserver window also displays the number of remote connections to the Profile XP system as well as other communications related messages 7 0 PortServer File Help Number of r
36. 1 Inthe GVG Disk Utility right click the icon for a PFR 700 controller and select Set Network Properties The Controller Network Settings dialog box opens 116 Profile XP System Guide 13 May 2005 Resetting the PFC 500 system clock Controller Network Settings 4 I x r Network Configuration IP Address 16 38 157 Subnet Mask 255 255 252 0 Gateway Address 10 16 53 1 r SNMP Configuration Trap Address 1 10 16 38 143 Trap Address 2 10 16 38 51 Trap Address 3 0 0 0 0 2 Enter network settings for the RAID chassis 3 For each SNMP manager to which you want to send SNMP trap messages enter the IP address of the PC hosting the manager If you are monitoring the PFR700 E with NetCentral enter the IP address of the NetCentral server NetCentral 4 x and higher or NetCentral monitoring station NetCentral 3 x and lower 4 Click OK to save settings and close 5 Restart the RAID chassis to put SNMP configuration changes into effect Resetting the PFC 500 system clock Use the following procedure to set the system clock on all PFC500 RAID Storage chassis connected This procedure sets the PFC 500 RAID controller clock to the Profile XP system clock or the clock of the machine on which the Disk Utility is running To reset the PFC500 clock 1 Inthe GVG Disk Utility tree view right click the PFC500 node then select Reset Clock in the context menu 2 On receiving an operation successfu
37. 199 Checking AES EBU input status isinisisi iniaiaiai eisai aneii 201 Selecting incoming digital audio Coding format aiaasasa s 202 Adjusting audio delay cren iiron get Ges str va zvans 203 Selecting audio delay presets cc 2ccccecceeeesceeeeseeeeeeseeseseeeseeeenenseceeenensenesseennecneeetoee 203 Selecting custom audio delay o oo eee aent aidia aeii NEE 204 Adjusting analog audio input leVel oo aid 205 Adjusting analog audio output leVel wee die 206 Muting analog audio outputs 0 eee ease sar 207 Selecting analog audio output line mode add 208 Selecting audio reference level iidadaa eee 209 Changing how audio sounds during jog ada ae 210 Modifying a Channel Timecode Settings About Profile XP series timecode isda see r 211 Using the internal timecode generators aaa aaa 212 Selecting the internal generator as a timecode source oo aaa 212 Using the same TC generator for multiple channels ccccceeeeeeteeeeeeeeeeteeees 213 Setting up an internal timecode GeneratOr ee eeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeseneeeeeneeeeeaaes 215 Profile XP System Guide 5 R Contents Chapter 8 Chapter 9 Chapter 10 Chapter 11 Recordin VITBa a a s se u iasas s a a aasasta i s das das aa ETE t da caast i d tas da fa m dad 217 Selecting a VITC input for a CHANNEL eee ar 217 Recording timecode fro
38. 2005 Manually Edit the hosts file on each Profile XP The following is shows the content of the default Windows NT hosts file with the new lines added All lines beginning with a are comments and can be ignored or deleted Copyright c 1993 1995 Microsoft Corp This is a sample HOSTS file used by Microsoft TCP IP for Windows NT This file contains the mappings of IP addresses to host names Each entry should be kept on an individual line The IP address should be placed in the first column followed by the corresponding host name The IP address and the host name should be separated by at least one space Additionally comments such as these may be inserted on individual lines or following the machine name denoted by a symbol For example 102 54 94 97 rhino acme com source server 38 25 63 10 x acme com x client host 127 0 0 1 localhost 192 168 99 1 Profile 1 192 168 100 1 Profile1_fcO 192 168 99 2 Profile2 192 168 100 2 Profile_fcO 3 Save the file and exit the text editor 4 Reboot your Profile XP unit 5 Copy the new hosts file onto all the other machine to save you editing it again Profile XP System Guide 271 panel as shown Fiber optic cables are provided with your Profile XP system If these cables are not used be sure to refer to Appendix B Connector Pin outs for cabling The Fibre Channel network interface uses a fiber optical connector located
39. 341 Player editing mark points 255 loading clips 256 player channels about 128 player recorder channels about 128 playing common setup problems 288 PortServer 251 common setup problems 296 power specifications 315 product damage precautions 16 Profile protocol 249 Profile XP logging on Windows NT 44 rear panel drawing 336 starting the system 43 system overview 34 Prolink 249 window described 250 protocol monitor 255 R rack mounting audio chassis 335 chassis dimensions 330 I O Panel 335 Profile XP system 329 334 Profile XP System Guide 347 348 T Index rack slide adjustments 334 RAID 3 LUNs 72 Real Time Subsystem 40 Real Time System 34 rear panel drawing I O Panel 337 PAC216 Audio Chassis 337 PFC500 338 PFC500E Expansion chassis 338 PFR500 339 PFR500E Expansion chassis 339 PFR600 340 PFR600E Expansion chassis 340 PFR700 341 PFR700E Expansion chassis 341 Profile XP chassis 336 XLR216 amp BNC216 Breakout panels 336 rear panel view 32 recorder channels about 128 recording common setup problems 288 red text resources displayed in 122 redundant RAID controller 66 redundant system disk 31 reference input 221 VITC reader 221 reference input system 148 reference input VITC reader setup 221 reference level audio 209 remote applications 251 remote control control mode selecting 252 control port selecting 252 current and preview clip 252 Ethernet 245 251 Prolink using 245 249 RS 422 prot
40. 40 000 feet Mechanical Shock Supplemental Data Class 5 30G Grass Valley 001131500 Random Vibration Requirement Operational Class 6 Grass Valley 001131500 Requirement Non Operational Class 5 Grass Valley 001131500 Transportation Requirement Grass Valley 001131500 Equipment Type Supplemental Data Information Technology Equipment Class Supplemental Data Class 1 Installation Category Requirement Category II Local level mains appliances portable equipment etc Pollution Degree Requirement Level 2 operating environment indoor use only Relative Humidity Requirement Operating 80 from 30 to 40 C Non Operating 90 from 30 to 60 C Do not operate with visible moisture on the circuit boards Profile XP System Guide 13 May 2005 Appendix B Connector Pin outs S VGA connector This appendix contains the pin outs for the connectors used in the Profile XP and I O Panel The Profile XP Media Platform S VGA monitor connector is a high density 15 pin female connector g Female ge 0g 10 5 6 6 15 UAI O 0624 35 Pin Signal Pin Signal Pin Signal 1 Analog Red Output 6 Ground 11 not used 2 Analog Green Output 7 Ground 12 not used 3 Analog Blue Output 8 Ground 13 Horizontal Sync 4 not used 9 Fused Vec 14 Vertical Sync 5 Ground 10 Ground 15 not used 13 May 2005 Profile XP System Guide 317 F Chapter B RJ 45 Ethernet connector Th
41. 57 saving 57 saving and restoring 57 T test equipment 309 text overlay on video monitor 185 timecode about 211 common setup problems 292 internal generators selecting 212 timecode generators settings 215 timecode burn in video monitor 186 timing see video input timing and video output timing Tool Tips 123 trimming a clip 255 troubleshooting Ethernet video network 304 Fibre Channel video network setup problems 299 U unbinding LUNs 72 uncompressed VBI information 163 V VBI blanking lines on video input 171 13 May 2005 Index erasing lines on video output 176 177 recording lines uncompressed 163 VDCP control 246 video data rate maximum 70 video file system about 72 volume name 73 volume name changing 85 video input erasing VBI lines 171 input signal status 168 loss of signal 173 modifying hardware settings 169 timing timing asynchronous feeds 150 VITC reader setup 169 video monitor 183 enabling dither 183 NTSC pedestal 184 text overlay enabling 185 timecode burn in 186 time code burn in selecting a timecode source 229 video output crosspoints 155 erasing VBI lines 176 177 modifying settings 174 removing ancillary data 180 signal loss 179 timing 143 E to E timed mode 146 system reference adjusting 148 zero timed mode 144 VITC generator setup 174 video output timing adjusting 143 146 video quality 156 defining custom presets 162 presets guidelines for selecting 156 see also storage ca
42. 7 Modifying a Channel Timecode Settings Recording or generating LTC The Profile XP system provides four LTC inputs and outputs Use Configuration Manager to setup a channel to record or output LTC To set up a channel to read or generate LTC 1 Select Channel Configuration in the Configuration Manager window 2 Click the tab for the channel you want to configure 3 Click on a timecode track in the configuration tree or click Add Track to add a new one 4 Click the Crosspoints button then do one or both of the following Select one of the LTC inputs to use as the timecode source for the channel Select one of the LTC outputs to use as the timecode output for the channel Channel Configuration Profile1 x By vet ay ve va By ves Name Type Add Channel in MPEG Player Recorder et Remove Channel 8 vtri iy Video E Track 1 Audio Configuration for Timecode Track 1 Q Track 1 amp 2 Add Track ly so 1 Delete Track Summary Timecode Input lt None gt TC Generator Any Refin VITC In4J3 SDI VITC IndJ SDI VITC lnB J7 SDI VITC4n4J9 SDI VITC 4nBJ9 LTC ln1 J3 LTC n2 J3 LTC In3J3 LTC In4 J3 Timecode Outputs LI lt None gt C SDI VITC OutaJ lea LTC Out1 J3 XT TTT OIL Te Generator Crosspoints Cancel Help 5 Click Finish to save your settings Profile XP System
43. Change button e In the Computer Name box enter a name for the Profile XP system The default name for each Profile XP system is the unit serial number You may want to use something more meaningful such as Profile1 or Profile2 f Click OK to close Computer Name dialog box Profile XP System Guide 13 May 2005 13 May 2005 Set machine name and IP address on each Profile XP system 7 Set up the IP address as follows a b C In the Network dialog box click the Protocols tab Highlight TCP IP Protocol and then click Properties Click the IP Address tab then click Specify IP Address Enter an IP address for the Profile XP If you are not connecting to an existing network you can choose any IP address you want Here are some examples of IP addresses and names you could use Computer Name Profile1 Ethernet Address 192 168 99 1 Computer Name Profile2 Ethernet Address 192 168 99 2 Verify the Subnet Mask is set to 255 255 255 0 Click OK to close the TCP IP Properties dialog box then click OK to close the Network dialog box When asked to reboot click NO then close the Control Panel Shutdown Windows NT then power off the Profile XP when the message is displayed to do so Profile XP System Guide 265 the rear panel as shown Ethernet cables are provided with your Profile XP system If these cables are not used be sure to refer to Appendix B Connector Pin outs for The Ethernet co
44. D grass valley Profile XP PVS SERIES MEDIA PLATFORMS SOFTWARE VERSION 5 4 p O q 071 8289 02 MAY 2005 A8 THOMSON BRAND Copyright Trademarks Disclaimer U S Government Restricted Rights Legend Revision Status Copyright 2005 Thomson Broadcast and Media Solutions Inc All rights reserved Printed in the United States of America This document may not be copied in whole or in part or otherwise reproduced except as specifically permitted under U S copyright law without the prior written consent of Thomson Broadcast and Media Solutions Inc P O Box 59900 Nevada City California 95959 7900 Grass Valley Profile and Profile XP are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Thomson Broadcast and Media Solutions Inc in the United States and or other countries Other trademarks used in this document are either registered trademarks or trademarks of the manufacturers or vendors of the associated products Thomson Broadcast and Media Solutions Inc products are covered by U S and foreign patents issued and pending Additional information regarding Thomson Broadcast and Media Solutions Inc trademarks and other proprietary rights may be found at www thomsongrassvalley com Product options and specifications subject to change without notice The information in this manual is
45. Do Not Operate With Suspected Failures Battery Replacement Do not operate this product from a power source that applies more than the voltage specified To prevent product overheating provide proper ventilation If you suspect there is damage to this product have it inspected by qualified service personnel To avoid damage replace only with the same or equivalent type recommended by the circuit board manufacturer Dispose of used battery according to the circuit board manufacturer s instructions Safety Terms and Symbols Terms in This Manual A A Terms on the Product Symbols on the Product A A 16 Profile XP System Guide These terms may appear in this manual WARNING Warning statements identify conditions or practices that can result in personal injury or loss of life CAUTION Caution statements identify conditions or practices that can result in damage to the equipment or other property These terms may appear on the product DANGER indicates a personal injury hazard immediately accessible as one reads the marking WARNING indicates a personal injury hazard not immediately accessible as you read the marking CAUTION indicates a hazard to property including the product The following symbols may appear on the product DANGER high voltage Protective ground earth terminal ATTENTION refer to manual 13 May 2005 Service Safety Summary Do Not Service Alone Disconnect Po
46. Encoder Board MPEG 2 compressed data is moved over the PCI bus to the Media Storage Subsystem For play mode MPEG 2 compressed data is routed from the Media Storage Subsystem over PCI bus to the MPEG 2 Decoder board where the data is processed Full bandwidth video is routed from the MPEG 2 Decoder board over the video transport fabric to the Video I O boards HD MPEG 2 Encoder and Decoder Boards PVS2000 and PVS3000 Series The HD MPEG 2 Encoder provides one channel of video processing The maximum rate is 80 Mb s while the minimum usable rate is 20 Mb s Video routing for HD in record and play modes is the same as for SD The HD MPEG 2 Decoder provides two channels of video processing Each decoder can play HD or SD MPEG 2 4 2 0 clips to either an SD or an HD SDI output up or down converting appropriately This ability is enable through the Definition Independent option which is included on all PVS 3500 system Video Processor board PVS1100 Series 13 May 2005 The two models of Video Processor board provide two or four channels of video compression and decompression Up to eight channels can be installed in a Profile XP system In their default configuration the codecs on the Video Processor board are set for DVCPRO 25 operation A codec can be reconfigured to be either an MPEG encoder an MPEG decoder or an MPEG codec with bit rates selectable from 4 25 Mb s at 4 2 2 Profile XP System Guide 41 T Chapter 1 Introducing
47. Guide 13 May 2005 Select a timecode source for timecode burn in Select a timecode source for timecode burn in After enabling the timecode burn in on the optional Video Monitor board you must select a timecode source for the Video Monitor output using Channel Configuration dialog box For information on enabling the timecode burn in see Enabling Video Monitor timecode burn in on page 186 To select timecode source for the Video Monitor burn in 1 Select Channel Configuration in the Configuration Manager window 2 Click the tab for the channel you want to configure 3 Click on a timecode track in the configuration tree or click Add Track to add a new one 4 Click the Crosspoints button then select the Video Monitor output listed in the Timecode Output list NOTE The Video Monitor is displayed in the Timecode Output list when it is assigned to the channel as a video output For example Monitor TC OutA J11 is listed in the following figure because Monitor OutA J11 is selected as a video output for the channel Refer to Selecting the video I Os used by a channel on page 155 for instructions on selecting the video outputs for a channel Channel Configuration Profile1 x By v S ver S ves amp vea Name Type Add Channel in MPEG Player Recorder Remove Channel aA Virl J Video H Track 1 Audio Q Track 1 amp 2 Add Track yy PA Delete Track Summary 1
48. High speed Fibre Channel networking up to 250 Mb s 100BaseT Ethernet networking up to 30 Mb s Remote control including Remote Applications over Ethernet RS 422 control protocol including AMP VDCP Odetics BVW or Profile protocols GPI Trigger 8 I O PVS 1000 features include Up to 8 standard definition SD channels of broadcast quality video PVS 1000 Series channel configurations by model Model NumberofMPEG NumberofMPEG Channel Number Encoder Boards Decoder Boards Configuration PVS1022 1 1 2 in 2 out PVS1024 1 2 2 in 4 out PVS1026 1 3 2 in 6 out PVS 1042 2 1 4 in 2 out PVS1044 2 2 4 in 4 out PVS1062 3 1 6 in 2 out PVS 1002 0 1 0 in 2 out PVS 1004 0 2 0 in 4 out PVS 1006 0 6 0 in 6 out PVS1008 0 4 0 in 8 out a 13 May 2005 MPEG Encoder and Decoder boards in PVS1000 series are Standard Definition MPEG 2 4 2 2 Main Level from 4 50 Mb s long GoP for SD SMPTE 259M 270MB Serial Digital I O Analog monitor optional 525 60 or 625 50 operation accepts NTSC PAL Profile XP System Guide 21 22 T Chapter 1 Introducing the Profile XP Media Platform PVS1100 features include Upto 8 standard definition SD channels of broadcast guality video PVS 1100 Series channel configurations by model Model Number of video Channel Number codecs Configuration PVS1102 2 2 play record PVS1104 4 4 play record PVS1106 6 6 play record
49. Information Technology Equipment including Electrical Business Equipment Third Edition 1995 IEC 950 Safety of Information Technology Equipment including Electrical Business Equipment Second edition 1991 CAN CSA C22 2 No 950 95 Safety of Information Technology Equipment including Electrical Business Equipment EN60950 Safety of Information Technology Equipment including Electrical Business Equipment 18 Profile XP System Guide 13 May 2005 Chapter 1 Introducing the Profile XP Media Platform The Profile XP Media Platform provides a multi channel high bandwidth platform for the storage and manipulation of video and audio in professional applications The Profile XP Media Platform has a wide range of capabilities from a stand alone digital disk recorder to being part of a large network of video servers The Profile XP Media Platform can be used in a wide variety of applications including spot insertion program delay store and forward and multi channel replay Profile XP Media Platform features 13 May 2005 Encoders and decoders in the PVS1000 models process standard definition MPEG 2 video while encoders and decoders in the PVS2000 models process high definition MPEG 2 video The PVS1100 Series uses video codecs to process video You can configure each of the codecs to encode and decode video using the DVCAM DVCPRO or MPEG 2 compression standards The PVS1100 Series processes video using DVCAM DVCPRO 25
50. Introducing the GVG Disk Utility cence renee as 75 Binding disks and creating a video file system 0 id 77 Configuring hot spare drives aaa 83 Changing the video file system volume name iiiaasa ee 85 Expanding Storage sid i s trase eee HEA AN oe ed aed ek ed 87 Unbinding LUNs for reconfiguration 0 0 0 eee 91 Performing RAID storage maintenance using GVG BISK UtIlMY ss Sises taa ta sted dat juvat a aiaa aE 93 System reboot Procedure in oaa a AE a NENE aE aN 94 Checking RAID controller microcode version aaa 95 Loading RAID controller microcode All models ee s 96 Identifying disk modules prior to removal ee ea 98 Performing PFR500 maintenance tasks ccccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeeeeaaes 100 Performing PFR600 maintenance tasks cc eeeceeeseeeeenneeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeaeeteeaeeeeneeeess 107 Performing PFR700 maintenance tasks cc eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeneeeeseeeeeeeeaeetesaeeeesaeeeess 113 Resetting the PFC500 system clock ecccceesceeeeeeeeeeneeeeeaeeeeneeeeeneeeeenaeeseneeeeeneeeeee 117 Adding or Removing Channels Using the Channel Configuration dialog DOX ee eee aaa 119 Displaying the Channel Configuration dialog DOX ec eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeneeeenneeeeee 120 Working with Channels cccccceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseaaeeeeeeecaaeeeeeeseceeaeeeseseceeeeeeeessnaeeeees 121 Default settings for channels
51. J3 O LTC 0ut4 J3 TG Generator Crosspoints Profile XP System Guide 223 da Chapter 7 Modifying a Channel Timecode Settings 224 4 Select SDI VITC Out in the Timecode Output list NOTE The video outputs listed in the Timecode Output list correspond to those assigned to the channel For example SDI VITC OutA J7 is listed in the following figure because SDI OutA J7 is selected as the video output for the channel If you change the video output for a channel the Timecode Output list also changes a v S v vs Sy vea Name Type Add Channel in MPEG Player Recorder hi Remove Channel vtri Video 4 IH Track 1 Add Track Audio Q Track 1 amp 2 Delete Track I Timecode Ei Data Summary Configuration for Timecode Track 1 Timecode Input Timecode Output s Pd SDI VITC OutaJ5 L HD ANC LTC IndJ J HD ANC LT C In J9 TE Generator Crosspoints Cancel Help 5 Click Finish to save your settings and close the Channel Configuration dialog box Profile XP System Guide 13 May 2005 Setting up the VITC generator on a video output Setting up the VITC generator on a video output NOTE This page appears only if the system reference source is Reference Black and one or more standard definition SDI boards are installed HD SDI outputs do not appear in the VITC Setup list because VITC as A
52. Manager remotely Use the Configuration Manager already running or resolve the conflict with the remote user Can t start Configuration Manager locally Configuration Manager is already running or someone is connected remotely Use the session already running or terminate the remote session Profile XP System Guide 295 296 Chapter 12 Solving Common Setup Problems Channel control problems This troubleshooting aid provides corrective action for some common control problems Search the table for the problem you are experiencing then try the corrective action Some problems have more than one corrective action Problem Possible Cause Corrective Action VdrPanel RS 422 Control The Profile XP system fails to respond Incorrect protocol selected Refer to Setting up RS 422 remote control in VdrPanel on page 246 VdrPanel RS 422 Control The Profile XP system fails to respond Controller connected to the wrong RS 422 port Check for proper connection Prolink Cannot open channel Channel names do not match those expected by the controller Define new channels or rename existing ones Refer to Adding and configuring a new channel on page 126 or Entering channel name and description on page 126 Prolink Cannot open channel Controller connected to the wrong RS 422 port Check the title bar ofthe Prolink window and verify the RS 422
53. May 2005 Testing the Fibre Channel Video network Testing Fibre Channel name resolution and connectivity Use this procedure to test for Fibre Channel network connectivity and proper name resolution This procedure uses the Test button in the Configuration Manager Network dialog box To verify name resolution and Fibre Channel connectivity 1 Open Configuration Manager then click Network Network Page 1 of 1 Fibre Network 2 Click the Test 13 May 2005 Profile XP System Guide 301 T Chapter 12 Solving Common Setup Problems 3 In the Ping Window select the Ping the Interface option Ping Window x Ping Result C Ping the Site fc0 Ping the Interface C Ping all the Interfaces Ping Close 4 Type fc0 in the text box then click Ping Make sure to enter a zero not an O All Profile systems connected to Fibre Channel are asked to respond Wait for ping results 5 Check the Ping Results window then do one of the following a If only the local system responded there is a problem with the Fibre Channel network connectivity Verify the Fibre Channel connections for all systems then review all configuration steps under Setting up a simple video network Fibre Channel on page 268 Repeat step 4 If there is still a problem refer to the Profile XP Service Manual b Ifall systems responded but a Profile system name is missing or incorrect there is an err
54. Next to navigate to Video Output page 2 of 3 Video Output Page 2 of 3 x Vertical Interval Setup r Vertical Ancillary Data Packets Which lines will be reserved for vertical ancillary data packets SDI OutB J5 I Clear lines between fo Ua a ae VE CD fiz and M YITC Generation Which lines should be used after vertical ancillary data packet insertion V Generate VITC timecode on Line 1 12 7 Line 2 14 7 Select Al 3 Select a video output from the list or click Select All to configure all the video outputs at the same time 4 Perform one of the following If you do not want to insert any ancillary data clear the Clear lines between check box If you want to insert ancillary data in the vertical interval select the Clear lines between check box then select the starting and ending lines numbers using the sliders 13 May 2005 Profile XP System Guide 177 T Chapter 5 Modifying a Channel Video Settings Which lines will be reserved for vertical ancillary data packets V Clear lines between fr 32 Defeuk and fi 5 Click Finish to saving your settings 178 Profile XP System Guide 13 May 2005 Selecting freeze or black for video output signal loss Selecting freeze or black for video output signal loss You can select whether you want the Profile XP system to display black or freeze on the last frame of video when the video o
55. PVS1108 8 8 play record e DVCAM video compression e DVCPRO 25 video compression e DVCPRO 50 video compression with 50 Mb s option e MPEG 2 4 2 0 Main Level from 4 to 15 Mb s long GoP e MPEG 2 4 2 2 Main Level from 4 25 Mb s long GoP or up to 50 Mb s with 50 Mb s option e MPEG D10 I frame at 30 40 or 50 Mb s CBG requires 50 Mb s option Back to back playout of all formats on any codec e New real time processor board with improved processing capacity provides greater bandwidth for fibre channel transfers concurrent channel operations etc e 525 60 or 625 50 operation accepts NTSC PAL Profile XP System Guide 13 May 2005 PVS 2000 features include 13 May 2005 Profile XP Media Platform features e Up to 4 high definition HD channels of broadcast quality video PVS 2000 Series channel configurations by model Model Number of HD Number of HD Channel Number Encoder Boards Decoder Boards Configuration PVS2002 0 1 0 in 2 out PVS2004 0 2 0 in 4 out PVS2012 1 1 1 in 2 out PVS2013 1 2 1 in 3 out PVS2022 2 2 2 in 2 out e MPEG 2 4 2 0 Main Level from 20 80 Mb s long GoP for HD e HD SMPTE 292M 1 485 Gbs Serial Digital I O includes downconverted SD SDI and composite analog monitor with text overlay and timecode burn in e Up conversion of MPEG 2 4 2 0 clips with aspect ratio configuration requires Definition Independent option e 1080i and 720p line r
56. Page 3 of 3 x Audio Timing Use the following digital audio format C 16 bit PCM C 24 bit PCM Audio Channels 11 12 14 Audio Channels 13 amp 14 14 Audio Channels 15 amp 16 14 Delay the audio by the following number of samples 0 samples 0 fields Einish Cancel i 3 Select an audio pair from the list or click Select All 4 Select the audio storage format as required by your system then click Finish 202 Profile XP System Guide 13 May 2005 Adjusting audio delay Adjusting audio delay You can adjust the fixed audio delay through the Profile XP system in order to meet system requirements Audio delay adjustment range is from 0 to 2 fields Adjust audio delay by selecting an audio delay preset or by selecting custom and entering the number of audio samples of delay between 0 and 2 fields Selecting audio delay presets To select fixed audio delay 1 Select Audio Routing in the Configuration Manager window The Audio Routing dialog box appears 2 Click Next to navigate to Audio Routing page 3 AudioR outing Page 3 of 3 x Audio Timi Use the following digital audio format 16 bit PCM C 24 bit PCM Audio Channels 15 amp 16 14 Delay the audio by the following number of samples 0 samples 0 fields 7 0 samples 0 fields 800 samples 1 field 1600 samples 2 fields Custom lt Back Newt gt Finish Cancel ea 3 Select an audio pair from the
57. RAID controller settings are not set to the defaults required by the current Profile XP software or Fiber Channel SCSI software installed If you do not receive the message your controller settings are correct To check and restore PFR600 RAID controller settings 1 Start GVG Disk Utility then perform one of the following steps Ifyou receive an incorrect RAID Controller settings message when GVG Disk Utility opens continue with step 2 which follows GYG Disk Utility x The controller settings are N T correct Do you want to restore to default controller settings Select OK to continue or Cancel to abort OK cet Ifyou do not receive an incorrect RAID Controller settings message when GVG Disk Utility opens your settings are correct 2 In the incorrect settings message box click OK to restore default settings 3 On receiving operation successful message click OK RAID Controller status is now reported as Correct in the right hand status pane Profile XP System Guide 109 T Chapter 3 110 EA GYG Disk Utility File View Tools Help Working with RAID Storage Using GVG Disk Utility Pile Es mm FFR600 z Bound UnBound a Microcode Version Controller Settings Serial Number Slot IP Address Peer Controller Status Peer Microcode Version Peer Controller Settings Peer Serial Number Peer Slot Peer IP Address
58. System to start GVG Disk Utility 3 Expand the tree view and identify bound LUNs and unbound disks by their placement in the hierarchy of the tree view 4 If there are unbound LUNs displayed in the tree view you must perform the following steps otherwise proceed to step f a To bind unbound disks right click the Unbound node for a controller then select Bind LUNs in the context menu Peer controllers that share the same set of disks are automatically selected as a pair 13 May 2005 Profile XP System Guide 87 T Chapter 3 Working with RAID Storage Using GVG Disk Utility The Binding LUN dialog box opens showing all unbound disks for the controller listed in the Available Disk list Binding LUN on ControllerO x LUN TYPE RAID 3 7 Available Disks r Selected Disks Flashes the drive lights Identify Disks Cancel OK b Select RAID 3 using the LUN TYPE drop down box c Select five contiguous disks then click the add button 2 to add them to the Selected Disks list TIP Use shift click or control click to select disks NOTE As an aid in identifying a disk module s physical location select it in the Selected Disks list then click Identify Disks This causes the disk drive LED to flash d Click OK to close the Binding LUN dialog box and begin the binding process The Progress Report dialog box opens showing the status of the binding process e Repeat st
59. TTL open collector or contact closures GPI Output Supplemental Data Outputs are open drain drivers Max voltage when outputs are open 30V Max current when outputs are closed 200ma 13 May 2005 Profile XP System Guide 313 314 Chapter A Analog Audio Characteristics Description Through Gain Requirement 1 1 dB Supplemental Data Non mix mode each of four channels Frequency Response Requirement 20 Hz to 20 kHz with between 0 5 dB 2 dB maximum deviation from flatness at 48 kHz sample rate Input Impedance Supplemental Data 600 Q or 20 kQ each channel Input Output Signal Levels Supplemental Data Nominal Line Level 0 dBu Nominal Peak Line Level 9 dBu Digital Clipping 18 dBu 16 bit quantization THD N at 1020 Hz and 60 Hz Requirement 70 dBm 0 031 at 9dBu input Digital Audio Characteristics Description Bit Rate Supplemental Data 270 Mb S Return Loss Supplemental Data 15 dB from 5 MHz to 270 MHz Input Impedance Supplemental Data 75 O Output Amplitude Reguirement 800 mV p p 80 mV Output DC Level Reguirement 0 V 0 5 V Output Rise and Fall Time Requirement 400 pS to 1000 pS between 20 and 80 Jitter Requirement lt either 0 2ui or 720 pS p p Profile XP System Guide 13 May 2005 Profile XP System Power Specifications Profile XP System Power Specifications Profile XP system power specifications are shown i
60. The Add Track dialog box appears Add Track 3 Select the Data option in the Add Track dialog box then click Add A new data track appears in the configuration tree under the Data icon 232 Profile XP System Guide 13 May 2005 Selecting the video I Os used for ancillary data Selecting the video I Os used for ancillary data To assign a video input and output for an ancillary data track 1 Choose Channel Configuration in the Configuration Manager window The Channel Configuration dialog box appears Channel Configuration P S3000 Pr HD WEG Perec 2 Click the tab for the channel you want to modify 3 Click the Data icon in the configuration tree then click the data Track1 you want to configure If there are no data tracks go to the instructions for adding an ancillary data track 4 Click the Crosspoints button then select the video input and video output you want to use A video output will only appear in the list if it has been selected on a video track for this channel 13 May 2005 Profile XP System Guide 233 T Chapter 8 Modifying a Channel Ancillary Data Channel Configuration P S 3000 veel HD MPEG Player Recorder _ lt None gt _ lt None gt PJ HD SDI Int J7 PJ HD SDI OutaJ For information on why resources appear dimmed red or in use refer to Why resources appear dimmed red or in use on page 122 5 Click Finish to save yo
61. a permanent member of the LUN PFR 600 The replacement disk module is in a free state The hot spare drive remains a member of the LUN You must use the GVG Disk Utility to bind the replacement drive as a hot spare drive to make it available PFC700 The replacement disk drive module is rebuilt and the hot spare drive reverts to hot spare status 4 Since hot spare drives remain members of the LUN disk modules in a LUN can become physically separated in time Before replacing a failed disk module always use the GVG Disk Utility to physically identify it 13 May 2005 Profile XP System Guide 73 T Chapter 3 Working with RAID Storage Using GVG Disk Utility If the drives you want to designate as hot spares are bound as part of a data LUN you must unbind the drives first then bind them as hot spares Refer to Unbinding LUNs for reconfiguration on page 91 You can configure any disk in the array as a hot spare drive however hot spare drives are available only to RAID Controller to which they are connected 74 Profile XP System Guide 13 May 2005 Introducing the GVG Disk Utility Introducing the GVG Disk Utility This section includes the following e GVG Disk Utility user interface overview e Checking storage subsystem status GVG Disk Utility user interface overview The GVG Disk Utility user interface includes a tree view in the left hand pane and a status information area displayed in the r
62. and their video and audio I O connections Default channel Video I O type connections Audio connections Timecode I O Recorder 1 SDI or HD SDI 2 4 or 8 audio I Os Uses the internal video input timecode generator 1 analog monitor b Player 1 SDI or HD SDI 2 4 or 8 audio I Os Recorded timecode is video output used to generate VITC on the SDI video output or insert VITC in the HD SDI output Player Recorder 1 SDI video input and 2 4 or 8 audio I Os Uses the internal output timecode generator 1 analog monitor b Recorded timecode is used to generate VITC on the SDI video output 2 The number of audio I Os is determined by your Profile XP model and the number of Audio boards installed b Available on the PVS 1000 and PVS 1100 Series only if the optional Video Monitor board is installed Input monitoring is always available as a connection on the HD SDI board You can use the information in this System Guide to modify default channel settings to satisfy the needs of your system For more information about channels refer to Chapter 4 Adding or Removing Channels Profile XP System Guide 13 May 2005 Video compression for standard definition Video compression for standard definition The Profile XP Media Platform uses a variety of standard definition video compression formats MPEG 2 DVCPRO 25 DVCPRO 50 and MPEG D10 Files of different compression types can be stored concurrently
63. appears The Local label follows the name of the current machine 13 May 2005 Profile XP System Guide 283 T Chapter 11 Setting up a Simple Network Add Remove Machine Network Host List Add Remove Cancel Help d Click Add The Add Network Host dialog box appears Add Network Host New Host Name fe Cancel e Enter the name of the other machine in the New Host Name box Profile2 for example then click OK The new host name is added to the network host list as shown Add Remove Machine Network Host List Profile ai Remoy Cancel Help f Click OK to close the Add Remove Machine window The Connection Status message box appears showing the progress of new connection then the Media Manager window reappears including the machine name just added 284 Profile XP System Guide 13 May 2005 Test the Ethernet video network using Media Manager Untitled Media Manager _ Of x File Edit View Tools Help C Es El ie xl E Contents of Proiflel EXT default IE aft Profile Network Profile1 Local bit Modified 00 00 05 20 MPEG 03 02 00 07 47 AM s FNA 45 2 00 00 05 15 MPEG 03 02 00 05 15 PM BA default_back ey Recycled Profile2 clip icon EXT p gt default default _back Wt Recycled default bin volume icon contents pane 7 Power on the next Profile XP system and wait for it to initialize then repe
64. can enter the name to identify the new channel You can also enter text into the channel description window The channel description is displayed along with the channel name in Profile applications and can help operators select channels For example a channel description could be Weekend news setup or Use for play channel in TimeDelay To enter channel name and description 1 Enter a channel name in the Name text box 2 Click the channel icon in the configuration tree to display the Channel Description text box 126 Profile XP System Guide 13 May 2005 Entering channel name and description Channel Configuration Profile1 re Rea m Name text box Qi Track 3 amp 4 43 Timecode Description box ff Track 1 Use for TimeDelay Record Channel 3 Enter a channel description in the Description text box The channel description is displayed with other channel properties when the Summary button is selected See Using the Summary button to review channel settings on page 125 Profile applications can also show the channel descriptions to help you select the appropriate channel 13 May 2005 Profile XP System Guide 127 T Chapter 4 Adding or Removing Channels Selecting the channel type You can use the Type drop down list to change the channel type Channel types are described in the following table Channel Type Resource Used Description DVCAM Player
65. default name is created 256 Profile XP System Guide 13 May 2005 Chapter 1 1 Setting up a Simple Network This chapter describes how to set up a simple network of Profile XP systems Procedures are included for setting up the Windows NT network and both Profile video network options Sections in the chapter include e About Profile Networking e Setting up a simple Windows NT network Setting up a simple video network Fibre Channel Setting up a simple video network Ethernet About Profile Networking Profile XP network interfaces include a standard Ethernet interface and optional video network interfaces which include a 1Gbs Fibre Channel interface and a 100BaseT Ethernet interface Both video network options require the Windows NT network connection About Windows NT networking All Profile XP systems include a 10 100BaseT Ethernet interface for Windows NT networking Connecting the Profile XP to a network not only gives you access to all the standard Windows NT networking features but also allows remote control and monitoring of your Profile XP system using an NT Workstation running Profile applications The Windows NT Ethernet network connection is also required when using either the Fibre Channel or Ethernet video network options Refer to the procedures in Setting up a simple Windows NT network on page 264 when you are ready to set up the Windows NT network Profile XP Ethernet Profile XP
66. dialog box opens displaying a unbind status 8 Repeat step 4 through step 7 to unbind LUNs on additional controllers if needed 9 Upon 100 completion click Close in the Progress Report dialog box This completes the unbind procedure Unbinding LUNs PFR500 and PFR600 Storage Systems PFR500 and PFR600 RAID controllers do not allow unbinding individual LUNs You must unbind all LUNs to reconfigure your storage system AN CAUTION In this release you must use Unbind All LUNs in the Controller context menu Do not use the Unbind LUN entry in any other context menu To unbind LUNs perform the following 1 Start Configuration Manager using the desktop shortcut or by selecting Start Programs Profile Applications Configuration Manager 2 In Configuration Manager click File System to start the GVG Disk Utility 3 Expand the tree view to identify bound LUNs 4 Right click the Controller icon then select Unbind All LUNs in the context menu The unbind all LUN operation begins 5 On receiving the warning message click OK 6 On receiving the Operation Successful message click OK This completes the unbind procedure You can now bind disk modules in a new configuration as required 92 Profile XP System Guide 13 May 2005 Performing RAID storage maintenance using GVG Disk Utility Performing RAID storage maintenance using GVG Disk Utility The maintenance procedures for your RAID storage system include th
67. eal You can change the volume name at any time without affecting the media files stored on the system 6 Enter a volume name or accept the default name then click Next File System Wizard Page 2 of 2 x RAID3 LUNs This wizard can create a video file spstem using all LUNs bound as RAID3 Creating a new file system deletes all media files if a file system already exists Should the wizard create a new file system C No set the volume name only lt Back Cancel 7 Select Yes create a file system using all RAID3 LUNs then click Finish 8 Click OK in the warning message box The Progress Report window appears showing the create file system task status 90 Profile XP System Guide 13 May 2005 Unbinding LUNs for reconfiguration Progress Report Current Progress Not Busy Commands List Command Comment Progress Completed Making file system Done 100 15 16 58 9 Upon 100 completion click Close in Progress Report window 10 When the reboot message appears click OK then reboot the Windows operating system on the Profile XP media platform Afterward the system is ready for operation Unbinding LUNs for reconfiguration Unbinding may be necessary to reconfigure the disk modules in the RAID storage system You must unbind a LUN before you can bind the disk modules in a different configuration When redeploying an Expansion Chassis that was bound using a PFR500 or PF
68. exist somewhere in the Profile XP unit Pull here to open each side standby On LED LA f Standby On System Chassis Pull Switch Fault LED 0624 5 13 May 2005 Profile XP System Guide 29 T Chapter 1 Introducing the Profile XP Media Platform The front panel features two accessory doors that provide access to several storage devices The following describes the storage devices installed on the standard Profile XP system system Disk contains the Windows NT operating system and Profile XP system software and applications 1 44MB Floppy Disk Drive CD ROM Drive for maintaining the Windows NT operating system and performing Profile XP system software upgrades NOTE If an accessory door is accidentally dislocated from its hinges you can easily pop it back into place 052505 2505250525050 9808080808080808080 0808080908080808080 System Floppy CD ROM 1 Disk Drive Disk Drive Drive 30 P
69. furnished for informational use only is subject to change without notice and should not be construed as a commitment by Thomson Broadcast and Media Solutions Inc Thomson Broadcast and Media Solutions Inc assumes no responsibility or liability for any errors or inaccuracies that may appear in this publication Use duplication or disclosure by the United States Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in subparagraph c 1 ii of the Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software clause at DFARS 252 277 7013 or in subparagraph c 1 and 2 of the Commercial Computer Software Restricted Rights clause at FAR 52 227 19 as applicable Manufacturer is Thomson Broadcast and Media Solutions Inc P O Box 59900 Nevada City California 95959 7900 U S A Rev Date Description December 1 1999 Initial release of the Profile XP System Guide 071 0624 00A December 6 1999 Updated to include version 4 0 1 features 071 0624 01 July 21 2000 Updated for high definition features in v 4 1 071 8048 00 November 17 2000 Updated to include support for 73 GB RAID drives 071 8048 01 January 17 2001 Supports new system processor board connections 071 8048 02 July 13 2001 Updated to support version 5 0 071 8112 00 June 17 2002 Updated to include additional RAID systems and new disk utility 071 8112 01 September 19 2002 Updated to support version 5 1 Profile XP system s
70. given video data rate The type of video and how it will be used largely determines the compression settings you should select It is important to understand the type of material you will be broadcasting and select the appropriate compression settings Use the following guidelines when choosing one of the video quality presets or defining and selecting a custom preset For more information on the relationship between picture quality and the type of video data rate chrominance sampling method and GoP look for 156 Profile XP System Guide 13 May 2005 Guidelines for selecting Video Quality Presets the white paper An Analysis of MPEG Encoding Techniques on Picture Quality on the Grass Valley Web site You can also refer to commercially available books on video compression Guidelines for selecting video quality presets e Data Rate Selecting the data rate tells the encoder how much data or how many bits to use to compress the picture Generally set as high as possible to obtain the storage capacity needed Also consider the following Sports footage video containing lots of motion requires significantly higher video data rates than an interview show Clips with lots of chrominance typical of many commercials require higher data rates to maintain quality Higher data rates should be used for any production work that requires multiple generations or when the material is subject to external up conversion to HD NOTE In
71. here along with the Fibre Channel cable specifications Metagig Connector Plnouts Pin Mnemonic Description 1 TXP H Differential Transmit Data high 2 GND Signal Ground 3 TXNL Differential Transmit Data low 4 NC 5 GND Signal Ground 6 RXNL Differential Receive Data low 7 Vcc 5VDC 8 RXP H Differential Receive Data high 9 GND Signal Ground 10 GND Signal Ground DB 9 Connector Pinouts Pin Mnemonic Description 1 TXP H Differential Transmit Data high 2 Vcc 5VDC 3 GND Signal Ground 4 key 5 RXP H Differential Receive Data high 6 TXNL Differential Transmit Data low 7 GND Signal Ground 8 GND Signal Ground 9 RXN L Differential Receive Data low Fibre Channel Cable Specifications The Fibre Channel cable specifications are as follows Cable type Maximum length Connector type 13 May 2005 Shielded 75 ohm twin axial 30 meters 98 feet between PFC 500 and Profile XP system lt or 10m 33 feet unequalized gt 10 m 33 feet equalized 0 3 m 1 foot min 10m 33 feet max between PFC 500 and PFC 500E DB 9 on one end and Berg Metagig on the other Profile XP System Guide 325 F Chapter B Fibre Channel Network board connector The Fibre Channel Network board has one fiber optic connector for connecting to Profile video networks Connector and cable specifications are shown here Connector type SC Dup
72. line numbers to detect the VITC signals Automatic detection is the default setting Use automatic detection unless there are two sets of VITC on the input signal To set up the video input VITC reader 1 Select Video Input in the Configuration Manager window The Video Input dialog box appears 2 Click Next to navigate to Video Input page 2 of 3 Video Input Page 2 of 3 x VITC Setup What lines should be used to read VITC timecode Look for timecode between lines f_ 10 21 and Gas aaa ie Kai J 22 Which lines should be erased in the vertical blanking interval VBI after timecode is read Erase lines between and En coe i 3 Select a video input from the list or click Select All to configure all video inputs at the same time 13 May 2005 Profile XP System Guide 219 T Chapter 7 Modifying a Channel Timecode Settings 4 Select one of the VITC timecode options as follows Auto Detection Select the Detect the VITC signal automatically check box then type or select the range of lines you want the system to search for VITC Manual Detection Clear the Detect the VITC signal automatically check box then type or select the line numbers where the VITC pair can be found 5 Click Finish to save your settings 220 Profile XP System Guide 13 May 2005 Setting up the VITC reader on the Reference Input Setting up the VITC reader on the Reference In
73. optional The Video Monitor board provides four analog composite video outputs for monitoring purposes The outputs include Text Overlay and Timecode burn in 40 Profile XP System Guide 13 May 2005 Board level block diagram Audio Board The Audio board provides sixteen channels of 16 or 24 bit audio I O An additional Audio Board may be added as an option for a total of 32 channels of audio Audio I O formats include Embedded e AES EBU e Analog The Audio board includes a rear panel 80 pin interface connector for AES EBU audio I O For AES EBU operation a breakout panel is required For operation with analog signals the PAC 216 Analog Audio Chassis is required for conversion of analog signals to AES EBU Embedded audio is extracted from the video inputs by the Video I O boards and routed over the Video Audio Transport Fabric to the Audio board Audio processed by the Audio board is routed over the PCI bus to the Media Storage Subsystem The audio board does not compress the audio for storage but can pass through pre compressed Dolby E and AC 3 compressed signals MPEG 2 Encoder and Decoder Boards PVS1000 Series Each MPEG 2 Encoder or MPEG 2 Decoder board provides 2 channels of video processing Encoding bit rates are from 4 Mb s to 50 Mb s Up to four of these type boards can be installed in a Profile XP system For record mode video is routed from the Video I O boards over the video transport fabric to the MPEG 2
74. or disabling NTSC pedestal When the Profile XP system is configured in the 525 60 standard the Video Monitor board generates NTSC signals You can select whether or not the NTSC output includes the 7 5 IRE pedestal Use NTSC with Pedestal if your video monitors were calibrated using signals with 7 5 IRE setup To enable or disable NTSC pedestal 1 Select Video Monitor in the Configuration Manager window Page for the Video Monitor dialog box appears Video Monitor Page 1 of 2 x Video Monitor Setup Monitor Name Monitor DutCJ11 Monitor Out8J11 Monitor OutD J11 Physical Location Slot 5 BNC 1 top Dither output lV NTSC with Pedestal rn ree 2 Choose a monitor output in the Video Monitor Setup list or click Select All 3 Use the check box to enable or disable the 7 5 IRE pedestal as required 4 Click Finish to save your settings 184 Profile XP System Guide 13 May 2005 Configuring Text Overlay on the Video Monitor output Configuring Text Overlay on the Video Monitor output Use text overlay to generate characters on the Video Monitor outputs for source identification Depending on whether you choose large or small text size you can display the following Text Size Number of Maximum Characters Text lines per line Large 6 21 Small 12 12 To configure text overlay 1 Select Video Monitor in the Configuration Manager window The Video Monitor dialog box app
75. page 103 e Forcing a replacement drive to rebuild on page 103 e Starting and Stopping disk initialization on page 104 e Checking and restoring default PFR500 RAID Controller settings on page 104 e Checking PFR 500 disk settings on page 106 e Restoring PFR500 disk settings on page 106 Downloading PFR500 disk drive firmware When upgrading your Profile XP System Software you may be instructed in the software release notes to upgrade the PFR500 disk drive firmware This allows you to take advantage of the disk drive enhancements and benefit from improved performance and reliability To determine your disk drive type and current firmware version select a disk drive icon in the GVG Disk Utility tree view then note the drive properties reported in the right hand pane Use the following procedure if you need to download disk drive firmware NOTE The disk drives on each controller are upgraded one at a time which can take as long as 2 minutes per drive Also the Disk Utility allows selecting multiple controllers for disk firmware upgrades however upgrades are handled one controller at a time Take this into consideration when scheduling the upgrade To download disk drive firmware 1 In the GVG Disk Utility right click a controller in the tree view then select Advanced Download Disk Firmware in the context menu 2 In the Open dialog box locate the c profile microcode directory then select the l
76. pair 2 Check that the peer controller status is Offline 3 Right click the controller icon then select Advanced Enable A Controller or Enable B Controller 4 Click OK to continue Profile XP System Guide 111 GE T Chapter 3 Working with RAID Storage Using GVG Disk Utility 5 Check that the peer controller status is now Online The controller is now online as the backup controller Disabling a PFR600 disk module for removal In the event that one of the PFR 600 disk modules is operational but begins to report faults through various log files and status indicators you can choose to disable the disk module and remove it Disabling the disk module and removing it in this way avoids momentary interruptions in signal output that can occur if the disk fails After replacing the disabled disk module you must start disk rebuild manually To disable a PFR600 disk module for removal 1 Start GVG Disk Utility 2 Expand the tree view to display bound disks 3 Right click the disk module icon then select Advanced Disable Drive NOTE Disks modules may not be visible in the tree view if they are part of a newly bound LUN You must restart your RAID chassis and the Profile XP Media Platform to allow the drive modules to be seen in GVG Disk Utility 4 Click OK to continue The disk is disabled and the disk access LED flashes blue 5 Remove and replace the disk module Refer to procedures in the PFR600 Instruction Man
77. part of a newly bound LUN You must restart your RAID chassis and the Profile XP Media Platform to allow the drive modules to be seen in GVG Disk Utility 4 Click OK to continue The disk is disabled and the disk fault LED is steady amber 5 Remove and replace the disk module Refer to procedures in the PFR 700 Instruction Manual 6 Wait approximately 1 minute for the disk to initialize The disk ready LED is flashing 7 To check rebuild status do one of the following e Select the replacement disk icon in GVG Disk Utility then view the disk status in the right hand pane You may need to refresh the GVG Disk Utility display On completion the drive status changes from Rebuilding to Online Open the Progress dialog box by clicking View Progress Report NOTE If you accidentally disable the wrong disk module you can enable it again by removing it and then replacing it in the chassis Configuring PFR700 network and SNMP settings Network and SNMP settings are set and stored on the LAN card Therefore the PFR700 RAID chassis including its one or two RAID controllers is a single networked device This is different than other PFR series RAID devices in which each controller is a networked device You can use the GVG Disk Utility to configure the following settings for the PFR 700 RAID chassis e IP address Subnet mask e Gateway Address e SNMP trap destinations To configure these settings do the following
78. part of an Open SAN disregard the previous step and refer to the instructions in the Open SAN Instruction Manual for powering off and powering on the Open SAN This concludes the Loading Disk Firmware procedure Replacing a failed disk module In the event of a disk drive failure you ll repair the system by replacing the disk module as soon as possible Refer to the PFR 700 Instruction Manual for information on removing and replacing disk modules NOTE Always use GVG Disk Utility to physically identify the failed disk module Accidently removing the wrong disk module can destroy all media on the disk drives See Identifying disk modules prior to removal on page 3 98 On inserting the replacement disk module the RAID controller automatically starts rebuilding the drive You can verify rebuild status by looking at the disk access LED on the front of the disk module or by checking disk status in GVG Disk Utility To check disk status in GVG Disk Utility select the disk module icon in the device tree Status is reported in the right hand pane On completion the disk drive status changes from Rebuilding to Online You may need to refresh the GVG Disk Utility display Disabling a PFR700 RAID controller for removal This feature is provided for PFR 700 RAID chassis that have redundant RAID controller modules installed In the event that one of the RAID controllers appears operational but also reports faults through various log fil
79. placement of equipment in your equipment rack bear in mind the following The Profile XP requires six inches 15 25 cm of clearance behind the rear panel for to allow room for connectors and cable bends e Insure adequate air flow around the chassis to provide sufficient cooling Operating ambient temperature will affect the amount of air circulation required to keep the Profile XP within its temperature limitations Insure the rack is anchored to the floor so that it cannot tip over when the Profile XP is extended out of the rack Profile XP System Guide 329 Chapter C Chassis dimensions for Profile XP and peripheral equipment Use the following chassis dimension information when planning the placement of equipment in your equipment rack Item Chassis Dimensions Profile XP Height 10 45 in 26 54 cm Width 19 in 48 26 cm Depth 23 80 in 60 45 cm from front rack ears to the rear panel 27 00 in 60 58 cm from front of bezel to rear panel PFC500 and Height 6 07 in 5 41 cm PFC500E Width 17 5 in 44 5 cm Depth 24 91 in 63 27 cm front door to back of drive fan pack 23 79 in 60 43cm chassis front to back of drive fan pack 22 54 in 57 25 cm rail front to back of drive fan pack PFR500 Refer to the PFR 500 Instruction Manual PFR600 Refer to the PF R600 Instruction Manual PAC216 Height 3 50 inches 8 89 centimeters Width 19 00 inches 48 26 centimeters Depth 19 00 inches 48 2
80. restart the Profile XP Media Platform Afterward the storage system is ready for record play operation 82 Profile XP System Guide 13 May 2005 Configuring hot spare drives Configuring hot spare drives When you configure storage you can designate hot spare drives For more information about hot spares see Using Hot Spare drives on page 73 If the drives you want to designate as hot spares are bound as part of a data LUN you must unbind the drives first then bind them as hot spares Refer to Unbinding LUNs for reconfiguration on page 91 To bind drives as hot spare drives 1 Start Configuration Manager using the desktop shortcut or by selecting Start Programs Profile Applications Configuration Manager y Profile1 oix File View Help CAE Utility Jof x File View Tools Help Eontolare Setinge Mirecode Version mes D Peer ID ControllerO Correct 7 86 56 0 Controller0 g Bound LUNO LUN1 LUN2 6 UnBound GB Disk15 F F grass valley 2 In Configuration Manager click File System in the Configuration Manager window The GVG Disk Utility appears 3 To bind unbound disks as hot spares right click the Unbound node for a controller then select Bind LUNs in the context menu Peer controllers that share the same set of disks are automatically selected as a pair 1
81. section describes terms and concepts related to configuring your the Fibre Channel RAID storage system Topics include Binding disk modules e Unbinding disk modules Creating a video file system e Expanding Storage File system volume name e Using Hot Spare drives Binding disk modules Binding the disk modules hardware formats them into a logical units called LUNs The disks that make up a LUN are accessed as a contiguous disk space Disk modules must be bound before they can be part of the video storage file system You can use the GVG Disk Utility to bind disks modules as Data LUNs RAID 3 containing 4 data disks and 1 parity disk or as hot spare LUNs depending on the storage needs of your system Depending on the model a RAID chassis can contain up to 10 or 15 drives For simplicity the disk utility only allows binding contiguous disk modules into LUNs that is in a ten disk chassis disks 0 4 and 5 9 must be bound as two different LUNs To help in finding the physical location of disks in large systems the disk utility includes an Identify Disk button which allows the selected disk drive s disk access light to flash After binding disk modules become slot specific and cannot be moved to other disk module slots Unbinding disk modules Unbinding reverses the bind process Unbinding might be needed when reconfiguring a storage system for example when reconfiguring hot spare disks into a data LUN PFC500 and PFR70
82. single loop with a backup loop in standby mode PFR500 host interface supports both Arbitrated Loop and fabric switching industry standard Fibre Channel technology The physical layer is determined by the use of GBICs NOTE Grass Valley does not support mixing disk drives of differing capacities in any RAID chassis connected to a Profile XP media platform For example if a PFR500 and PFR500E are connected to a Profile XP system all the disk drives in both chassis must be of the same capacity If a qualified drive of a different capacity is added all the drives in the chassis will take on the characteristics of the smallest drive For servicing information on the PFR500 RAID storage system including monitoring the front and rear panel LED indicators and replacing serviceable modules refer to the PFR500 Instruction Manual PFR600 product description The PFR600 contains five or ten half height 3 5 Fibre Channel Arbitrated Loop FC AL disk drives The chassis also supports one or two hardware RAID Controllers in one 3U high rack mountable chassis The PFR600 currently uses 36 GB 73 GB or 146 GB drive capacities With ten drives one chassis holds up to 360 GB 730 GB or 1 46 TB depending on disk drive option The PFR600E RAID Expansion Chassis provides additional storage capacity It is an identical chassis with two Loop Bypass Board installed Up to five PFR600E RAID Expansion Chassis can be connected to a single PFR 600 comprising a si
83. the video input signal VITC timecode status Indicates the status of VITC timecode on the video input May require setting up the VITC reader on page 2 of the Video Input dialog box Ancillary data status Indicates the status of the data extracted from th ill t VITC and LTC om the ancillary data space 168 Profile XP System Guide 13 May 2005 Modifying video input settings Modifying video input settings You can modify the video input settings e You can select whether the input freezes or displays black when the video input signal is lost e You can select which lines of the vertical blanking interval will be recorded uncompressed e You can set up the VITC reader Setting up the VITC reader 13 May 2005 NOTE The VITC Setup page is only available when the system reference is Reference Black and the system has one or more SD input boards Even when present in the system HD inputs do not appear on this page to prevent confusion All video inputs include VITC readers A reader has two VITC detection modes Automatic and Manual When you select automatic detection you can set the range of vertical interval lines scanned to find the VITC signal pair lines 10 to 21 by default Manual allows you to choose specific line numbers to detect the VITC signals Automatic detection is the default setting In manual VITC detection you can specify the lines used to read VITC Use manual detection when two sets of VITC a
84. then choose Load See Loading a clip on page 256 Options Opens the Options dialog box See Setting Options on page 255 Configure Opens the Configure dialog box See Configuring AMP protocol control on page 252 Clip Preview Timecode Indicates the current timecode of the timecode source The timecode value of XX XX XX XX is displayed if there is no input timecode 254 Profile XP System Guide 13 May 2005 Setting Options Control Description and User Operation Clip Name Edit Control Displays the clip s name and location in the media storage system To rename the clip click the Clip Name then enter text To change the current bin i e the target location for recording clips refer to Setting Options on page 255 Eject Clip Ejects the currently loaded clip Active Preview Button Toggle to specify active clip or preview clip Time Dome This indicator displays record progress The Time Dome indicates one revolution every 10 seconds Transport Controls Controls the currently loaded clip 44 in 4d gt gt gt D Rewind Stop Prev Fast Play Next Record Frame Fwd Frame 6 Mark in and Mark out Displays mark in or mark out points Length Displays clip length M Local Remote Control Mode Toggle Click to toggle between status mode and local control mode In status mode only the Configure button is enabled In local control mode control
85. to view all bound LUNs 2 Determine which LUNs are offline by selecting each LUN and noting the LUN status displayed in the right hand pane 3 Force LUNs online using the following steps a In the GVG Disk Utility right click an offline LUN then select Advanced Force Online in the context menu b On receiving operation successful message click OK NOTE Do not refresh the display at this time 4 Repeat step 3 for all offline LUNs 5 Select View Refresh in the main menu to refresh the display then select each LUN and verify status is Online 6 Reboot the RAID storage and Profile XP media platform using the System reboot procedure on page 94 NOTE If your PFR 500 is part of an Open SAN disregard the previous step and refer to the instructions in the Open SAN Instruction Manual for powering off and powering on the Open SAN Forcing a replacement drive to rebuild 13 May 2005 In the event of a disk drive failure you ll repair the system by replacing the disk module as soon as possible Sometimes after installing the replacement disk module the drive status is reported as failed In this case you must use the Disk Utility to force the new drive to rebuild To force a replacement drive to rebuild 1 In the GVG Disk Utility expand the tree view to view the LUN containing the replacement disk module 2 Right click the replacement disk icon in the tree view then select Advanced Forc
86. try the corrective action Some problems have more than one corrective action 288 Problem Possible Cause Corrective Action Application fails to select a channel or channels when it is started Resource conflict because a resource needed by the channel is already in use Check for resources that may be assigned to more than one channel and correct the problem Refer to Using the Warning symbol to find shared resources on page 124 Also make sure the Channel Configuration dialog box is closed before running the application or selecting channels The recorded clip contains colorbar The colorbar generator is selected as the channel input Select the desired video input as the channel source Refer to Selecting video quality and crosspoints on page 130 The recorded clip contains black or freeze frame Loss of input signal Verify that you have a valid input signal Refer to Viewing video input status on page 168 The channel output is black in E to E but playback is fine Loss of input signal Verify that you have a valid input signal Refer to Viewing video input status on page 168 Channel output is always black The output you re monitoring is not assigned to the channel Determine the video output assigned to the channel by referring to Selecting video quality and crosspoints on page 130 then verify cable connections Freeze fr
87. use the IP address of one of the Profile XP systems on the network then press Enter For Example ping 192 168 99 100 If this command returns Pinging 192 168 99 100 with 32 bytes of data Reply from 192 168 99 100 bytes 32 time lt 10ms TTL 128 Reply from 192 168 99 100 bytes 32 time lt 10ms TTL 128 Reply from 192 168 99 100 bytes 32 time lt 10ms TTL 128 Reply from 192 168 99 100 bytes 32 time lt 10ms TTL 128 You have connectivity to the network so there must be a name resolution problem for the IP address You need to re check your HOSTS file for accuracy Refer to Manually Edit the hosts file on each Profile XP on page 279 If however the ping command returns Pinging 192 168 99 100 with 32 bytes of data Request timed out Request timed out Request timed out Request timed out One or both of the Profile XP systems appears to have a network connectivity problem Re check the cabling and try again If this does not solve the problem refer to the Profile XP Service Manual for more help with solving Windows NT Ethernet network problems Repeat step 2 for all Profile XP systems on the network then proceed with Testing video Ethernet name resolution and connectivity on page 306 Profile XP System Guide 305 T Chapter 12 Solving Common Setup Problems Testing video Ethernet name resolution and connectivity Use this procedure to test for video Ethernet network connectivity and proper name resol
88. with troubleshooting tables that provide symptom probable cause and corrective action If you do not solve your system problem using the information in this chapter refer to the Profile XP Service Manual for more in depth troubleshooting information If all else fails contact Grass Valley Support Grass Valley Product Support contact information is located on page 13 of this manual Summary of setup problems If you experience a problem setting up the Profile XP system first check all external connections to make sure they are properly made then refer to the list of problem areas in the following table Begin on the page indicated to find help in solving your setup 13 May 2005 problem Problem Area Begin on Page Common record play problems 287 288 Problems with video 287 289 Problems with audio 287 290 Problems with timecode 287 292 Storage system problems 287 294 Problems using Configuration Manager 287 295 Channel control problems 287 296 Common Ethernet network problems 287 297 Common Fibre Channel video network problems 287 298 Common Ethernet video network problems 287 303 Profile XP System Guide 287 Chapter 12 Solving Common Setup Problems Common record play problems This troubleshooting aid provides corrective action for some common record play problems Search the table for the problem you are experiencing then
89. 0 Video 625 50 Video Standard Standard 1 field 800 samples 960 samples 2 fields 1600 samples 1920 samples 6 Click Finish to save your settings 204 Profile XP System Guide 13 May 2005 Adjusting analog audio input level Adjusting analog audio input level 13 May 2005 You can use the analog input gain adjustment to correct the analog audio input signal level For instance you can use the input gain adjustment to correct input audio level before recording the source signal To adjust analog audio input level 1 Select Analog Audio Input in the Configuration Manager window Audio Input Page 1 of 2 Analog n1J14 2 Select an audio input in the list to adjust or click Select All to adjust all inputs 3 Use the slider in the Analog Audio Input dialog box to adjust input level Overload clipping indicates the audio level is greater than 23dbu 4 Click Finish Profile XP System Guide 205 T Chapter 6 Modifying a Channel Audio Settings Adjusting analog audio output level You can use the analog audio output level adjustment to correct analog audio signal level to meet your system requirements 1 Select Analog Audio Output in the Configuration Manager window 2 Select an audio output in the list to adjust or click Select All to adjust all inputs 3 Use the slider in the Analog Audio Output dialog box to adjust the output level NOTE Values above Odb have no affect when using the PAC21
90. 0 is a 3 5 RU 10 drive Fibre Channel disk array with RAID drives hot spare drives dual power supplies optional redundant controllers optional and spare fans all hot swappable The PFC 500 comes with either 36 GB PFC536 or 73 GB drives PFC573 PFC500 expansion is available using the PFC500E Expansion Chassis which houses 5 or 10 drives but does not need a RAID controller The PFC 500 s RAID controller will control up to 2 expansion frames 30 drives total All PFC 500 chassis must contain the same size disk modules to make full use of the storage capacity NOTE Grass Valley does not support mixing disk drives of differing capacities in any RAID chassis connected to a Profile XP media platform For example if a PFC500 and PFC500E are connected to a Profile XP system all the disk drives in both chassis must be of the same capacity If a qualified drive of a different capacity is added all the drives in the chassis will take on the characteristics of the smallest drive The PFC 500 offers optional redundant RAID controllers for automatic failover Failover can occur when the primary RAID Controller Fibre Channel Port of the Profile XP or Fibre Channel cable fails When failover occurs the system continues to run with minimal interruption For servicing information on the PFC500 RAID storage system including monitoring the front and rear panel LED indicators and replacing serviceable modules refer to the PFC500 Instruction Ma
91. 0 storage systems allow unbinding LUNs independently PFR500 and PFR600 storage systems enforce unbinding all LUNs simultaneously 1 e clearing the configuration AN CAUTION Unbinding always destroys all user media files stored on the disk modules Creating a video file system The Fibre Channel RAID storage system must contain a video file system recognizable by the Profile XP Media Platform system When you choose to make a new video file system the Disk Utility creates one video file system using all available data LUNs All hot spare LUNs and Unbound LUNs are ignored AN CAUTION Creating a video file system destroys the existing file system and all user media files stored on the disk modules 72 Profile XP System Guide 13 May 2005 About configuring storage Expanding Storage You can expand storage by installing additional disk modules in empty disk slots or by connecting additional Fibre Channel RAID Chassis or Expansion chassis To use the additional storage you must bind the new disk modules and create a new video file system The disk modules you use in a LUN must all have the same capacity to fully use the modules disk space The same applies to LUNs Make sure all LUNs have the same capacity to fully use the LUN s disk space When redeploying an Expansion Chassis that was bound using a PFR500 or PFR600 RAID Controller Chassis always use the GVG Disk Utility to unbind the disk modules in the expansion chassis be
92. 1 In the GVG Disk Utility tree view right click the RAID Controller node then select Advanced Check Disk Settings in the context menu E GYG Disk Utility File View Tools Help cmm PFR500 _Propety Value gm Microcode Version 7 86 56 Bo Bind LUNs gs Correct 5 Unbind All Luns poner D He Unt Controller ID 1 Set Fibre Channel ID Cantrollar Gkshis Actiu 8 Check Default Setlings Load Microcode Check D sk Settings Restore Disk Settings Download Disk Firmware N z 2 On receiving a message click OK Settings are reported as correct or incorrect If disk settings are reported as incorrect refer to Restoring PFR500 disk settings on page 106 Restoring PFR500 disk settings If for any reason the disk drive settings are inappropriate for operation in Profile XP installations they must be restored to default To check disk drive settings refer to Checking PFR 500 disk settings on page 106 To restore disk drive settings 1 In the GVG Disk Utility tree view right click the RAID Controller node then select Advanced Restore Disk Settings in the context menu 2 On receiving an operation successful message click OK All disk settings are now correct 3 Reboot the RAID storage and Profile XP media platform using the System reboot procedure on page 94 NOTE If your PFR500 is part of an Open SAN disregard the previous step and refer to the instruct
93. 2005 Chapter 5 Modifying a Channel Video Settings You can use Configuration Manager to customize channel video settings to satisfy the needs of your video system Using Configuration Manager you can Adjust video output timing for any channel Change the video standard for the system Specify the compression type for each video codec Change the video input outputs used by a channel Change the compression settings for a channel Select the video still play mode View the status of the video input signal for a channel Set up timecode burn in and text overlay on the optional video monitor board Adjusting video output timing Two output timing modes are provided for timing the Profile XP Media Platform into your system Zero Timed mode and E to E Timed mode In Zero Timed mode the playout timing of all video outputs are set to match zero time of the system reference In E to E Timed mode playout timing is set to match the 16 line E to E signal delay through the system The timing mode you choose depends on how you use the Profile XP system When using the Profile XP system as a playout source you will most likely use Zero Timed output mode so that video output timing will be zero timed If you are using the Profile XP system to switch between playout and video input signals you must use E to E Timed mode so that playout timing matches E to E timing through the system This ensures clean switching between the video input and d
94. 3 May 2005 Profile XP System Guide 83 T Chapter 3 Working with RAID Storage Using GVG Disk Utility The Binding LUN dialog box opens showing all unbound disks for the controller listed in the Available Disk list Binding LUN on Controller0 x LUN TYFE Hot Spare 7 Available Disks r Selected Disks Disk 15 Flashes the drive lights Identify Disks Cancel OK 4 Select Hot Spare using the LUN TYPE drop down box 5 Select the disk s to be used as hot spares then click the add button them to the Selected Disks list NOTE As an aid in identifying a disk module s physical location select it in the Selected Disks list then click Identify Disks This causes the disk drive LED to flash 6 Click OK to close the Binding LUN dialog box and begin the binding process The Progress Report dialog box opens showing the status of the binding process Current Progress Busy Commands List 7 Repeat step 3 through step 6 to bind additional hot spare disks modules on other controllers as needed 8 Upon 100 completion click Close in Progress Report window 84 Profile XP System Guide 13 May 2005 Changing the video file system volume name 9 Reboot the Windows operating system on the Profile XP media platform 10 If you have not created a video file system on the remaining disks refer to Binding disks and creating a video file system on page 77 Changing the video file system volu
95. 4 Profile XP System Guide 13 May 2005 Chapter 1 0 Controlling the Profile XP Remotely 13 May 2005 Profile XP Series record and play channels can be controlled remotely through RS 422 control protocols or by remote applications over Ethernet This chapter describes how to set up the Profile XP for the control mode you want to use Some third party applications also support the General Purpose Interface GPT Refer to your vendor s documentation for instructions on using GPI triggers The Profile XP remote control capability is summarized in the following table Control Application to Use ControlProtocols Section in this chapter to use Method Available RS 422 VdrPanel VDCP Setting up RS 422 remote control in Odetics Protocol VdrPanel on page 246 BVW Protocol RS 422 Prolink Profile Protocol Setting up RS 422 remote control using Prolink on page 249 Ethernet Configuration Manager NA Running PortServer to enable remote Network Tool Box Editor operation on page 251 List Manager TimeDelay RS 422 AMP application AMP Setting up AMP remote control on or page 252 Ethernet Using the AMP application for local Network control on page 254 Advanced Media Protocol AMP AMP is an extension of the Odetics protocol Profile XP System Guide 245 T Chapter 10 Controlling the Profile XP Remotely Setting up RS 422 remote control in VdrPanel After selecting record or
96. 40 or 50 Mb s CBG with 50 Mb s option for SD Back to back playout of all SD formats on any SD codec Up conversion of SD MPEG 2 4 2 0 clips with aspect ratio configuration requires Definition Independent option Agile Output Down conversion of HD clips with aspect ratio configuration requires Definition Independent option Agile Output 13 May 2005 PVS 3500 features include Profile XP Media Platform features e Up to 3 high definition HD channels of broadcast quality video e Up to 4 standard definition SD channels of broadcast quality video PVS 3500 Series channel configurations by model Model Number of SD Number of HD Number of HD SD Channel HD Channel Number video codecs MPEG Encoders MPEG Decoders Configuration Configuration PVS3502 0 0 2 0 in 1 out 0 in 1 out down converted PVS3504 0 0 4 0 in 2 out 0 in 2 out down converted PVS3504H 0 0 4 0 in 0 out 0 in 4 out PVS3512 0 1 2 0 in lout 1 in 2 out down converted PVS3514 0 1 4 0 in 2 out 1 in 2 out down converted PVS3522 2 0 2 2 play record or 0 in 2 out 1 in 1 out PVS3524 2 0 4 2 play record or 0 in 2 out 2 in 2 out PVS3532 2 1 2 2 play record or 1 in 2 out 1 in 1 out PVS3534 2 1 4 2 play record or 1 in 2 out 2 in 2 out MPEG 2 4 2 0 Main Level from 20 80 Mb s long GoP for HD HD SMPTE 292M 1 485 Gbs Serial Digital I O includes downconverted SD SDI and composite analog monitor with text overlay and
97. 6 centimeters PACXLR Panel Height 3 50 inches 8 89 centimeters Width 19 00 inches 48 26 centimeters Depth 3 25 inches 8 26 centimeters XLR216 Panel Height 3 50 inches 8 89 centimeters Width 19 00 inches 48 26 centimeters Depth 3 25 inches 8 26 centimeters BNC 216 Panel Height 1 75 inches 4 45 centimeters Width 19 00 inches 48 26 centimeters Depth 3 25 inches 8 26 centimeters T O Panel Height 1 75 inches 4 45 centimeters Width 19 00 inches 48 26 centimeters Depth 2 00 inches 5 08 centimeters a These chassis are mounted in the rear of the rack 330 Profile XP System Guide 13 May 2005 Rack mount hardware shipped with the Profile XP system Rack mount hardware shipped with the Profile XP system Your Profile XP comes with rack mounting hardware as shown The Profile XP and PAC 216 are shipped with the chassis sections already attached 10 32 PHS Automatic Section Flat Nut Bar 10 32 PHS Stop Latch l NOTE Right hand and left hand stationary section is designated by the Intermediate RH and the LH marked on the rails Stop latch holes should be towards Rack mounting Fibre Channel RAID systems To rack mount these storage systems refer to the rack mounting information in the PFC 500 PFR 500 or PFR 600 Instruction Manuals 13 May 2005 Profile XP System Guide 331 T Chapter C Mounting the Rack Slides Choose the proper set o
98. 6B 4 Click Finish to save your settings Audio Output Page 1 of 1 x Analog Output Boost Physical Location How much additional adjustment should be made to the output gain after playout Mute the output 12dB OdB 12dB D Line Mode Default BALANCED a e Finish Cac i 206 Profile XP System Guide 13 May 2005 Muting analog audio outputs Muting analog audio outputs 13 May 2005 You can mute analog audio outputs when they are not being used Selecting mute disables the audio output in the PAC 200 and reduces the risk of output noise occurring when audio inputs are not driven with an input signal To mute the analog audio output 1 Select Audio Output in the Configuration Manager window The Audio Output dialog box appears 2 Select an audio output in the list to adjust or click Select All 3 Click the Mute check box to mute the output 4 Click Finish to save your settings Audio Output Page 1 of 1 x Analog Output Boost Physical Location Analog Out2J14 Analog Out6 J14 Analog Out J14 ra R Analog Out8J14 How much additional adjustment should be m de to i 2 Analog Out9J14 the output gain after playout Analog Outl0J14 Analog Outl1J14 12dB OdB 12dB TVT SOET TE EOR E OE E E E E E E EE po Analog ut16 J14 Line Mode BALANCED 7 Finish Cancel ji Profile XP System Guide 207 T Chapter 6 Modifying a Channel Audio Settings
99. 7 62 cm apart The I O Panel XLR216 and BNC 216 panels mount at the back of the rack with four pan head screws Ensure that there is room to make cable connections and mount in any order which allows connection to the Profile XP system Profile XP System Guide 335 T Chapter C Rear Panel Drawings Profile XP Media Platform Chassis FC Disk Port A Profile XP Media Platform Loop Thru A to Ee c aN zs U 0 S St seve c B Esse O gg CZ oo S200 IL Oo woeze m OC oo IC O PIEISIIIESEJO O0O0000000000000000 00000000000000000 O0000000000000000 O00000000000000000 00000000000000000 0900000000000000009 O00000000000000000 nm noo0oo0a0o00000000 ano0000000000 00000000000000000 RJ 1 a 5 NO 2 AX O ss 5 a L X am 0 O 83 Ss O gt c O EA O lt a aa t Od tai b c Ss C 30 002 o v o 96 2059 O gt 25 O O gt 5 o 09 Co o 99 xO o o gt ot va Oe ges 55o dev Ot Ku Sie at Soc lt tc A Power Cord Power Good LED To Optional Power Supply XLR216 and BNC216 AES EBU Breakout Panels 2 m 4 Oo lt gt Dog qa rc N 2 os a V es a 5 ma LU Reo a lt e T 2 a lt is i 8 Oo o c c O O E X ANA X e AN YX Fu PR Past aa g 6 F
100. AMP protocol using the local AMP application continue with the next section Using the AMP application for local control Profile XP System Guide 253 T Chapter 10 Controlling the Profile XP Remotely Using the AMP application for local control Open the AMP application at C profile ampclient exe To use the AMP application for local control a channel must first be allocated as in Setting up AMP remote control on page 252 Toggle to the local control mode by clicking the L R button The following describes the controls and indicators used in the local control mode 2 Clip Preview Clip Name amp Eject Timecode Current Bin Clip O Control Buttons Location DEVMAN_XP1 Ext detault In Out Length 00 08 00 90 08 00 90 00 00 O Active Preview Button O Time Dome O Mark In amp O Length O Local Remote Click to toggle Q Transport Mark Out Control Mode between active Controls Toggle amp preview clip Control Description and User Operation Control Buttons New Clip Used to create and name a clip prior to starting the The control buttons recording A default clip name is generated by incrementing some function the same as the File seed name for example Clip_2 if the last clip created was Clip_1 menu items To rename the clip click the clip name and enter a new name Load Select to open the Load dialog which displays the contents of the current bin Select a clip
101. Centralized storage provides multiple Profile XP Media Platforms simultaneous access to a common pool of media As in distributed storage a redundant Fibre Channel connection option is available to provide a redundant path to the centralized storage pool in case the primary path fails Fibre Channel and or Ethernet IP Video Networks The Profile XP family offers true IP networking of media files over Fibre Channel or Ethernet e Faster than real time transfers up to 40x with no generation loss e Reliable transfers using secure file transfer protocols IP networking enables files to be moved between devices or between facilities over standard public networks Profile network streaming enables play while transferring Fibre Channel Streaming enables the file to be used shortly after the destination Profile starts receiving it just like you can do with a traditional video router This eliminates the traditional drawback of networking in which the file must finish transferring before a user has access to edit it or play it out 28 Profile XP System Guide 13 May 2005 Front panel controls and indicators Front panel controls and indicators The front panel includes the following controls and indicators O Power On LED indicates the standby switch is in the on position and that secondary voltages are present in the chassis Standby Switch provides system On Off control system Fault LED indicates a system fault
102. Determining maximum video data rate per channel The maximum video data rate per channel depends on the number of video channels in operation the video data rate used and the number of disk drives in the RAID storage system You can select the video data rate the Profile XP system uses to record the video signal For information on setting the video data rate refer to Selecting video quality for a channel on page 156 When selecting video data rates be sure not to exceed the total maximum system bandwidth Keep in mind that Fibre channel transfers archive operations off speed play and high bandwidth recording or playout may require that you reduce the data rate on other channels or operate fewer channels at one time Although playout and recording take priority over other operations exceeding your Profile XP system bandwidth may result in record or playback problems If you are unsure about maximum video data rate per channel or your Profile XP available system bandwidth consult your Grass Valley support representative Be prepared to supply the number of video channels the usual bit rate uncompressed VBI usage the number of audio channels typical video network loads and all the other factors that are used to calculate maximum data per channel and the number of storage disks required NOTE The information in the following sections do not apply to Profile XP media platforms connected to an Open SAN Connecting RAID chassis ca
103. Do Not Accept the Disclaimer lt Back en Cancel Finish 6 Read the Disclaimer then select I Accept the Disclaimer and choose Finish E 13 May 2005 13 May 2005 Requesting a license License Request S The following text should be provided to Thomson License Request KX4KHuuuuuunu Profile EP Agile Decoding al C1D0009027B31F282205DD9F2B563AEA Your Name CustCompany Your Company Inc CustAddr001 1234 Any Street CustAddr002 Anytown OR CustCountry United States of America CustEnail Your Name yourcompany com CustPhone 123 456 7890 LicenseType NodeLocked LicenseLife Permanent LicenseCount 1 7 The resulting text contains all the information required to issue a license for the desired option Click Copy To Clipboard so that you can paste this text into an appropriately named file that you email to your Grass Valley representative You can also paste the text directly into an email message but you may wish to keep a copy of the message for your records 8 Email the text information to your Grass Valley representative Profile XP System Guide 241 T Chapter 9 Managing Optional Licenses Adding a license Your software license is provided as an XML file Use the SabreTooth License Manager to add this file to your system and enable the desired feature To add a license 1 Click License Configuration in Configuration Manager then click Launch LicenseManager to open the Sabre
104. ECTOR aeo aa a aA a A E tanks en 317 RJ 45 Ethernet connector 0 0 ecceccessesseceeceeceececaeeeeeseeeeececececaueueneceseceeeessesesaeneeseceeeeeeeaes 318 Parallel Port connector arisen ionrata aa 319 RS 232 connectors 320 I O Panel RS 422 connectors 321 I O Panel GPI connectors aaa 322 GPI Input connector on I O Panel 322 GPI output connector on I O Panel iiii aid 323 I O Panel LTC connectors ccccesseccseceeceeeecceeeeessneceeceeeceeeaaueneneseseceeeesseeesaeneseeeeeeeeteees 324 Fibre Channel Disk board connectors cccccccssesseeeeceeeeceeesaeceaeeesnececeeeteeteaaeeseneseeeneeees 325 Fibre Channel Cable Specifications ce ecceseeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeesiaeeeseeeeeaes 325 Fibre Channel Network board connector a as 326 Audio board CONMECHOF ccccccceccccneessesseeecececececeecaessesseceeecesenenaueneasseeeseeeeeetaesengneeeneess 327 Appendix C Rack Mounting Information and Rear Panel Drawings Rack mounting the Profile XP i c c cc ccceecescatcessectesectesssecesessutese aiarra Neaera N 329 Chassis dimensions for Profile XP and peripheral equipMent ee ass 330 Rack mount hardware shipped with the Profile XP system 1adia a 331 Rack mounting Fibre Channel RAID systems 000 0 id 331 Mounting the Rack Slides cccc c ceccsecescestecseesecctececteceeseceasenseesseeeeepanenasenseesetnesesoees 332 Installing the Profile XP on the rack mount
105. General Purpose Interface GPI 245 General Safety Summary 15 GoP 156 157 GPI connector pin outs 322 GPI trigger 245 H hardware settings importing and exporting 59 restoring 58 saving 57 high level block diagram 34 horizontal blanking erasing 180 hot spare drives 73 83 I I B and P frames 157 I O Panel rear panel drawing 337 importing channel settings 59 hardware settings 59 injury precautions 15 interlaced mode 167 internal timecode generator settings 215 Introduction 19 IP address Ethernet video network 262 Fibre Channel video network 260 NT Ethernet network 265 L Laser Compliance 18 FCC Emission Limits 18 Laser Safety 18 Laser Safety Reguirements 18 Laser Safety 18 Laser Safety Reguirements 18 license adding 242 346 Profile XP System Guide Agile Output 237 archiving 243 deleting 243 reguesting 238 License Manager SabreTooth 242 line double 167 logging on 44 automatic logon 44 logon as Administrator 44 logon as Profile user 45 LTC selecting 228 LTC connector I O Panel 324 LUNs about 72 forcing online 103 offline 103 unbinding 72 M Media Manager 282 testing Fibre Channel video network 273 testing the Ethernet Video network 282 MPEG D10 27 MPEG 2 27 muting analog output 207 N network about Profile networking 257 about transfers 28 both video network options installed 263 Ethernet video network about 261 cabling connecting 281 entering network settings 277 HOSTS file editing 279
106. ITC OutaJ5 HD ANC VITC n4J9 LTC n1 J3 LTC In2 J3 LTC In3 J3 LTC In4 J3 HD ANC LTC In J7 HD ANC LTC In J9 TE Generator LUT T UTT RI Crosspoints Cancel Help 3 With the Crosspoints button still selected choose a timecode output from the Timecode Output s list NOTE The VITC output listed corresponds to the video output assigned to the channel For example SDI VITC OutA J5 appears in the Timecode Output list box for Vtrl when SDI OutA J5 is selected as the video output If you change a video output for a channel the VITC output listed also changes 4 Click the Finish to save your channel settings and close the Channel Configuration dialog box You can now select the new channel in your Profile application 140 Profile XP System Guide 13 May 2005 Removing a channel Removing a channel 13 May 2005 You can remove a channel that is no longer needed Once a channel is removed it cannot be recalled again You will have to create it again by using the Add Channel button To remove a channel 1 Click the tab of the channel to be removed 2 Click the Remove Channel button in the Channel Configuration dialog box 3 Click Finish to save the change and close the dialog box Channel Configuration Profile1 ad fr PEG geo E N Profile XP System Guide 141 T Chapter 4 Adding or Removing Channels 142 Profile XP System Guide 13 May
107. Ns Controller Settings Up to date with 1 0 Settings T Unbind All Luns Serial Number 200000204621 7390 Advanced Check Controller Settings ee 36 Restore Controller Settings Active mie Load Microcode P332 P332 S 6 Download Disk Firmware Up to date with 1 0 Settings UnBound Enable Controller 200000204621 7435 Disable A Controller rom Enable B Controller Disable B Controller 4 Click OK to continue The RAID controller is disabled You can check controller status in the Disk Utility You may need to refresh the display 5 Remove and replace the disabled RAID controller module Refer to procedures in the PFR600 Instruction Manual 6 On inserting the replacement RAID controller it initializes and is automatically enabled to become the backup RAID controller This concludes the Disabling a PFR600 RAID controller for removal procedure NOTE If you accidentally disable the wrong controller you can enable it again Refer to Enabling a PFR600 RAID controller Enabling a PFR600 RAID controller 13 May 2005 This feature is provided in case you accidentally disable the wrong RAID Controller in Disabling a PFR600 RAID controller for removal on page 110 If this occurs you can use the following steps to enable the controller To enable a RAID controller 1 In GVG Disk Utility expand the tree view then select the controller icon Peer controllers that share the same set of disks are automatically selected as a
108. PAC Ready P 66 Ch9 12 ADC Clock Out N 13 Ch 13 14 AES Out P 40 PAC Ready N 67 Ch11 12 AES In P 14 Ch13 14AES Out N 41 ne 68 Ch11 12 AES In N 15 nc 42 nc 69 Ch 13 16 ADC Clock Out P 16 nc 43 Ch3 4 AES Out P 70 Ch 13 16 ADC Clock Out N 17 Ch 1 2 AES In P 44 Ch3 4 AES Out N 71 Ch15 16 AES In P 18 Ch 1 2 AES In N 45 nc 72 Ch 15 16 AES In N 19 nc 46 nc 73 Digital Ground 20 nc 47 Ch 7 8 AES Out P 74 Breakout Box Present Flag 21 Ch5 6 AES In P 48 Ch 7 8 AES Out N 75 UART Transmit P 22 Ch 5 6 AES In N 49 nc 76 UART Transmit N 23 nc 50 nc 77 Chassis Ground 24 ne 51 Ch11 12 AES Out P 78 Chassis Ground 25 Ch9 10 AES In P 52 Ch11 12 AES Out N 79 PAC Reset P 26 Ch9 10 AES In N 53 nc 80 PAC Reset N 27 ne 54 ne nc no connection Profile XP System Guide 13 May 2005 Appendix C Rack Mounting Information and Rear Panel Drawings Rack mounting the Profile XP 13 May 2005 The equipment for the Profile XP system installs in a standard 19 inch equipment rack Rack slide tracks shipped with the Profile XP system and peripheral products allow them to slide in and out without having to remove them from the rack If the rack does not already have rack slides installed or if the slides are not correctly positioned you will have to use those shipped with the Profile XP When planning the
109. R600 RAID Controller Chassis always use the GVG Disk Utility to unbind the disk modules in the expansion chassis before disconnecting them from the original RAID Controller chassis AN CAUTION Unbinding destroys all user media files stored on the disk modules This section includes the following procedures e Unbinding LUNs PFC500 and PFR700 Storage Systems e Unbinding LUNs PFR500 and PFR 600 Storage Systems Unbinding LUNs PFC500 and PFR700 Storage Systems If you need to unbind LUNs perform the following 1 Start Configuration Manager using the desktop shortcut or by selecting Start Programs Profile Applications Configuration Manager 2 In Configuration Manager click File System to start the GVG Disk Utility 3 Expand the tree view and identify bound LUNs 13 May 2005 Profile XP System Guide 91 T Chapter 3 Working with RAID Storage Using GVG Disk Utility 4 Right click the Bound node ora LUN you want to unbind then select Unbind LUNs in the context menu The Unbinding LUN dialog box opens 5 On receiving the warning message click OK UnBinding LUNs on Controller0 x Available LUNs SelectedLUNs LUNO LUN2 LUN1 lt lt Cancel OK 6 Move LUNs to the Selected LUNs box using the arrow buttons HINT To select all LUNs use Shift click then click the gt gt arrow button 7 Click OK to close the Unbinding LUN dialog box and begin the unbinding process The Progress Report
110. Recorder DVCPRO 25 Player Recorder Video codec configured as DVCAM Video codec configured as DVCPRO 25 Can record and play clips but not at the same time Codec type must be set to DVCPRO 25 Can record and play clips but not at the same time DVCPRO 50 Player Video codec configured as Can record and play clips but not at the same Recorder DVCPRO 50 time MPEG D10 Player Video codec configured to Can record clips using MPEG D10 format Recorder record MPEG D10 format Recorded clips can be loaded and played using any MPEG Player or Player Recorder channel MPEG Recorder Encoder only or Video Can only record clips Recorded clips must be codec configured as MPEG loaded and played using an MPEG Player or Encoder Player Recorder Channel MPEG Player Decoder only or Video Can only play clips codec configured as MPEG Decoder MPEG Player Recorder Decoder and Encoder Can record and play clips but not at the same PVS 1000 or one video time codec PVS 1100 MPEG Player Recorder Decoder and Encoder Can record and play clips but not at the same Dec Enc PVS 1100 time Uses two codec resources HD SD MPEG Player HD Decoder only Can only play MPEG 4 2 0 clips Clips may be HD or SD and are up or down converted appropriately for the assigned output Requires Agile Output option HD MPEG Recorder HD Encoder only Can only record clips Recorded clips must be loaded and played using a Player or P
111. Setting up a simple video network Fibre Channel i sd 268 Set up the Windows NT Ethernet network 0 000 eeceeceeeeeeeneeeeeeeeenaeeeeeeaeeeenaeeseneeees 268 Configure Fibre Channel network settings on each Profile XP 269 Manually Edit the hosts file on each Profile XP c cccccccssccscseseseescecseseeeececseseseeeeeees 270 Power down and connect proper Fibre Channel cabling eeen 272 Power on the switch and configure if necessary eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeteneeeeeneeeeee 273 Profile XP System Guide 13 May 2005 Contents Test the Fibre Channel network using Media Manager ii 273 Setting up a simple video network Ethernet ccccceeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeenneees 277 Set up the Windows NT Ethernet network ee eeseeeeeeseeseneeeeeneeeeseeeeteneeeseneeesaaes 277 Configure the video network on each Profile XP Ethernet essene 277 Manually Edit the Hosts file on each Profile XP u c cccccccccseecsesesesecesseteteeecsesesesecseeenes 279 Power off and connect proper Ethernet Cabling cesceeesseeeeneeeeeeneeeeeeneeeeeneeeenaees 281 Power on the hub or switch and configure if necessary ee aa 282 Test the Ethernet video network using Media Manager iiia a 282 Chapter 12 Solving Common Setup Problems Summary of setup problems ccccccccccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeeccaaaeeeeeeeeccaeeeeeteenneees 287 Common record play problems i
112. Tooth License Manager SabreT ooth License Manager My Computer File Edit View Tools Window Help My Computer Feature er Count Expy Checked Out Heath SabreT ooth Protocol Service Running pE a V 2 Drag and drop the XML file onto the SabreTooth License Manager or choose File Import and navigate to the file location to open the XML file Open ix Lookin E SabreTooth amp ci ext Logging File name Files of type fxm Files xml x Cancel I Open as read only 242 Profile XP System Guide 13 May 2005 Deleting licenses Deleting licenses Deleting a license immediately disables the feature that it enabled You may wish to delete a temporary license prior to its expiry if you have decided not to purchase the feature To delete a license 1 Select the license in the SabreTooth License Manager 2 Choose Edit Delete to delete the license Archiving licenses 13 May 2005 You may wish to archive your licenses to a secure location This will allow you to quickly re install a license should you inadvertently delete it To archive a license 1 Select the license in the SabreTooth License Manager 2 Choose File Export to open the Save As dialog box 3 Assign a meaningful name to the file and save it to the desired location You may want to save the file to a diskette and keep it in a safe place Profile XP System Guide 243 T Chapter 9 Managing Optional Licenses 24
113. Video Output list 3 Enter a name for the video output in the Video Output Name box or click Default to restore the factory default video output name 4 Select another video output or click Finish to saving your settings 182 Profile XP System Guide 13 May 2005 Configuring the video monitor output Configuring the video monitor output You can set up the text overlay and timecode burnin feature for the optional Video Monitor board Setup includes entering screen text and selecting text size and color scheme best suited for your application Enabling or disabling dither on the Video Monitor output The Video Monitor board truncates digital video data from 10 bits to 8 bits before converting it to analog Using dither in this process reduces the effect of quantization noise on the Video Monitor output To enable dither 1 Select Video Monitor in the Configuration Manager window Page of the Video Monitor dialog box appears Video Monitor Page 1 of 2 x Video Monitor Setup Monitor Name Monitor DutBJ11 Physical Location Slot 5 BNC 1 top Dither output IV NTSC with Pedestal 2 Choose a monitor output in the Video Monitor Setup list or click Select All 3 Click the Dither output check box to enable dither for truncating 10 bit to 8 bit video 4 Click Finish to saving your settings 13 May 2005 Profile XP System Guide 183 T Chapter 5 Modifying a Channel Video Settings Enabling
114. Wait approximately 30 seconds for the disk drives to spin down then power on all RAID Expansion chassis then all RAID Controller chassis NOTE Always power on the RAID Expansion chassis prior to or at the same time as the RAID Controller chassis 3 Wait for RAID storage initialization as follows PFR700 RAID Storage systems Wait until the Ready LED on the RAID controller is steady green approximately 2 minutes The wait is approximately 5 minutes for the first reboot after a firmware download Refer to the PFR 700 Instruction Manual to interpret other LED behavior PFR600 RAID Storage systems Wait until all disk access LEDs are steady green approximately minute The rear panel 7 segment LED displays the chassis address Refer to the PFR 600 Instruction Manual to interpret other disk access LED or 7 segment LED behavior PFR500 RAID Storage systems Wait until all disk access LEDs are steady green and the HOST RDY LED is illuminated approximately 4 minutes The rear panel 7 segment LED displays the chassis address Refer to the PFR 500 Instruction Manual to interpret other disk access LED or 7 segment LED behavior PFC500 RAID Storage systems Wait until the System Check LED is off and all disk access LEDs are steady green approximately 2 minutes Refer to the PFC500 Instruction Manual to interpret other front panel LED behavior 4 On the Profile XP Media Platform shutdown and restart the Windows o
115. XP Media Platform You can read this chapter to get familiar with the Profile XP key features and system components Also included is a brief architectural overview of the Profile XP system Chapter 2 Working with Configuration Manager Describes the Configuration Manager user interface and functionality Configuration Manager is the application used to configure and manage the Profile XP system Chapter 3 Working with RAID Storage Using GVG Disk Utility Describes how to set up local storage for the Profile XP Media Platform Procedures are included for configurations with PFC500 PFR 500 PFR 600 and PFR700 Fibre Channel RAID Chassis and expansion chassis and for storage systems with the optional second controller board Chapter 4 Adding or Removing Channels Describes the basics of adding configuring or removing channels Information on advanced channel settings are referenced to chapters 5 through 7 Chapter 5 Modifying a Channel Video Settings Describes how to modify the video settings for a channel Chapter 6 Modifying a Channel Audio Settings Describes how to modify the audio settings for a channel Chapter 7 Modifying a Channel Timecode Settings Describes how to modify the timecode settings for a channel Chapter 8 Modifying a Channel Ancillary Data Describes how to modify the ancillary data settings for a channel Chapter 9 Managing Optional Licenses Describes how to request and add optional software lic
116. YOU add 0 0 0 add 121 Why resources appear dimmed red OF in Use 122 Using Tool Tips to manage resources 123 Using the Warning symbol to find shared resources eeeeeeteeeseeeeeeeneeeeeneeeeeneeees 124 Using the Summary button to review channel settings da 125 Adding and configuring a new channel ii ida ea 126 To add rch nn ll sssissrosaaiama et sasti k a osa das d kukisa imenid iki slogs t das iekas t dis 126 Entering channel name and descriptioN siss as 126 Selecting th channel typecast a iaai Selecting video quality and crosspoints Setting the SD MPEG recorder aspect ratio ccccccceeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeenneeeeeeeeees 135 Selecting playout aspect ratio CONVEFSION 0 eee eeenteceeteeeeeeeeeeeeaeeseeaeeetnaeeeeeeteeeeaaes 136 Selecting audio channels for each audio track eee eeeeeeenneeeeneeeeneeeeeeeeeeseeeetenaeees 139 Selecting timecode I O for each timecode track eeeeeeeteeeeneeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenaeees 140 Removing a channel iida aaa 141 Modifying a Channel Video Settings Adjusting video output timing ssssasaa ass sse ass sasas 143 Adjusting playout timing to match zero time iidaa ae 144 Adjusting playout timing to match E to E timing iiddaaa aaa 146 Adjusting system reference timing to offset all playout timing ee eeeeeeeeeeeeee 148 Recording synchronous and asynchronous feeds eceeeseeeeeeeeeeeeneeee
117. ack 1 Add Track Audio Q Track 1 amp 2 Delete Track E ly Timecode Summary IH d t Data Configuration for Timecode Track 1 Timecode Input C lt None gt TC Generator Any Refln VITC In4J3 SDI VITC In J5 Timecode Outputfs OO SDI VITC nB J5 HD ANC VITC In J7 HD ANC VITCIn amp J9 LTC n1 J3 LTCln2J3 LTCln3J3 LTCln4J3 HD ANC LTC In J7 HD ANC LTC In J9 BI SDI VITC Dut J5 LTC TL D TE Generator Crosspoints Einish Cancel Help Finish 5 Click Finish to save your settings and close the Channel Configuration dialog box 6 To set up the VITC reader for the VITC source you selected refer to Setting up the VITC reader on a Video Input on page 219 or Setting up the VITC reader on the Reference Input on page 221 13 May 2005 Profile XP System Guide 217 T Chapter 7 Modifying a Channel Timecode Settings Recording timecode from ancillary data If your video source contains ancillary data you can extract the timecode information from the ancillary data and record it on the timecode track for subsequent playout The timecode data remains part of the ancillary data and is also recorded as data if you set up a data track To record timecode from timecode ancillary data 1 Select Channel Configuration in the Configuration Manager window 2 Click the tab for the channel you want to co
118. age to this product or any products connected to it Only qualified personnel should perform service procedures While using this product you may need to access other parts of the system Read the General Safety summary in other system manuals for warnings and cautions related to operating the system Injury Precautions Use Proper Power Cord Ground the Product Do Not Operate Without Covers Do Not operate in Wet Damp Conditions Do Not Operate in an Explosive Atmosphere Avoid Exposed Circuitry 13 May 2005 To avoid fire hazard use only the power cord specified for this product This product is grounded through the grounding conductor of the power cord To avoid electric shock the grounding conductor must be connected to earth ground Before making connections to the input or output terminals of the product ensure that the product is properly grounded To avoid electric shock or fire hazard do not operate this product with covers or panels removed To avoid electric shock do not operate this product in wet or damp conditions To avoid injury or fire hazard do not operate this product in an explosive atmosphere To avoid injury remove jewelry such as rings watches and other metallic objects Do not touch exposed connections and components when power is present Profile XP System Guide a T Safety Summaries Product Damage Precautions Use Proper Power Source Provide Proper Ventilation
119. ain your license from your Grass Valley representative and install it using the SabreTooth License Manager Optional software licenses are managed through the SabreTooth License Manager which is installed with Profile System Software License information is stored in XML files that you can manage just like any other file on your system Licenses are unique to the system for which they are requested and cannot be used on any other machine NOTE Licenses are based on your system s unique identifier which is partially derived from your system s Media Access Control MAC address If you change your system s MAC address by performing operations such as changing the System Processor card or adding a dual port Ethernet card you must obtain a new license based on the new MAC address You can use the SabreTooth License Manager to perform the following tasks e Adda new license import e Archive existing licenses export e Delete a license Enabling optional features 13 May 2005 You can enable optional features on your Profile XP Media Platform by purchasing the appropriate licenses Since it may take a day or two to process your order you can obtain a temporary license that enables the feature for a limited time You can use this temporary license to evaluate the feature to start using the feature immediately when you purchase a license or to temporarily re enable the feature on a system that was repaired by replacing the System Pr
120. ame for example Profile_le0 Pinging by name requires the HOSTS file to be correct Pinging the IP address does not require the HOSTS file Profile XP System Guide 307 T Chapter 12 Solving Common Setup Problems 308 Profile XP System Guide 13 May 2005 Appendix A Electrical and Environmental Specifications General Information This appendix provides tables of electrical specifications for the video and audio characteristics as well as environmental criteria and power characteristics The tables in this appendix make it easier to present the specifications in numerical values The following terms apply to the Profile XP Media Platform characteristics and descriptions in the tables Specification A document or a section of a document that lists and describes characteristics and performance requirements of equipment and certain program material Requirement Performance Requirement A statement that defines a characteristic usually in limit form Supplemental Data Statements that explain performance requirements or provide performance information These are not considered to be statements of guaranteed performance and are not ordinarily supported by a performance check procedure Test Equipment Grass Valley uses the following test equipment to verify the performance requirements listed in this chapter Tektronix VM700A e Signal Source Video and Audio e Signal Generator e Monitor 13 May 2005 Profile XP System G
121. ames or black frames during playback The number of record and play channels operating simultaneously exceeds the system storage bandwidth Reduce the number of channels operating at the same time or select a lower video quality preset for the record Refer to Guidelines for selecting Video Quality Presets on page 156 Profile XP System Guide 13 May 2005 Problems with video 13 May 2005 Problems with video This troubleshooting aid provides corrective action for some common video problems Search the table for the problem you are experiencing then try the corrective action Some problems have more than one corrective action Problem Possible Cause s Corrective Action Video output distortion in playback and E to E Wrong video standard Verify system video standard is configured correctly Refer to Changing the system video standard on page 151 Horizontal aberrations free running through the picture in Record mode or E to E Sometimes intermittent depending on the input signal selected Input frame sync set to pass when incoming signal is asynchronous Set frame sync to Auto time Refer to Recording synchronous and asynchronous feeds on page 150 Continuous horizontal picture shift in Record mode or E to E Sometimes intermittent depending on the input signal selected Input frame sync set to pass when incoming signal is
122. an physically locate a specific disk module or group of disk modules that make up a LUN Always use the disk identify feature before removing and replacing a failed disk module Accidentally removing the wrong disk module can destroy all media on the disk drives This is especially important in Open SAN systems that contain both PFR 500 and PFR600 RAID chassis since they indicate disk failures differently The PFR500 chassis indicates a disk failure by turning the failed disk access LED green while the remaining disk LEDs become blue The PFR 600 chassis indicates a disk failure by turning the failed disk access LED blue while the remaining disk LEDs remain green To identify the disks in a LUN 1 Right click the LUN icon in the tree view then select Identify Disks in the context menu 2 Perform one of the following steps For PFR500 systems click OK to identify disk modules in the selected LUN Disk modules remain identified for 30 seconds You can locate the disk modules now GYG Disk Utility x C Corresponding LEDs will be blue for 30 seconds Click OK to start For PFR600 systems locate the disk modules now by locating the flashing blue disk module LEDs Click OK to extinguish the LEDs GYG Disk Utility x i Corresponding LEDs are blue For PFC500 and PFR700 systems locate the disk modules now by locating the flashing amber LEDs Click OK to extinguish the flashing LED GYG Disk Utility x iL Th
123. an application it must be reacquired within the application before your changes will take effect Refer to the chapter in the Profile XP User Manual for the Profile application you are using 166 Profile XP System Guide 13 May 2005 Selecting the video still play mode Selecting the video still play mode 13 May 2005 The Profile XP Media Platform has two still play modes for displaying video during freeze frame Line Double and Interlaced Line Double is the default setting and uses the content of one field for both fields during still play for a one field freeze Interlaced mode displays two fields in still play mode for a two field freeze With Interlaced you may see some motion jitter in still play Line Double eliminates motion jitter NOTE This setting has no effect when using a progressive video standard To select still play mode 1 Choose Channel Configuration in the Configuration Manager dialog box The Channel Configuration dialog box appears 2 Click the tab for the channel you want to modify 3 Select the Video icon in the configuration tree The still play mode controls appear at the bottom of the Channel Configuration dialog box Channel Configuration Profile1 x amp vn y vez Name Type Add Channel ia MPEG Player Recorder 7 Remove Channel Q Track 1 amp 2 Add Track E ly Timecode BoE Track 1 Delete Track Summary Configuration for all video trac
124. and MPEG 2 at bits rates up to 25 Mb s The 50 Mb s software option allows you to process video using DVCPRO 50 and MPEG 2 at bit rates up to 50 Mb s including the D10 format at 30 40 or 50 Mb s You to play clips of any of these compression types through any codec without any configuration changes For example a DVCPRO 50 can immediately follow an MPEG 2 clip at 12 Mb s on any playout channel The only limitation is that you cannot create or play master clips complex movies that include more than one compression type The PVS 3000 Series combines both standard and high definition capabilities in a single Profile XP Media Platform You can record and play SD clips in all the PVS 1100 supported formats on your SD channels and concurrently record and play HD clips in all the PVS 2000 supported formats on your HD channels The PVS3500 Series extends these capabilities to allow you to play both SD and HD MPEG 2 4 2 0 clips through an HD decoder You can play both 10801 and 720p HD clips through the same decoder Clips are played out in the format specified for the output assigned to the channel but all HD outputs on a system must be set to the same standard 10801 or 720p The decoder can play out on either a standard definition output or a high definition output All clips are either up or down converted appropriately to play on that output and their aspect ratios are adjusted according to your custom settings As with the PVS 1100 you can
125. apacity You can refer the following tables for storage capacity estimates based on the number of disk drives installed and the video data rate The estimates in these tables are based on use of four audio channels and one time code channel per video channel using the 525 video format Storage capacity estimates in hours using 36 GB drives Video Data 5Drives 10 15 20 25 30 Rate Drives Drives Drives Drives Drives 4 Mb s 37 8 75 6 113 4 151 2 189 226 8 8 Mb s 25 4 50 8 76 2 101 6 127 152 4 12 Mb s 19 1 38 2 57 3 76 4 95 5 114 6 15 Mb s 16 1 32 2 48 3 64 4 80 5 96 6 18 Mb s 13 8 27 6 41 4 55 2 69 82 8 24 Mb s 10 8 21 6 32 4 43 2 54 64 8 32 Mb s 8 4 16 8 25 2 33 6 42 50 4 40 Mb s 6 8 13 6 20 4 27 2 34 40 8 50 Mb s 5 5 11 16 5 22 27 5 33 Storage capacity estimates in hours using 73 GB drives Video 5 Drives 10 15 20 25 30 Data Rate Drives Drives Drives Drives Drives 4 Mb s 76 6 153 2 229 9 306 4 383 1 459 6 8 Mb s 51 4 102 8 154 4 205 6 257 3 308 4 12 Mb s 38 7 714 116 1 154 8 193 5 232 2 15 Mb s 32 6 65 3 97 9 130 5 163 1 195 7 24 Mb s 22 2 44 3 66 4 88 6 110 7 132 9 30 Mb s 18 2 36 5 54 7 72 9 91 1 109 4 40 Mb s 14 1 28 l 42 2 56 2 70 3 84 3 50 Mb s 11 4 22 9 34 3 45 7 57 1 68 5 65 Mb s 8 8 17 6 26 3 35 1 43 9 52 6 13 May 2005 Profile XP System Guide 69 70 Chapter 3 Working with RAID Storage Using GVG Disk Utility
126. ars 2 Click Next to navigate to Video Monitor page 2 of 2 Video Monitor Page 2 of 2 x Video Monitor Text Setup Monitor Out4J11 Background Monitor OutC J11 Transparent 7 Monitor OutD J11 Text M Small Bright T Outline 00 00 00 00 M Show timecode on line 12 7 and aligned Center x lt Back Herts Finish Cancel i 3 Choose a monitor output in the Video Monitor Setup list or click Select All 4 Select the Show Time Code check box 5 Select the text line number using the drop down lists Twelve text lines are available for small text Six lines are available for large text 186 Profile XP System Guide 13 May 2005 Enabling Video Monitor timecode burn in IV Show timecode on line 1 7 6 Select timecode alignment using the drop down list IV Show timecode on line 12 7 and aligned Lett Center N Finish Cancel E 7 Select text formatting as desired You may want to experiment with text formatting to see what looks best in your application Changes in timecode text formatting also effect the text overlay 8 Select another video monitor output to modify or click Finish to save your settings NOTE To select the source of video timecode for the video monitor output timecode burn in refer to Selecting the video output as a timecode output for the channel on page 223 13 May 2005 Profile XP System Guide 187 T Chapter 5 Mod
127. asynchronous Set frame sync to Auto time Refer to Recording synchronous and asynchronous feeds on page 150 Playout timing is 16 lines delayed Playout timing set to E to E timed output Change playout timing to Zero Timed output Refer to Adjusting playout timing to match zero time on page 144 Vertical shift when switching between video input and playout Playout timing set to Zero Timed output Change playout timing to E to E Timed output Refer to Adjusting playout timing to match E to E timing on page 146 Compression artifacts are present in the output Video quality setting is too low for your program material Select higher video quality preset refer to Guidelines for selecting Video Quality Presets on page 156 or define your own video quality preset Refer to Defining and selecting a custom video quality preset on page 162 Profile XP System Guide 289 Chapter 12 Solving Common Setup Problems Problems with audio This troubleshooting aid provides corrective action for some common audio problems Search the table for the problem you are experiencing then try the corrective action Some problems have more than one corrective action Problem Possible Cause s Corrective Action AES EBU or analog audio No audio I O or the audio does not match the video You are using audio I O connectors for audio channels
128. at step 2 Continue adding one system at a time until all Profile XP systems have been added to Media Manager 8 Use the following steps to transfer a clip over the network a Double click on the icon of another machine on the network b Double click on the volume icon default name is Ext in the same machine A default bin should be displayed c Double click on the icon of the local machine on the network and then the volume icon If there are no clips on any machines you can open VdrPanel and create some See Profile XP User Manual for VdrPanel information d Click and drag a clip to a bin on another machine Dragging a clip to a different machine always results in a copy the original clip is not deleted e Repeat steps a through d until you have tested the network to your satisfaction NOTE You can select the transfer monitor icon on the toolbar to open the transfer monitor and watch the progress of the network transfer Now that you have tested the network connections for all Profile XP systems you are ready to use the video network 13 May 2005 Profile XP System Guide 285 T Chapter 11 Setting up a Simple Network 286 Profile XP System Guide 13 May 2005 Chapter 12 Solving Common Setup Problems This chapter provides help for solving some common setup problems that occur because Profile XP system features or signal requirements are not well understood This chapter is organized by problem area
129. ata MI VA ae HRA sa a a t vid 249 Overview of the Prolink communications windOW a asis 250 Running PortServer to enable remote Operation ec ceseeeeeseeeeeneeeeeseeeeeneeeeeeneeeeeaes 251 Setting up AMP remote control ddaa eee 252 Configuring AMP protocol controOl siississsas eee 252 Using the AMP application for local control 254 Setting QPOs vase se r du heaved sarearena a a aaa EEEE ka kde d 255 toadingiaciprts eed dis siem J isas i a eee 256 Playingra Clip stii 3 sa ditt E A E eee adas tadu akas adeeb encanbeliadiges 256 Recordinogi Cliper ces tr su gsus rasta ira R d aise ad era es ana vai d 256 Setting up a Simple Network About Profile Networking ssiisssa ease 257 About Windows NT networking aidssddaa aaa 257 About the Fibre Channel video network Option i1aiiiaa aaa 258 About the Ethernet video network option cc eeceeeeeeeeeeneeeeeneeeeeneeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeneeeeee 261 Simple Networks ii ada 263 Profile XP systems with both video network options installed aa da 263 Setting up a simple Windows NT network aaa 264 Set machine name and IP address on each Profile XP system scene 264 Power off and connect proper Cabling ccccccecceeceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneaeeeeeeesseeeeeeessnnaeeees 266 Power on the hub or switch and configure if necessary aia a 267 Power on and test each Profile XP system on the network ccceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeteees 267
130. ates for HD 50 59 94 and 60 fps accepts house black and tri level sync reference Profile XP System Guide 23 PVS 3000 features include T Chapter 1 Introducing the Profile XP Media Platform e Up to 3 high definition HD channels of broadcast quality video Up to 4 standard definition SD channels of broadcast quality video PVS 3000 Series channel configurations by model Model Number of SD Number of HD Number of HD SD Channel HD Channel Number video codecs MPEG Encoders MPEG Decoders Configuration Configuration PVS3004 2 0 2 2 play record or 0 in 2 out 1 in 1 out PVS3014 2 1 2 2 play record or 1 in 2 out 1 in 1 out PVS3024 4 0 2 2 play record or 0 in 2 out 2 in 2 out PVS3034 4 1 2 2 play record or 1 in 2 out 2 in 2 out 24 Profile XP System Guide MPEG 2 4 2 0 Main Level from 20 80 Mb s long GoP for HD HD SMPTE 292M 1 485 Gbs Sertal Digital I O includes downconverted SD SDI and composite analog monitor with text overlay and timecode burn in 1080 and 720p line rates for HD 50 59 94 and 60 fps accepts house black and tri level sync reference DVCAM video compression for SD DVCPRO 25 video compression for SD DVCPRO 50 video compression with 50 Mb s option for SD MPEG 2 4 2 0 Main Level from 4 to 15 Mb s long GoP for SD MPEG 2 4 2 2 Main Level from 4 25 Mb s long GoP or up to 50 Mb s with 50 Mb s option for SD MPEG D10 I frame at 30
131. atest lod file for your disk drive type For example use Use Ciprico_Seagate73LP_ lt version gt lod for 73GB Seagate drives Use Ciprico_Seagate18 1HH_ lt version gt lod for 180G Seagate drives Where lt version gt specifies the firmware version number To determine drive type and current firmware version select a drive in the tree view then note the drive properties reported in the right hand pane 100 Profile XP System Guide 13 May 2005 Performing PFR500 maintenance tasks 3 Click Open The Progress Report window appears showing the disk firmware download task and the percentage completion Disk access LED behavior flashing green during download off during disk reboot flashing green during disk initialization NOTE If you receive a warning that some disks failed to download make note of the disk numbers then proceed to Disk firmware download Alternate procedure on page 101 to recover from this condition and complete the firmware upgrade 4 Perform step through step 3 to upgrade disk drives for the remaining controllers 5 After successfully downloading disk firmware use the following steps to restore default disk settings This is required after downloading disk firmware a Right click the controller in the tree view then select Restore Disk Settings in the context menu The hour glass appears while the operation is performed This takes several seconds b On receiving Operation Successful
132. bling The Installation Guide for your PVS Series model provides complete information on connecting your RAID storage chassis to the Profile XP system using both single and redundant RAID controllers It also describes how to set Fibre Channel Loop address and Chassis ID for the RAID storage and the Expansion Chassis Profile XP System Guide 13 May 2005 Configuring RAID storage using GVG Disk Utility Configuring RAID storage using GVG Disk Utility After connecting the Fibre Channel RAID storage system to the Profile XP Media Platform you must use the GVG Disk Utility to bind the storage system s disk modules into logical units LUNs and create a video file system that is recognizable by the Profile XP Media Platform 13 May 2005 This section includes the following About configuring storage on page 72 Introducing the GVG Disk Utility on page 75 Binding disks and creating a video file system on page 77 Configuring hot spare drives on page 83 Changing the video file system volume name on page 85 Expanding storage on page 87 Unbinding LUNs for reconfiguration on page 91 NOTE If your Profile XP Media Platform is part of an Open SAN disregard the procedures in this section and refer to the configuration instructions in the Open SAN Instruction Manual Profile XP System Guide 71 GE T Chapter 3 Working with RAID Storage Using GVG Disk Utility About configuring storage This
133. board to be able to select all the desired embedded outputs AES EBU Embedded Vv DO Vv T Vv T Vv M Vv m Vv IV lt None gt v Nannes Vv M SDI O lt None gt 2 y Vv M sDI O S DI OutdJ7 4 SDI DutB J7 SDI DutB J9 8 Click the right hand drop down list arrow in the Embedded column for the channel pair you want to configure and select an audio group and channel pair as shown NOTE Up to two audio groups 8 audio channels can be embedded on a single video output AES EBU Embedded C r r m r I SDI Out J9 Y GTITk1R v M SDI OutBJ9 v G lt None gt M SDI DutBJ9 G kakakakikikikaki Group2 Embedded Ch 1 amp 2 Group2 Embedded Ch 3 amp 4 Group3 Embedded Ch 1 amp 2 Group3 Embedded Ch 3 amp 4 Group4 Embedded Ch 1 amp 2 Group4 Embedded Ch 3 amp 4 9 Click Finish to save your settings 200 Profile XP System Guide 13 May 2005 Checking AES EBU input status Checking AES EBU input status The Audio Input dialog box in Configuration Manager allows you to check AES EBU input status To view AES EBU input status 1 Click Audio Input in Configuration Manager The Audio Input dialog box appears 2 Click Next to navigate to Audio Input page 2 Audio Input Page 2 of 2 x AES EBU Input Status Physical Location AES EBUn2I14 AES EBUIn3J14 AES EBU n4 14 AES EBUn5J14 AES EBU n6 J14 AES EBU n7 14 AES EBU n8J14 Unl
134. cable to DVCPRO channels 5 Select the video data rate using the Video Quality drop down list Video quality settings for each data rate are shown in the table Channel Configuration Profile1 x By vert 8 vez j videoOniy AudioOni Name in MPEG Player Recorder 7 3 vti ity Video 9 ly i Audio Track 1 Timecode Configuration for Video Track 1 Type Add Channel Remove Channel Add Track Delete Track Summary Encoder Decoder Video Quality kkNone gt MPEG Play 1 Medium 15 Mb s a His Video Input High 24 Mb s Medium 15 Mb s Low 8 Mb s Draft 4 Mb s Only 10 Mb s Custom2 12 Mb s Lustom4 12 Mb sl Browse Video VBI Encoding Advanced Crosspoints Standard Definition Data Rate Chrominance GoP Quality Settings Sampling Draft 4 Mbps 4 2 0 IBBPBBPBBPBBPBBP PVS 1000 IBPBPBPBPBPB PVS 1100 Low 8 Mbps Medium default 15Mbps 4 2 2 High 24Mbps High Definition Data Rate GoP Quality Settings Low 30 Mb s IBBPBBPBBPBBPBBP default Medium default 55 Mb s High 80 Mb s You can customize video quality settings using the Custom Video Quality Settings dialog box Refer to Defining and selecting a custom video quality preset on page 162 13 May 2005 Profile XP System Guide 131 T Chapter 4 Adding or Removing Channels 6 Click the Bro
135. cation otherwise you won t see the change until the next time the application is started When the Channel Configuration dialog box is opened it allocates all available outputs so the effect of crosspoint changes may be seen as you make them e Adding and configuring channels is not dependent on the number or availability of video audio and timecode resources since you are only defining a channel Resources are allocated when a channel is selected by a Profile application Only one instance of a channel can be used at a time e Configuration Manager limits the number of channels you can define to sixteen If you need to define more than sixteen channels consider saving channel configurations and then defining new ones Refer to Saving and restoring your system settings on page 57 Default settings for channels you add When you add a channel the new channel is created with settings derived from the current channel The current channel is the channel tab selected in the Channel Configuration dialog box Channel settings that are copied include channel type number of video audio uncompressed VBI lines and timecode tracks video quality still play mode and audio window size After adding a channel all you have to do is specify video audio and timecode inputs and outputs When a channel is added it is given a default name You may change the name by entering it in the name text box in the channel tab Channel names can hav
136. ch to Standby IMPORTANT If your Profile XP Media Platform is part of an Open SAN disregard the following step and refer to the instructions Open SAN Instruction Manual for shutting down the Open SAN 5 Power off the RAID storage system by powering off the RAID Controller chassis prior to or at the same time as the RAID Expansion chassis gt gt gt CAUTION You must always power off the PFR500 RAID Controller chassis prior to or at the same time as the Expansion Chassis Failure to do so on a PFR 500 may force some LUNs offline This will cause loss of access to the media file system when the system is powered on again Refer to Forcing LUNs online Recovery from improper power off sequence on page 103 6 Power off all peripheral devices 46 Profile XP System Guide 13 May 2005 Chapter 2 Working with Configuration Manager 13 May 2005 Configuration manager is the tool you II use to set up the Profile XP for operation You ll use Configuration Manager to do things like create a video file system on the RAID storage system create or modify channels and configure system hardware settings Some models allow you to configure codecs The Configuration Manager window appears as shown here ty Profile1 ME El File View Help Q3 File System af Network 2 Video Timing Pa Video Input GA Video Output Video Codec ca Video Monitor Audio Reference lley Audio Input A F Audio Output 3 Aud
137. ck 3 amp 4 H ld Timecode fH Track 1 C Audio Ch 15 16 J14 6 Use the check boxes in the Audio Channels list to assign an audio channel I O pair Refer to Using the Channel Configuration dialog box on page 119 for information on why some Audio Channels appear dimmed red or in use NOTE You can verify the audio format of an audio channel pair Refer to Changing the audio I O format on page 197 Profile XP System Guide 195 T Chapter 6 Modifying a Channel Audio Settings Selecting audio channels for an audio track In order to record or play audio you must assign audio channels to the audio tracks you add After assigning audio channels you need to confirm the audio routing for the audio channel To select audio channels for each audio track 1 Double click the Audio icon to expand the configuration tree 2 Select the audio Track icon in the configuration tree Channel Configuration Profile1 KS PR C Audio Ch 15 16 J14 3 Select a pair of audio channels for each audio track by placing a check in the appropriate check box You can change the audio format for the audio channels using Configuration Manager Refer to Changing the audio I O format on page 197 4 Click Finish to save your settings 196 Profile XP System Guide 13 May 2005 Changing the audio I O format Changing the audio I O format This section describes how to select the au
138. cting 197 ancillary data about 231 242 adding removing tracks 232 removing a data track 235 selecting video I Os used 233 Applications Subsystem 34 39 asynchronous feeds recording 150 audio 16 bit 202 24 bit 202 about 191 analog audio line mode selecting 208 analog input level adjusting 205 analog output level adjusting 206 coding format about 202 selecting 202 common setup problems 290 delay adjusting using custom settings 204 using presets 203 I O formats available 192 13 May 2005 I O formats selecting 197 interface chassis 192 muting analog output 207 number of channels 191 output format selecting 199 reference level selecting 209 shuttle mode how audio sounds 210 tracks adding or removing 193 Audio board description 41 Audio board connector 327 audio channels selecting 139 audio hardware settings setting the audio window size 210 shuttle mode 210 audio I O see audio audio tracks audio channels selecting 193 196 audio window size setting 210 audio Overload clipping 205 automatic logon 44 45 B binding disks 72 77 block diagram board level 35 BNC216 AES EBU Breakout Panel 192 rear panel drawing 336 board location 56 browse video defining custom presets 162 enabling 132 selecting quality 160 BVW protocol 246 C Canadian Certified AC Adapter 17 Canadian Certified Power Cords 17 Canadian EMC Notice of Compliance 17 certification 18 Channel Configuration Warning symbol 124 Channel Conf
139. cting multiple controllers for disk firmware upgrades however upgrades are handled one controller at a time Take this into consideration when scheduling the upgrade To download disk drive firmware 1 In the GVG Disk Utility right click a controller in the tree view then select Advanced Download Firmware in the context menu NOTE You can download firmware to a single disk by right clicking a disk icon in the tree view 2 In the Open dialog box locate the c profile microcode directory then select the latest lod file for your disk drive type For example use Use Ciprico_Seagate73LP_ lt version gt lod for 73GB Seagate drives Use Ciprico_Seagate 18 1HH_ lt version gt lod for 180G Seagate drives Where lt version gt specifies the firmware version number To determine drive type and current firmware version select a drive in the tree view then note the drive properties reported in the right hand pane Profile XP System Guide 107 GE T Chapter 3 Working with RAID Storage Using GVG Disk Utility 3 Click Open The Progress Report window appears showing the disk firmware download task and the percentage completion Disk access LED behavior flashing green during download off during disk reboot flashing green during disk initialization 4 Perform step 1 through step 3 to upgrade disk drives for the remaining controllers 5 When finished reboot the RAID storage and the Profile XP Media Platform Refer t
140. d line Signal Detector 2 RXD Received Data 3 TXD Transmitted Data 4 DTR Data Terminal Ready 5 GND Ground 6 DSR Data Set Ready 7 RTS Reguest To Send 8 CTS Clear To Send 9 CE Ring Detect Profile XP System Guide 13 May 2005 I O Panel RS 422 connectors I O Panel RS 422 connectors The Profile XP I O Panel has eight 9 pin female connectors for RS 422 connections 13 May 2005 Female 000060 O i ee Osas 9 6 Pin Signal Description 1 GND Signal Ground 2 TXD Differential Transmit Data low 3 RXD Differential Receive Data high 4 GND Signal Ground 5 NC 6 GND Signal Ground 7 TXD Differential Transmit Data high 8 RXD Differential Receive Data low 9 GND Signal Ground Profile XP System Guide 321 Chapter B I O Panel GPI connectors The Profile XP Media Platform has two 25 pin female connectors mounted on the I O Panel for General Purpose Interface GPI input and output connections GPI Input connector on I O Panel ki Female O sita O 000000000000 0624 32 25 14 Pin Signal Pin Signal 1 Signal Ground 14 GPI In5 2 Signal Ground 15 Signal Ground 3 GPI In1 16 Signal Ground 4 Signal Ground 17 GPI In6 5 Signal Ground 18 Signal Ground 6 GPI In2 19 Signal Ground 7 Signal Ground 20 GPI In7 8 Signal Ground 21 Signal Ground 9 GPI In3 22 Signal Ground 10 Signal Ground 23 GPI In8 11 Signal Ground 24 Signal Grou
141. dec 1 Choose Video Codec in the Configuration Manager window The Video Codec dialog box appears The DVCPRO 50 codec type will not appear if you do not have the 50Mbps license Profile XP System Guide 153 T Chapter 5 Modifying a Channel Video Settings Video Codec Page 1 of 1 2 Select one or more codecs from the list and click one of the Video Codec Type options 3 Click Finish to save your settings 4 Restart the media platform to put the codec type selection into effect 154 Profile XP System Guide 13 May 2005 Selecting the video I Os used by a channel Selecting the video I Os used by a channel You can use the Channel Configuration dialog box to change the video input and outputs used by a channel 13 May 2005 To change video input and output used by a channel 1 Choose Channel Configuration in the Configuration Manager window The 5 Channel Configuration dialog box appears Channel Configuration Profile1 x a vn 8 vez j video0ny 8 AudioOny Name Type Add Channel ia MPEG Player Recorder 7 Remove Channel 4 m Add Track Audio ly Timecode Delete Track Summary Configuration for Video Track 1 Encoder Decoder Video Quality h MPEG Rech MPEG Play 1 Medium 15 Mb s JHE Video Input Video Outputs lt None gt lt None gt EX SDI In J5 lt SDI OutaJ5 SDI 1nBJ5 SDI OutBJ5 O Colorbars L Black B
142. default up conversion aspect ratio setting for the playout channel The aspect ratio attribute is saved as part of the MPEG video media file If the clip is transferred to another machine or used as part of a complex movie the attribute remains in effect Once the clip has been recorded you can use Media Manager to change the clip s aspect ratio when it is up converted for playout on an HD output This attribute applies to all clips recorded on a channel with this setting To set the aspect ratio when recording SD MPEG material 1 Double click the video icon to expand the configuration tree 2 Choose a video track in the configuration tree such as Track 1 3 Click the Aspect Ratio button to see the aspect ratio choices Channel Configuration P S 3000 x a v S vez By vis ves Name Type Virl H Video HH Track 1 H A Audio dj Track 1 amp 2 Qi Track 3 amp 4 I Timecode H Track 1 oj Configuration for Video Track 1 Add Channel fue MPEG Player Recorder 7 Remove Channel Add Track Delete Track zi Summary Specify the picture aspect ratio for material recorded into this video track 43 C 16 9 Full Height Anamorphic 4 Select the desired aspect ratio then click Finish 13 May 2005 Cancel Help Browse Video Aspect Ratio VBI Encoding Advanced Crosspoints Profile XP System Guide 135
143. ding disk firmware restore disk settings This is always required after downloading disk firmware a Right click the controller in the tree view then select Restore Disk Settings in the context menu The hour glass appears while the operation is performed This takes several seconds b On receiving Operation Successful message click OK 5 Reboot the RAID storage and Profile XP media platform using the System reboot procedure on page 94 NOTE If your PFR500 is part of an Open SAN disregard the previous step and refer to the instructions in the Open SAN Instruction Manual for powering off and powering on the Open SAN 6 Start your control application and verify access to the media file system 102 Profile XP System Guide 13 May 2005 Performing PFR500 maintenance tasks Forcing LUNs online Recovery from improper power off sequence You must always power off the PFR500 RAID Controller chassis prior to or at the same time as the PFR500E Expansion Chassis Failure to do so may force some LUNs offline This will cause loss of access to the media file system when the system is powered on again Offline LUNs can be recovered without the loss of the media file system using the GVG Disk Utility In Disk Utility offline LUNs appear under the Bound node in the tree view however LUN status is offline To force LUNs online using GVG Disk Utility 1 In GVG Disk Utility expand the tree view under the controller icon
144. ding or Removing Channels 8 Select the browse video data rate using the Browse Video Quality drop down list Browse video quality settings for each data rate are shown in the table Channel Configuration Profile1 x a vert 8 vez y videoDniy 8 Audion Name Type Add Channel in MPEG Player Recorder h Remove Channel g vii iy Video H Track 1 Add Track 4 Audio ly Timecode Delete Track Summary Configuration for Video Track 1 Browse Video Encoder Browse Video Quality lt None gt VHS Quality 1 5 Mb s 7 J LJ Any 7 K MPEG Rec 1 I MPEG Rec 2 L MPEG Rec 3 C MPEG Rec 4 Browse Video VBI Encoding Advanced Crosspoints Browse Video Data Rate GoP Quality Settings Draft 5 Mbps IBBPBBPBBPBBPBBP default Low 8 Mbps Medium 1 2Mbps VHS Quality 1 5Mbps default You can customize video quality settings using the Custom Video Quality Settings dialog box Refer to Defining and selecting a custom video quality preset on page 162 134 Profile XP System Guide 13 May 2005 Setting the SD MPEG recorder aspect ratio Setting the SD MPEG recorder aspect ratio When you record standard definition material with an MPEG recorder you can specify the aspect ratio to be used when that material is played out on an HD output If you select an aspect ratio of 16 9 this setting overrides the
145. dio I O format you need for your system The Profile XP system can be configured to operate with analog AES EBU digital and digital embedded SMPTE 272M Level A audio An interface chassis is required for analog audio and AES EBU digital audio see About Profile XP Audio on page 191 If you are using only embedded audio no interface chassis is required Select audio input format To select audio input format 1 Click Audio Routing in the Configuration Manager window The Audio Input Routing dialog box appears AudioR outing Page 1 of 3 TAT 9 M z um um D 2 Select the audio input format for each audio channel pair 13 May 2005 Profile XP System Guide 197 T Chapter 6 Modifying a Channel Audio Settings 3 If you selected embedded audio format perform the following steps for each audio channel input pair requiring embedded audio a Click the left hand drop down list arrow in the Embedded column for the channel pair you want to configure and select a video input as shown NOTE With one audio board only the first 4 video inputs are selectable SDI ln J9 h b Click the right hand drop down list arrow in the Embedded column for the channel pair you want to configure and select an audio group and channel pair as shown NOTE Up to two audio groups 8 audio channels can be extracted from a single video input Group Embedded Ch 1 amp 2 3 Click Finish
146. dio system plays audio during jog or off speed play by changing the audio window size The audio window is a segment of audio that is heard when you move through a clip You can specify the size of the window and thus the amount of the audio that you hear by selecting a number of fields To set the audio window size 1 Select the Audio icon in the configuration tree 2 Click the tab for the channel you want to modify 3 Click the Audio icon 4 4 Use the Audio Window Size drop down list to select a field size from the five available choices 5 fields plays five fields once then silence 0 plays silence during jog operations and 5 10 and 20 fields play the specified number of fields continuously until you press stop play or pause in your controlling application 5 Click Finish to save changes Channel Configuration PORTA2 x a vert S ve vis Sy va By ves By ves vez Name Type Add Channel fue Ho MPEG Player Recorder 7 Remove Channel 4 Audio Q Track 1 amp 2 Add Track Q Track 3 amp 4 Delete Track E ly Timecode BSE Track 1 El Ei Data Track 1 v Summary Configuration for all audio tracks Audio Window Size Jog behavior fio Repeats ten fields continuously 7 5 Plays five fiel once Silence 5 Repeats five fields continuous 10 Repeats ten fields continuousl Audio Setup Cancel Help 210 Profile XP System Guide 13 May 2005
147. djusting analog audio input level on page 205 or Adjusting analog audio output level on page 206 Embedded audio No audio input Wrong video source selected Select the correct video input Refer to Select audio input format on page 197 Embedded audio No audio input Wrong audio group or channel pair selected Determine which audio group is being used in the video input signal by using Viewing video input status on page 168 then refer to Select audio input format on page 197 Embedded audio No audio output Wrong video output selected Select the correct video output Refer to Select audio output format on page 199 Profile XP System Guide 13 May 2005 13 May 2005 Problems with audio Problem Possible Cause s Corrective Action Embedded audio No audio output Incorrect audio group or channel pair selected for your system Verify which embedded audio group and channel pair are used in your system then refer to Select audio output format on page 199 Audio level meters do not display the correct reference level used in my system Incorrect reference level Refer to Selecting audio reference level on page 209 Distorted audio or no audio Wrong incoming digital audio coding format selected Verify the input audio format is set correctly refer to Selecting incoming digital audio coding
148. e Rebuild in the context menu The rebuild process begins You can verify this by checking the drive status reported in the Disk Utility and the disk module LEDs On completion the drive status changes from rebuild to online You may need to refresh the GVG Disk Utility display Profile XP System Guide 103 T Chapter 3 Working with RAID Storage Using GVG Disk Utility Starting and Stopping disk initialization Initializing the disk array aligns the physical disk drive heads and where applicable sets the striping and parity across the disk drives in a newly created logical unit It takes a very long time to complete and is rarely needed Initialize disk modules only when instructed to do so by Grass Valley product support Checking and restoring default PFR500 RAID Controller settings RAID Controller settings are checked every time the GVG Disk Utility is started When the Disk Utility starts you may receive a warning message stating that current RAID controller settings are not set to the defaults required by the current Profile XP software or Fiber Channel SCSI software installed If you do not receive the message your controller settings are correct To check and restore PFR 500 RAID controller settings 1 Start GVG Disk Utility then perform one of the following steps Ifyou receive an incorrect RAID Controller settings message when GVG Disk Utility opens continue with step 2 which follows GYG Disk Utili
149. e ayo 00000000000000000 a r 00000000000000000 amp 00000000000000000 Sri z a 2 F n oO Oo Q ooooo0o000000000000 g Sic O0000000000000000 C I o 0O0000000000000000 a 0 0000000000000000 wea O0000000000000000 3 o O0000000000000000 me c O00000000000000000 O 0 00000000000000000 9 Oo ri ke r 5 0O Zx O Oo LU g S BS eh 3 oz a OG cz rn on 5 oF oa o i mm 281 Profile XP System Guide 13 May 2005 T Chapter 11 Setting up a Simple Network Power on the hub or switch and configure if necessary Refer to the your device s vendor documentation to power on and configure as required Test the Ethernet video network using Media Manager Use this procedure to perform a quick test of your video network setup with Media Manager Media Manager allows you to have access to media stored anywhere on your network and provides tools for managing that media such as explore cut copy paste delete and transfer You can manage media stored locally on the disk array attached to the Profile XP system or on any Profile XP system connected to the network You can also transfer media stored on any Profile XP system on your video network via the video network connection For detailed information on using all the features of Media Manager refer to the Profile XP User Manual This procedure tests the video network starting with only two Profile XP systems then continues by adding one Profile XP sys
150. e Application Subsystem provides a platform for running Windows based applications for configuring and controlling the Real Time Subsystem both locally and remotely Rear panel I O includes e Mouse Keyboard and SVGA Connectors e One Serial Port e One Parallel Port Two USB Ports e Audio Line Level IN OUT and Mic Input e 10 100BASE T RJ 45 Ethernet Port RS422 Board 13 May 2005 This RS 422 adapter is installed as part of the Applications Processor system under Windows NT Control applications running on the Application Processor receive control commands from a remote protocol listener that monitors the RS 422 ports Profile XP System Guide 39 T Chapter 1 Introducing the Profile XP Media Platform Real Time Subsystem The Real Time Subsystem includes the following components Real Time System The Real Time System board contains a real time processor and peripheral devices A second generation of this board Real Time System II is now used for all Profile XP models The RTP II board requires Profile System Software v 5 0 or higher This board manages all the hardware involved in controlling the flow of video audio timecode in and out of the system This includes video I O boards audio I O boards video compression boards and networking and storage Other board functionality includes e Generation of system clocks for SD 27MHz and HD either 37 0879 or 37 125 Mhz e Generation of frame reference pulses e Abili
151. e Fibre Channel video network option provides a 1Gbs Fibre Channel interface for high speed transfer of video clips among devices connected to the network Network devices can include Profiles or Profile XP systems near on line video servers and video archive systems to name a few Use the procedures in this section to set up your Profile XP systems on a Fibre Channel video network Here is a list of the steps you will perform e Set up the Windows NT Ethernet network e Configure Fibre Channel network settings on each Profile XP e Manually Edit the hosts file on each Profile XP e Power down and connect proper Fibre Channel cabling e Power on the switch and configure if necessary Test the Fibre Channel network using Media Manager NOTE To communicate across the network all Fibre Channel machines should have Profile system software version 2 5 installed Set up the Windows NT Ethernet network When setting up the Fibre Channel network you must first set up the Windows NT Ethernet network Use the procedure found on page 264 Setting up a simple Windows NT network then continue with Configure Fibre Channel network settings on each Profile XP on page 269 268 Profile XP System Guide 13 May 2005 Configure Fibre Channel network settings on each Profile XP Configure Fibre Channel network settings on each Profile XP After setting up the Windows NT network you must configure the IP address and subnet mask for the Fibre Channel in
152. e Profile XP has a Ethernet connector for Windows NT networking and another Ethernet connector on the optional Ethernet board for video networking Both are 8 pin RJ 45 snap in telephone type connectors Use Category 5 unshielded twisted pair cable The pin outs for both connectors are the same 318 9676 18 Pin Signal Pin Signal 1 Transmit 5 not used 2 Transmit 6 Receive 3 Receive 7 not used 4 not used 8 not used Profile XP System Guide 13 May 2005 Parallel Port connector Parallel Port connector The parallel port uses a 25 pin female connector located on the rear panel of the Profile XP Media Platform 1 fe 14 Ce Se Ce es Female Ge Se Se 13 o e 25 O 0624 31 Pin Signal Pin Signal 1 Strobe 14 Auto Feed 2 Data bit 0 15 Fault 3 Data bit 1 16 Init 4 Data bit 2 17 SLCT IN gt Data bit 3 18 Ground 6 Data bit 4 19 Ground 7 Data bit 5 20 Ground 8 Data bit 6 21 Ground 9 Data bit 7 22 Ground 10 ACK 23 Ground 11 Busy 24 Ground 12 Paper Error 25 Ground 13 Select 13 May 2005 Profile XP System Guide 319 Chapter B 320 RS 232 connectors The Profile XP Media Platform has one 9 pin male RS 232 interface connector on the rear panel o oh_g O O 4 Male O o 6 IoD O 0624 33 Pin Signal Description 1 DCD Receive
153. e add button 122 Selected Disks list TIP Use shift click or control click to select disks NOTE As an aid in identifying a disk module s physical location select it in the Selected Disks list then click dentify Disks This causes the disk drive LED to flash d Click OK to close the Binding LUN dialog box and begin the binding process The Progress Report dialog box opens showing the status of the binding process 13 May 2005 Profile XP System Guide 79 T Chapter 3 Working with RAID Storage Using GVG Disk Utility Current Progress Busy Commands List e Repeat step a through step d for all unbound disks on all remaining controllers displayed in the tree view PFR500 and PFR 600 controllers take less than a minute to bind a LUN but can bind only one LUN at a time You must wait until binding is completed before binding the next LUN PFC500 and PFR 700 controllers take more than an hour to bind a LUN but allow multiple binding processes at the same time f Upon 100 completion click Close in Progress Report window Do not proceed until all LUNs are finished binding g Restart the Windows operating system on the Profile XP Media Platform h Start Configuration Manager using the desktop shortcut or by selecting Start Programs Profile Applications Configuration Manager i In Configuration Manager click File System to start the GVG Disk Utility 6 In the GVG Disk Utility main menu c
154. e following 13 May 2005 System reboot procedure on page 94 Checking RAID controller microcode version on page 95 Loading RAID controller microcode All models on page 96 Identifying disk modules prior to removal on page 98 Performing PFR 500 maintenance tasks on page 100 Performing PFR 600 maintenance tasks on page 107 Performing PFR 700 maintenance tasks on page 113 Resetting the PFC 500 system clock on page 117 Profile XP System Guide 93 a T Chapter 3 Working with RAID Storage Using GVG Disk Utility System reboot procedure Some RAID storage maintenance procedures require rebooting the RAID storage system and Profile XP Media Platform Use the following procedure when a reboot is required NOTE If your Profile XP Media Platform is part of an Open SAN disregard this procedure and refer to the instructions in the Open SAN Instruction Manual for shutting down the Open SAN 1 Power off the RAID storage system by powering off the RAID Controller chassis prior to or at the same time as the RAID Expansion chassis AN CAUTION You must always power off the PFR 500 RAID Controller chassis prior to or at the same time as the PFR500E Expansion Chassis Failure to do so may force some LUNs offline This will cause loss of access to the media file system when the system is powered on again Refer to Forcing LUNs online Recovery from improper power off sequence on page 103 2
155. e of the VBI information Lines are erased before ancillary data is inserted To erase data from vertical blanking lines 1 Choose Video Output in the Configuration Manager Window The Video Output dialog box appears 2 Click Next to navigate to Video Output page 2 of 3 Vertical Interval Setup SDI OutB J5 Sect Al Vertical Ancillary Data Packets Which lines will be reserved for vertical ancillary data packets V Clear lines between fio 1 32 Defer Syke Moen ie eS A fiz and Video Output Page 2 of 3 x M YITC Generation Which lines should be used after vertical ancillary data packet insertion Y Generate VITC timecode on Line 1 112 x Line 2 14 x Finish Cancel Ea 3 Select a video output from the list or click Select All to configure all the video outputs at the same time Profile XP System Guide 13 May 2005 Deleting unwanted VITC and other VBI signals 4 Perform one of the following Ifyou do not want to erase any lines clear the Erase lines between check box Ifyou want to erase lines in the vertical interval select the Erase lines between check box then select the starting and ending line numbers using the sliders Which lines will be reserved for vertical ancillary data packets M Clear lines between ITT 5 Click Finish to save your settings 13 May 2005 Profile XP System Guide 227 228 T Chapter
156. e settings for each video input including input frame buffer operation input blanking loss of signal behavior and VITC reader settings Video Output used to configure the settings for each video output including loss of signal behavior vertical interval blanking and VITC generator settings Video Codec Used to configure the operation of each video codec present on the Profile XP models that have one or more Video Codec boards e Video Monitor used to set up timecode burn in and text overlay on the optional video monitor board or monitor output on the HD SDI board See Chapter 5 Modifying a Channel Video Settings for more information on modifying video settings File View Help video Timing Paseo EET Video S of BUY Video Dupa Pege 1of3 BIJ BBW TL video CodecPasetott _ SSSSS i Y SERET iaeo Montor Pase 1o12 C amp G 1 Video Monitor Setup Cod Monitor Out 11 Monitor Name Coc Monitor OutC JT1 Monitor DuBJ11 Cod Monitor OutD J11 Slot 5 BNC 1 top T Dither output M NTSC with Pedestal T n La omon owed i 50 Profile XP System Guide 13 May 2005 Audio setup items Audio setup items Configuration Manager includes four menu items used for configuring the audio input output settings These include e Audio Reference used to set the audio reference level The audio reference level is used to set the default audio level in some Profile ap
157. e up to 32 characters 13 May 2005 Profile XP System Guide 121 T Chapter 4 Adding or Removing Channels Why resources appear dimmed red or in use The channel configuration dialog box uses colored text to display resource names to help prevent you from creating resource conflicts that could occur if you try to use channels at the same time When a resource such as a video output is not assigned to any channel the check box next to its name is cleared and its name is in black print If the resource is selected on another channel tab its check box and name are dimmed Video Output s Dimmed text Indicates the resource is selected on another channel tab If you select a resource that s already selected on another channel tab its text changes from dimmed to red Selecting a resource assigned to another channel is not necessarily a problem You can have several channels that use the same resources However channels assigned the same resource will display a Warning symbol on their channel tabs because the channels cannot be used at the same time See Using the Warning symbol to find shared resources on page 4 124 Video Output s Red text Indicates the resource is selected on more than one channel tab The words in use appear next to a resource name when an application is currently using the resource Resources that are in use are not effected by your crosspoint selections in the Channel Configura
158. e used during recording Quality Preset MPEG 1 Data MPEG 2 Data MPEG 2 Data Chrominance Group of Pictures GoP rate in Mbps rate in Mbps rate in Mbps Sampling Browse Video Standard Def High Def Method Draft 4 4 42 07 IBBPBBPBBPBBPBBP PVS1000 Low 8 8 30 IBPBPBPBPBPB PVS 1100 PVS3000 PVS3500 Medium default 1 2 15 50 4 2 2 4 2 0 only in HD High VHS 1 5 24 80 and browse Quality default video for browse video Custom to 4 3 1 5 in 4 50 in 4 2 2 default Choose from I IP IBP IBBP increments of l increments of 4 or 4 2 0 IBPBP IBBPBBP 12 default default for IBPBPBPBP IBBPBBPBBP browse video IBBPBBPBBPBBP and IBBPBBPBBPBBPBBP PVS1000 or I IP IBPB IBPBPB IBPBPBPB IBPBPBPBPB and IBPBPBPBPBPB PVS1100 PVS3000 PVS3500 Profile XP applications can play but not record clips using open GoP However third party applications can be written for the Profile XP system that do both T Video recorded at 4 2 0 on the Video Processor board PVS1100 PVS3000 and PVS3500 begins at line 23 and so does not include VBI information such as VITC in the compressed video You can select MPEG D10 bitrates of 30 40 or 50 Mb s from the Video Quality drop down list Guidelines for selecting Video Quality Presets With the Profile XP Media Platform you can improve picture quality for your available storage capacity by selecting chrominance sampling method and GoP length for a
159. eamberLEDS on the disks are flashing After verifying please click OK to stop it 98 Profile XP System Guide 13 May 2005 Identifying disk modules prior to removal To identify a disk module 1 Right click the disk icon in the tree view then select Identify Disk in the context menu 2 Perform one of the following steps For PFR500 systems click OK to identify disk modules in the selected LUN Disk modules remain identified for 30 seconds You can locate the disk modules now GYG Disk Utility Eg G Corresponding LEDs will be blue for 30 seconds Click OK to start For PFR600 systems locate the disk module now by locating the flashing blue LED Click OK to extinguish the LED GYG Disk Utility x G Corresponding LEDs are blue For PFC 500 and PFR 700 systems locate the disk modules now by locating the flashing amber LEDs Click OK to extinguish the flashing LED GYG Disk Utility x G The amber LEDs on the disks are flashing After verifying please click OK to stop it This concludes the disk identification procedure 13 May 2005 Profile XP System Guide 99 GE T Chapter 3 Working with RAID Storage Using GVG Disk Utility Performing PFR500 maintenance tasks PFR500 maintenance tasks include e Downloading PFR500 disk drive firmware on page 100 e Disk firmware download Alternate procedure on page 101 e Forcing LUNs online Recovery from improper power off sequence on
160. ears 2 Click Next to navigate to Video Monitor page 2 of 2 Video Monitor Page 2 of 2 x Video Monitor Text Setup Monitor Out4 J11 Background Monitor OutC J11 Transparent vw Monitor OutDJ11 Text Y Small T Bright T Outline 00 00 00 00 IV Show timecode on line fiz and aligned Center 3 Choose a monitor output in the Video Monitor Setup list 4 Select large or small text size then click in the Text entry window and enter the text you want to display on the monitor output NOTE Changes in text formatting also affect the timecode burnin 5 Select the text options Bright or Outline You may want to experiment to discover which text options are the best suited for your application 6 Choose a Transparent or Opaque text background using the Background drop down 13 May 2005 Profile XP System Guide 185 T Chapter 5 Modifying a Channel Video Settings 7 Select another video monitor output to modify or click Finish to saving your settings Enabling Video Monitor timecode burn in You can enable timecode burnin on the Video Monitor outputs Once enabled you must select a source of timecode for the Video Monitor output To select the source of timecode source refer to Selecting the video output as a timecode output for the channel on page 223 To configure timecode burn in 1 Select Video Monitor in the Configuration Manager window The Video Monitor dialog box appe
161. ecoder output With the Profile XP system timing controls you can make additional playout timing adjustments in both video output timing modes to meet downstream system requirements 13 May 2005 Profile XP System Guide 143 T Chapter 5 Modifying a Channel Video Settings Adjusting playout timing to match zero time In Zero Timed Output mode all playout timing is set to match the system reference timing You can use the Video Output Timing Offset adjustment provided for each video output to meet downstream timing requirements To adjust playout timing offset to match zero time 1 Choose Video Timing in the Configuration Manager window The Video Timing dialog box appears 2 Click Next to navigate to Video Timing page 4 of 5 Reference Timing Offset Video Timing Page 4 of 5 x Reterence Timing Offset Adjusting the System Reference System Reference Timing Offset Timing Offset affects the timing of all Fields ines video outputs The reference timing should only be changed if the jo F 0 F fo downstream timing requirements cannot be met by adjusting the video output timing System is locked to reference What playback timing mode should be used for all video outputs C E to E Playback matches E to E 16 line delay fen ra 3 Select Zero Timed mode then click Finish Playout timing is now set to match internal reference NOTE When you change the playout timing mode resta
162. ed Crosspoints Cancel Help 4 Select a video quality preset for the new track using the video quality list box This setting is not applicable for DVCPRO 25 DVCPRO 50 or MPEG D10 channels All video quality settings are shown in the following table See Selecting video quality for a channel on page 156 for guidelines on selecting video quality presets Group of Pictures GoP IBBPBBPBBPBBPBBP PVS 1000 IBPBPBPBPBPB PVS1100 PVS3000 Quality Preset MPEG 2 Data MPEG 2 Data Chrominance rate in Mbps rate in Mbps Sampling Standard Def High Def Method Draft 4 4 2 0 Low 8 PVS3500 Medium default 4 2 2 4 2 0 only in HD High 24 Custom 1 to 4 4 50 in increments of 4 12 default 4 2 2 default or 4 2 0 Choose from I IP IBP IBBP IBPBP IBBPBBP IBPBPBPBP IBBPBBPBBP IBBPBBPBBPBBP and IBBPBBPBBPBBPBBP PVS 1000 or I IP IBPB IBPBPB IBPBPBPB IBPBPBPBPB and IBPBPBPBPBPB PVS1100 PVS3000 PVS3500 Video recorded at 4 2 0 on the Video Processor board PVS 1100 PVS3000 and PVS3500 begins at line 23 and so does not include VBI information such as VITC in the compressed video 13 May 2005 Profile XP System Guide 189 T Chapter 5 Modifving a Channel Video Settings 5 Click Crosspoints then do one or both of the following a For channel types that include a Recorder select a video input from the Video Input check boxes Channel Conf
163. eeeeeesnaeeees 27 Fibre Channel RAID storage ccccccccceeeenceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeaaaeeeeseseeceeeeeseeeneeeeess 28 Fibre Channel and or Ethernet IP Video Networks 0 ccceesceeeeceeeeeneeeeeneeeeeneeeesaeeees 28 Front panel controls and indicators cece aaa 29 Rear Panel VIEW 2 4 cen eaga aa r ada ape jaievada ea des as 32 Standard aCCESSONneS viii science ok tus Pte eed ed i ku gi af ea a s k 33 Profile XP Media Platform system overview isascaa sasar 34 High level block diagram iildddi set 34 Board level block diagram eisini ei n aaraa ieai 35 Starting the Profile XP SyStemmsc ccc cccces cceesesteesescteseecbeedcedeescneedeecsedecdnesesdeesssesedecdeeseeeees 43 Logging on Windows NT 44 Automatic LOJON esiseina aaeain inaenea kai Ea 44 Logging on as Administrator ccccccccceecceeceeeeecneeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeseaeeeeeseeeneeeeeeeees 44 Logging oni as Profile sisri l kp r abas kia as Fassa EE EEEa EE 45 Shutting down the Profile XP system 46 Working with Configuration Manager Tour of Configuration Manager i id eee 48 File Syste Miis e da ada ejas vga a d das j dei 48 NEetWOfKi ssusentt ateisti sia rags a ta na si ej 49 Video set p Mems aan i ol Seat da ee sj 50 A dio s tupiit miSi 1s ciet ersegia s rs rasties dirk ti des rr ee iia ai 51 License Gonfigur tion s s seisusasassmues g nas es stsud as ad s ti e
164. eet downstream timing requirements To adjust playout timing to match E to E timing 1 Choose Video Timing in the Configuration Manager window The Video Output Timing dialog box appears 2 Click Next to navigate to Video Timing page 4 of 5 Reference Timing Offset Video Timing Page 4 of 5 x Reference Timing Offset Adiusting the System Reference System Reference Timing Offset Timing Offset affects the timing of all Fields Lines Pixels video outputs The reference timing should only be changed if the jo fo fo downstream timing requirements cannot be met by adjusting the video output timing System is locked to reference What playback timing mode should be used for all video outputs Zero timed Playback matches internal reference default a EttoE Playback matches E to E 16 line delay Einish Cancel BJ 3 Select E to E output timing mode then click Finish Playout timing is now set to match E to E timing NOTE If you changed the playout timing mode restart all Profile applications currently using the system 4 Some playout timing adjustment may be required to satisfy downstream timing requirements in your system If so adjust playout timing as follows a Select Video Timing in the Configuration Manager window The Video Timing dialog box appears b Click Next to navigate to Video Timing page 3 of 5 146 Profile XP System Guide 13 May 2005 Adjusting playout timing to matc
165. el Disk Interface SDI Video f 21n 20ut wee Compression eas ene F a up to 8 channels sone total Local or Shared Storage Video Processor Board anaes Codec Applications Subsystem Codec SVGA gt Applications Mous Processor Kybd Add Processor plus Windows NT lt S Boards Ethernet 8 gt 2 Audi fines 5 koa Audio Si mm Od Ch1 1f Lennas lt CE E E E na E Grr Tsp Sn T Fabric y RS 422 E a Real Time Interface Processor S Ethernet Video lt LTC amp GPI i Ner Network 0s lt Video Fibre Ch ui ideo lt er Network Genlock lt AES EBU i Audio Profile XP 8112 4 Optional item Block diagram for PVS1100 standard definition system Profile XP System Guide 13 May 2005 Board level block diagram Motherboard The Profile XP system motherboard contains 14 board slots Each slot includes a connection to the system PCI bus and the Video Audio Transport Fabric The Video Audio transport fabric is an integrated 96x96 crosspoint switch which provides uncompressed video CCIR601 and audio 24bit routing Applications Subsystem The Applications Subsystem is a Windows NT computer system and includes the following components Application Processor Board The Application Engine is a standard NLX single board computer Th
166. el Configuration cfg Cancel Hardware and Channel Configuration cfa Channel Confiquration Only cdf 3 Find and select the file name you want to open then click Open All hardware settings take immediate effect If you opened a cdf file the new channels are also available for you to select in Profile applications NOTE If there are hardware differences between Profile XP systems unusable configuration items are ignored Also the settings for video inputs outputs are assigned beginning with the video board closest to slot 1 58 Profile XP System Guide 13 May 2005 Importing system settings Importing system settings 13 May 2005 If your Profile XP systems are connected by an Ethernet network you can import configurations to quickly set up two machines the same way Imported configurations take immediate effect NOTE When a new configuration is imported the current configuration is lost Be sure to use the Save a copy command in the File menu if you want to save the current configuration before using Import When you import a configuration you can select whether you want to modify hardware settings channel configuration or both Channel configurations are used by applications and specify what video audio and timecode resources makeup each channel The hardware settings specify the video and audio hardware setup for the Profile XP system If there are hardware differences between Profile XP system
167. el D 13 May 2005 Profile XP System Guide 247 T Chapter 10 Controlling the Profile XP Remotely Click OK in the Channel Configuration dialog box Repeat step 2 through step 5 for the remaining panels Test the system using your automation controller o N A O Test the Profile XP remote control using your controller Refer to Chapter 12 Solving Common Setup Problems for help if you have a problem 248 Profile XP System Guide 13 May 2005 Setting up RS 422 remote control using Prolink Setting up RS 422 remote control using Prolink Prolink is an application that monitors Profile protocol over the RS 422 communication ports allowing you to control the Profile XP with devices that use Profile protocol Make RS 422 connections as described in the installation guide you received with your Profile XP system then use the information in this section to set up Prolink and to learn more about the Prolink user interface How to set up Prolink 13 May 2005 To set up Prolink 1 Start Prolink using the shortcut on the desktop or by selecting Start Programs Profile Applications Prolink The port selection dialog box appears 2 Select an RS 422 serial port in the port selection dialog box P1 P8 then click OK The Prolink window appears as shown amp Prolink F1 C x File Help Command 3 Repeat step 2 if required for your controller for the remaining channels you
168. els Using the Warning symbol to find shared resources The Warning symbol appears on channel tabs that share the same resource This feature helps you identify resource conflicts which will occur if you try to use both channels at the same time To determine which resource is assigned to more than one channel 1 Click on one of the channel tabs displaying the Warning symbol Channel Configuration Profile1 x vert 8 vez BB videoOniy 8 AudioOnly Name Type Add Channel in MPEG Player Recorder 7 Remove Channel g vti B Video FE Track 1 Add Track Audio ly Timecode Delete Track Summary Configuration for Video Track 1 Encoder Decoder Video Quality i None gt MPEG Py Medium 15 Mb s lg aee t Video Input Video Output s lt None gt J SDI Out J5 VBI Encoding Advanced Crosspoints amp cams 2 Select the Track in the configuration tree displaying the Warning symbol then click the Crosspoints button 3 The resource assigned to more than one channel is displayed in red text 124 Profile XP System Guide 13 May 2005 Using the Summary button to review channel settings Using the Summary button to review channel settings Choosing the Summary button opens the channel summary dialog box which provides a list of channels and the resources assigned to them The Summary dialog box allows you to review all cha
169. ely 4 minutes The rear panel 7 segment LED displays the chassis address Refer to the PFR 500 Instruction Manual to interpret other disk access LED or 7 segment LED behavior PFC500 RAID Storage systems Wait until the System Check LED is off and all disk access LEDs are steady green approximately 2 minutes Refer to the PFC500 Instruction Manual to interpret other front panel LED behavior NOTE Do not power on the Profile XP Media Platform until the RAID storage chassis are fully initialized 3 Power on the Profile XP Media Platform and wait for the Windows operating system to initialize and perform auto logon The Windows NT desktop will appear after successful auto logon Otherwise refer to Logging on Windows NT on page 44 13 May 2005 Profile XP System Guide 43 T Chapter 1 Introducing the Profile XP Media Platform Logging on Windows NT When the Profile system powered on and before Windows NT boots you must make a choice of how you want to logon the system Automatic Logon When the Profile XP system is powered on you may let Windows NT go through an automatic logon seguence The system will perform automatic logon using a default account called profile After automatic logon the Windows NT desktop will appear Automatic logon will occur at power On when The profile account was used the last time the Profile XP Media Platform was turned off The Profile XP Media Platform is initially powered On
170. em Platform Resources 0624 40 Application Subsystem The Application Subsystem is a Windows NT computer subsystem The Application Subsystem provides a platform for running Windows based applications for configuring and controlling the Real Time Subsystem both locally and remotely Real Time Subsystem The Real Time Subsystem contains a real time processor and peripheral devices and runs the VX Works operating system The Real Time Subsystem manages all the hardware involved in controlling the flow of video audio timecode in and out of the system This includes video I O boards audio I O boards video compression boards and networking and storage The Real Time Subsystem is controlled by applications running on the Applications Subsystem using Inter Processor Messaging channels IPM It is responsible for the execution of events on the play timeline 34 Profile XP System Guide 13 May 2005 Board level block diagram Media Storage Subsystem Platform IMPORTANT If your Profile XP Media Platform is part of an Open SAN refer to the Open SAN Instruction Manual for information about media storage The Storage Subsystem is where the video audio timecode and other media related data is stored This storage system is made up of one or more external RAID level 3 storage chassis containing Fibre Channel disks The Profile XP Real Time Subsystem controls read write disk operations by sending SCSI protocol commands over one or mo
171. emote connections 0 PortServer must be left running on all remote systems as long as remote access is needed 13 May 2005 Profile XP System Guide 251 T Chapter 10 Controlling the Profile XP Remotely Setting up AMP remote control You can use Advanced Media Protocol AMP to control a Profile XP system channel This protocol is an extension of the Odetics protocol and is supported through the Profile XP AMP application External control devices can be connected via rear panel RS 422 serial connectors or an Ethernet network connection The AMP application acquires a single channel Play Record or Play Record at a time The AMP application interface runs in the following modes Local control mode The Profile XP channel can be controlled by either the local AMP application or by third party applications such as a hardware controller or a software application Status mode The Profile XP channel is controlled by a remote third party application and the local AMP application only monitors activities on the channel When you are using a remote third party application AMP protocol supports the use of a two head model in that two clips are loaded simultaneously as follows e Active clip The AMP preset id is considered the active clip that controls channel resources Preview clip The AMP preview preset id is considered the preview clip Generally the preview clip begins playing after the active cli
172. eneeeeneeeeeneeeeeee 150 Changing the system video Standard 0 ee ecceeeseeeseeeeeeeneeeeeeaeeeeseeeseaeeeeeeeesesaeeseneeeees 151 Configuring the video codec type oo eee eeeeeeeneeeeneeeeeneeeeteeeeteaeeeteaaeeesieeeeeenaeeeeaeeseneeeess 153 Selecting the video I Os used by a channel ec eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeneeeeeeaeeeeneeetneeeeeeea 155 Profile XP System Guide 13 May 2005 Chapter 6 Chapter 7 13 May 2005 Contents Selecting video quality for a channel eee aaa 156 Guidelines for selecting Video Quality Presets eeeee esse seneeeeeneeeeseeeeeeeeeeaes 156 Selecting video quality settings for a CNANNEL eee as 158 Selecting browse video quality settings for a channel eee as 160 Defining and selecting a custom video quality preset cc s 162 Recording VBI information uncompressed eeceeeeeeeeeneeeeeneeeeseeeeeseneeeeeneeeeseeeeeseeeees 163 Selecting the video still play mode o oo eee ae 167 Viewing video input Status 0 eee eeeee ee enee esere sea 168 Modifying video input settings 169 Setting up the VITC reader dddda aaraa 169 Erasing video input VBI information siidaaa ss 171 Selecting freeze or black upon video input loss a iii 173 Modifying video output settings iiaa esse Setting up the VITC generator sidasase ae Erasing video output VBI information Ancillary Data inserti0n ssion enia e eee iina iaia Selec
173. enses to enable features such as the Agile Output Chapter 10 Controlling the Profile XP Remotely Describes how to set up the Profile XP Media Platform for the control mode you want to use remote control protocol over RS 422 or remote applications over Ethernet Chapter 11 Setting up a Simple Network Describes how to set up a simple network of Profile XP systems Procedures are included for setting up the Windows NT network and both Profile XP video network options Chapter 12 Solving Common Setup Problems Provides help for solving common set up problems that occur when Profile XP features or signal requirements are not understood Appendix A Electrical and Environmental Specifications This appendix consists of electrical and environmental specifications Profile XP System Guide 11 T Preface Appendix B Connector Pin outs This appendix identifies connectors and the signals present on the pins of those connectors Appendix C Rack Mounting Information and Rear Panel Drawings This appendix provides rack mounting information for the Profile XP system and peripheral equipment Also provided are rear panel illustrations for the Profile XP and peripheral equipment Getting more information In addition to printed documents Profile XP product information is available in on line manuals and the Profile XP help system Use these as additional sources for information On line manuals Electronic versions of the followin
174. ep a through step d for all unbound disks on all remaining controllers displayed in the tree view NOTE PFR500 and PFR 600 controllers take less than a minute to bind a LUN but can bind only one LUN at a time You must wait until binding is completed before binding the next LUN PFC500 and PFCR700 controllers take more than an hour to bind a LUN but allow multiple binding processes at the same time 88 Profile XP System Guide 13 May 2005 Expanding storage Current Progress Busy Commands List f Upon 100 completion click Close in Progress Report window Do not proceed until all LUNs are finished binding g Restart the Windows operating system on the Profile XP Media Platform h Start Configuration Manager using the desktop shortcut or by selecting Start Programs Profile Applications Configuration Manager i In Configuration Manager click File System to start the GVG Disk Utility 5 In the GVG Disk Utility main menu click Tools Make File System The File System wizard appears 13 May 2005 Profile XP System Guide 89 Chapter 3 Working with RAID Storage Using GVG Disk Utility File System Wizard Page 1 of 2 x Enter a volume name for the file Volume Name system The volume name may have up to 7 characters and is not case sensitive A trailing colon will be added if one is not supplied Use only alphanumeric characters AZ dashes and underscores
175. es Corrective Action No file system found message displayed at first time power up ofthe Profile XP system No video file system If this is a first time start up for the system you must create a video file system Create a video file system on the storage disks Refer to Working with Profile XP storage systems in the Profile XP System Guide No file system found message after a video file system has been created in the past AIL RAID storage chassis are not powered on and initialized before the Profile XP system is powered on One or more of the RAID chassis or expansion chassis is not powered on and fully initialized Refer to the Profile XP Installation Guide for your system If this does not help you may have a hardware problem Refer to your RAID storage Instruction Manual Do not create a new file system until you have identified the problem Making a new file system destroys all existing media Cannot see the disk system in disk utility Interface problem Check all cabling and that all systems are fully initialized Refer to your RAID storage Instruction Manual Profile XP System Guide 13 May 2005 Problems using Configuration Manager Problems using Configuration Manager This troubleshooting aid provides corrective action for some common problems when using Configuration Manager or the remote version of Configuration Manager included in NetCentral XP Enterp
176. es and status indicators you can choose to disable the controller and replace it Disabling the controller and removing it in this way avoids interruptions in signal output that can occur if the module fails or if it is simply hot swapped while it is the active controller When the replacement RAID controller module is installed it is automatically enabled and becomes the backup controller NOTE Refer to the PFR700 Instruction Manual for procedures on removing and replacing the RAID controller module To disable a controller 1 Start the GVG Disk Utility 2 Expand the tree view to display the controllers 3 Right click a controller icon in the tree view then select Advanced Disable A Controller or Disable B Controller 114 Profile XP System Guide 13 May 2005 Performing PFR700 maintenance tasks E GYG Disk Utility iof x File View Tools Help PFR700 E mm Microcode Version P332 P332 Bind Luns Controller Settings Up to date with 1 0 Settings Serial Number 2000002046217390 Advanced Check Controller Settings eta m T TE Load Microcode pe Download Disk Firmware P332 P332 H LUNS Disable A Controller Up to date with 1 0 Settings UnBound Disable B Controller 2000002046217435 B upper 10 16 40 37 4 Click OK to continue The RAID controller is disabled You can check controller status in the Disk Utility You may need to refresh
177. es for two Profile XP systems Computer Name Profile1 Ethernet Address 192 168 99 1 FC Address 192 168 100 1 Computer Name Profile2 Ethernet Address 192 168 99 2 FC Address 192 168 100 2 You can use the these addresses if you want but if you are connecting the Ethernet interface to an existing network check with your system administrator for the correct names and IP addresses to use Use the table below to enter information you ll need when you configure your video network Machine Name Ethernet IP Address Fibre Channel IP Address Refer to the procedures in Setting up a simple video network Fibre Channel on page 268 when you to set up the Fibre Channel video network 260 Profile XP System Guide 13 May 2005 About the Ethernet video network option About the Ethernet video network option The video network option actually relies on two separate Ethernet networks the Windows NT Ethernet network interface which comes standard on all systems and the optional Ethernet video network interface Ethernet 10 100BaseT Ethernet 100BaseT Control amp clip database Video transfers Profile XP Profile XP 0624 29 The Windows NT network is used for control and transport of data associated with the discovery and identification of video clips on the network This network can be either 10BaseT or 100BaseT The Ethernet video network interface option is used to transfer
178. ew manufacturing of a laser product under U S regulations contained in 21CFR Chapter 1 subchapter J or CENELEC regulations in HD 482 S1 People performing such an act are required by law to recertify and reidentify this product in accordance with provisions of 21CFR subchapter J for distribution within the U S A and in accordance with CENELEC HD 482 S1 for distribution within countries using the IEC 825 standard Laser Safety Laser safety in the United States is regulated by the Center for Devices and Radiological Health CDRH The laser safety regulations are published in the Laser Product Performance Standard Code of Federal Regulation CFR Title 21 Subchapter J The International Electrotechnical Commission IEC Standard 825 Radiation of Laser Products Equipment Classification Requirements and User s Guide governs laser products outside the United States Europe and member nations of the European Free Trade Association fall under the jurisdiction of the Comit Europ en de Normalization Electrotechnique CENELEC FCC Emission This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules Operation is subject to Limits the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference and 2 this device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesirable operation Certification Category Standard Safety Designed tested for compliance with UL1950 Safety of
179. f a Digital Television Data Stream To record or play ancillary data you first use the Configuration Manager to assign an ancillary data track to the channel You must also select a video input and output for the track as appropriate for the channel configuration When recording all ancillary data included in the serial bit stream is recorded in its native format Only time code can be extracted and stored separately When the clip is played all its associated ancillary data is included in the serial bit stream if ancillary data is configured on the output The Profile XP system ability to capture ancillary data packets is dependent on your configuration Please contact your Grass Valley representative to discuss your specific requirements In all cases packet overhead is included in the capacity If more data is present on the input the later data is dropped and NetCentral is notified to alert you that this condition occurred 13 May 2005 Profile XP System Guide 231 T Chapter 8 Modifying a Channel Ancillary Data Adding an ancillary data track To add an ancillary data track to a channel 1 Choose Channel Configuration in the Configuration Manager window The Channel Configuration dialog box appears Channel Configuration P S3000 jr E ER Audio Q Track 1 amp 2 6 Click the tab for the channel you want to modify 2 Select the Data icon in the configuration tree and click the Add Track button
180. f rail mounting holes on the rack Notice that the hole spacing can vary with the rack type When mounting the slides in racks with EIA spacing make 332 sure that the slides are attached to the 0 5 inch spaced holes MIL STD 189 1 250 in J e aS 1 250in Vis C lt 0 625 in UNIVERSAL SPACING b rs Profile XP System Guide 13 May 2005 Mounting the Rack Slides Front and rear rack rail mounting hardware is provided with the rack mount kit Mount the rails using the enclosed hardware Make sure the stationary sections are horizontally aligned and are level as well as parallel to each other BAR NUT Use ifthe frontrail is nottapped FRONT RACK RAIL 2e e 2 882e REAR RACK RAIL 13 May 2005 Profile XP System Guide 333 T Chapter C Installing the Profile XP on the rack mount rails To install the Profile XP on the rack mount rails 1 Pull the slide out track section to the fully extended position A WARNING To prevent injury two people are required to lift the Profile XP It is too heavy for one person to install in the rack WARNING To prevent serious injury insure that the rack is anchored to the floor A so that it cannot tip over when the Profile XP is extended out of the rack 2 Insert the ends of the chassis sections into the slide out sections 3 Push the chassis toward the rack until the chass
181. fer to your Profile XP Software Release Notes for more information on installing Profile software on an Windows NT workstation Profile XP Ethernet Profile XP Windows NT Workstation running Configuration Manager Mm 0624 16 To configure remote Profile XP systems 1 Set up the Windows NT Ethernet network using the procedures in Chapter 11 Setting up a Simple Network then return to this procedure Install Profile system software on the Windows NT workstation you want to use to monitor and configure remote Profile XP systems Start Port Server on all Profile XP systems by double clicking the Port Server shortcut on the desktop or choose Start Programs Profile Applications Port Server Profile XP System Guide 13 May 2005 Remote configuration 4 Start Configuration Manager on the local system then in Configuration Manager choose File Remote Connection The Remote Connection dialog box appears Configuration Manager Remote Connection Remote Host List PROFILE2 PROFILES PROFILE4 PROFILES PROFILE6 P Remote Host Name PROFILE Cancel 5 Select a Profile XP system in the Remote Host List then click Connect The Configuration Manager reappears Note that the remote host now appears in the Configuration Manager title bar 4 Profile1 i File System af Network 2 Video Timing Fai Ka Video Input Name PA Video Output lt Video Codec T Video Moni
182. ffset controls then click Finish 148 Profile XP System Guide 13 May 2005 Adjusting system reference timing to offset all playout timing Video Timing Page 4 of 5 Adjusting the System Reference Timing Offset affects the timing of all Delay video outputs The reference timing tita only be changed if the lownstream timing requirements cannot be met by adjusting the video Advance output timing Video Timing Page 4 of 5 Adjusting the System Reference Timing Offset affects the timing of all Dela video outputs The reference timing y should only be changed if the downstream timing requirements cannot be met by adjusting the video Advance output timing 13 May 2005 Profile XP System Guide 149 a T Chapter 5 Modifying a Channel Video Settings Recording synchronous and asynchronous feeds The Profile XP Media Platform is a synchronous device All the outputs are locked to the house reference and all the inputs must be genlocked to that reference and at zero time The Profile XP Media Platform inputs can handle the anomalous asynchronous case without interruption video and audio are resampled to the house clock and maintain phase within a window of one video frame This resampling is not intended to take the place of a frame synchronizer It provides some protection if an untimed signal is routed to an input although loss of sync events may result in lip sync errors NOTE If you are using the Prof
183. firmware version the repeat for all disk drives Profile XP System Guide 101 GE T Chapter 3 Working with RAID Storage Using GVG Disk Utility b Ifthe firmware version is correct for all disks proceed to step 4 to restore disk settings otherwise continue with step 3 NOTE In some systems disk status is reported as failed until disk settings are restored using step 4 which follows For now you can safely disregard the failed status 3 Download firmware to individual disk drives as follows a In Disk Utility right click a disk icon then select Advanced Download Firmware in the context menu b In the Open dialog box locate the c profile microcode directory then select the lod file for your disk drive type For example use Use Ciprico_Seagate73LP_ lt version gt lod for 73GB Seagate drives Use Ciprico_Seagate 18 1HH_ lt version gt lod for 180G Seagate drives Where lt version gt specifies the firmware version number Seagate uses hexadecimal to specify disk firmware versions c Click Open The Progress Report window appears showing the disk firmware upgrade task and the percentage completion Disk access LED behavior flashing green during download off during disk reboot flashing green during disk initialization NOTE If a disk fails to download try waiting 3 minutes then try again d Repeat step a through step c for remaining disks that failed download 4 After successfully downloa
184. fore disconnecting them from the original RAID Controller chassis Refer to Unbinding LUNs for reconfiguration on page 91 File system volume name The video file system volume name is the logical name used when accessing the storage system All local and remote Profile XP applications use the volume name when referencing the video file system You can change the video file system volume name at any time without affecting the media files stored on the system Changing the volume name may be required with some third party Profile XP control software which requires a specific volume name Using Hot Spare drives You can bind disks as hot spare drives Hot spare drives are on standby and are used in the event of a drive failure in a data LUN If a drive fails the RAID Controller automatically selects a hot spare drive to use in place of the failed drive This prevents the system from operating in a degraded state ensuring there are always 5 disks in the RAID 3 LUN keeping the data LUN in a protected mode See Configuring hot spare drives on page 83 The following table describes how your RAID system will respond when the failed drive is replaced RAID Storage Models How this system handles the replacement drive PFC500 The replacement disk drive module is rebuilt and the hot spare drive reverts to hot spare status PFR 500 The replacement drive becomes a hot spare drive The original hot spare drive remains
185. fore your changes will take effect Refer to the User Manual for the Profile application you are using 162 Profile XP System Guide 13 May 2005 Recording VBI information uncompressed Recording VBI information uncompressed 13 May 2005 NOTE VBI information is not present in HD video Instead this information is carried in the video stream as ancillary data For DVCPRO 25 Closed Captioning and V chip data is extracted and stored on input inserted on output For DVCPRO 50 Closed Captioning and V chip data is compressed The Profile XP Media Platform provides the ability to store up to 6 lines of uncompressed Vertical Blanking Interval VBI information along with your MPEG clips This feature is desirable for uses such as closed captioning which might be seriously degraded by losses incurred at lower video compression data rates However storing VBI information in uncompressed form can add up to 3Mb s to your storage requirements Specifying lines of VBI information to store uncompressed involves using the Channel Configuration dialog box to select which lines the channel will treat as uncompressed data To select which VBI lines to record as uncompressed data 1 Choose Channel Configuration in the Configuration Manager dialog box The Channel Configuration dialog box appears 2 Click the tab for the channel you want to modify then the Video Track icon in the configuration tree F Profile XP System Guide 163
186. format on page 202 Profile XP System Guide 291 Chapter 12 Solving Common Setup Problems Problems with timecode This troubleshooting aid provides corrective action for some common timecode problems Search the table for the problem you are experiencing then try the corrective action Some problems have more than one corrective action VITC Record Problem Possible Cause s Corrective Action VITC Incorrect recorded timecode VITC reader is set to automatic and there are two sets of VITC in the VBI Use manual VITC detection and specify lines where VITC should be read Refer to Recording VITC on page 217 VITC Incorrect or no recorded timecode The VITC reader is set to manual and there are two sets of VITC in the VBI and the wrong VITC lines may be specified Verify location of VITC signals and set up manual VITC detection accordingly Refer to Recording VITC on page 217 VITC Can t read or record VITC VITC detection is set to manual and the wrong VITC lines are specified Set VITC detect to Automatic or verify location of VITC signals and set up manual VITC detection accordingly Refer to Recording VITC on page 217 VITC The VITC output I want to use is not listed in the Timecode Output list You have not assigned the corresponding video output to the channel Assign the video output you want to use to the channel Refer to Selecting t
187. formation about Profile XP system storage capacities for different video data rates is located in Working with RAID Storage Using GVG Disk Utility on page 65 e Chrominance Sampling Method Options include 4 2 2 and 4 2 0 Consider the following guidelines Select 4 2 2 encoding whenever storage capacity allows it especially when you know the video is being used in a production environment where it will experience multiple generations You must use 4 2 0 sampling for standard definition video that will be up converted using the Definition Independent HD decoder 4 2 0 sampling can also be used for slightly better picture quality below 10 Mb s since the reduction in chrominance information allows more detail in the luminance information However reducing chrominance information by half does impact picture quality in a video sequence with large chrominance variance GoP Length Determines the number and structure of I P and B frames Since B frames contain 25 of the information of an I frame and a P frame contains about 50 significant storage efficiencies can be realized with long GoP structures In general then lengthening the GoP structure allows operation at lower data rates for equivalent picture quality Consider the following guidelines Choose the longest GoP structure possible as the storage benefits outweigh the picture quality improvements Use I frame only and short GoP structures for editing applications wh
188. from the factory The factory sets the last user to profile prior to shipment Logging on as Administrator When the Profile XP system is powered On you may interrupt automatic logon and logon as Administrator It is not necessary to logon as administrator to configure Profile System software However you must logon as Administrator for Windows NT administration and to Configure Ethernet network settings see Chapter 11 Setting up a Simple Network Install new software applications or upgrades see Profile XP Release Notes To log on as Administrator at Power Up To logon as Administrator at power up 1 Power on the Profile XP system then hold the Shift key down during start up to prevent auto logon as profile Be sure to continue holding the shift key until the logon dialog box appears 2 Logon as administrator The default administrator password on a Profile system is triton The next time the Profile XP system is restarted Windows NT will display a logon error message When this occurs use the logon dialog box to logon manually as administrator or as profile see the following procedure 44 Profile XP System Guide 13 May 2005 Logging on as Profile Logging on as Administrator from Profile account To logon as Administrator from Profile account 1 Log on as Administrator using the following steps a Press the Control Alt Del key sequence The Windows NT Security dialog box appears b Click Log off The L
189. g manuals are located on the system drive of your Profile XP Media Platform and on the Profile XP software CD ROM Installation Guide for your model Profile XP System Guide Profile XP User Manual Profile XP Release Notes Profile XP Service Manual e NetCentral User Guide e PFC 500 Instruction Manual PFR 500 Instruction Manual e PFR 600 Instruction Manual PFR 700 Instruction Manual You can view these manuals using Adobe Acrobat Reader which is also pre installed on your Profile XP system On line Help Contains all the information in the Profile XP System Guide optimized for use on line You can access on line help by choosing the Help menu or by clicking the Help button in a dialog box 12 Profile XP System Guide 13 May 2005 Grass Valley Product Support Grass Valley Product Support To get technical assistance check on the status of problems or report new problems contact Grass Valley Product Support via e mail the Web or by phone or fax Web Technical Support To access support information on the Web visit the product support Web page on the Grass Valley Web site You can download software or find solutions to problems by searching our Frequently Asked Questions FAQ database World Wide Web http www thomsongrassvalley com support Technical Support E mail Address gvgtechsupportWthomson net Phone Support Use the following information to contact product support by phone during busines
190. ger Set up the Windows NT Ethernet network When installing the Ethernet video network option you must first set up the Windows NT Ethernet network Use the procedure found on page 264 Setting up a simple Windows NT network then return to this page and continue with Configure the video network on each Profile XP Ethernet Configure the video network on each Profile XP Ethernet 13 May 2005 After setting up the Windows NT network interface you must configure the IP address and subnet mask for the video network Ethernet interface and choose the network options you want to use To configure the video network Ethernet settings 1 Open Configuration Manager using the desktop shortcut or by choosing Start Programs Profile Applications Configuration Manager 2 Choose Network in the Configuration Manager window The Network Profile XP System Guide 277 T Chapter 11 Setting up a Simple Network 278 Network Page 1 of 1 x Video Network Setup Ethernet Network Ask your network administrator to assign an IP address for your Fibre Channel Interface and enter it below This Fibre Chanel IP address should be different from any other Ethernet IP address assigned to this machine IP Address 192 168 10 1 Subnet mask 255 255 25 System Gateway o o da0 0 What kind of extra error detection should be used None transmit as fast as possible default Use checksums and re transmit on err
191. h E to E timing I Video Timing Page 3 of 5 SDl ut J5 SDI OutBJ5 SDI OutAJ HD SDI OutaJ9 HD SDI Out4J11 c Select a video output from the Video Output Timing list or click Select All to adjust all outputs at the same time d Use the Output Timing Offset controls to adjust playout timing to meet your timing requirements e Repeat step c and step d for the remaining video outputs if required then select Finish 13 May 2005 Profile XP System Guide 147 a T Chapter 5 Modifying a Channel Video Settings Adjusting system reference timing to offset all playout timing Adjusting system reference timing offsets all playout timing relative to the reference The reference timing should only be changed if the downstream timing requirements cannot be met by adjusting the video output timing To adjust system timing relative to system reference 1 Choose Video Timing in the Configuration Manager window The Video Timing dialog box appears 2 Click Next to navigate to Video Timing page 4 of 5 Reference Timing Offset The controls that appear on this page and their labeling depend on the video standard and timing reference you ve chosen Notice that the progressive HD video standard 720p does not have a field adjustment just line and pixel offsets while the interlaced video standards standard definition and 10801 do have a field adjustment 3 Adjust system timing using the System Reference Timing O
192. he Profile XP Service Manual for further corrective action No Profile XP systems are listed in the network neighborhood Not even the local Profile XP system Some component of Windows NT Networking improperly installed Refer to the Profile XP Service Manual for help in solving the problem Profile XP systems do not immediately appear in Network Neighborhood but are eventually displayed This is the normal operation of Network Neighborhood The same applies when systems are switched off It may be several minutes before refreshing the display removes the system from the list NA Profile XP System Guide 297 a T Chapter 12 Solving Common Setup Problems 298 Common Fibre Channel video network problems This troubleshooting aid provides corrective action for some common Fibre Channel video network problems Search the table for the problem you are experiencing then try the corrective action Some problems have more than one corrective action Problem Possible Cause s Corrective Action Can t transfer files in Media Manager There may be an incorrect Fibre Channel name entry in the HOSTS file on the Profile XP system Verify all Ethernet and Fibre Channel entries in the HOSTS all systems Make sure Fibre Channel names use _fc0 that is zero and not the letter O Refer to Manually Edit the hosts file on each Profile XP on page 270 Can t transfer files in Med
193. he drive properties reported in the right hand pane Use the following procedure if you need to download disk drive firmware NOTE The disk drives on each controller are upgraded one at a time which can take as long as 2 minutes per drive Also the Disk Utility allows selecting multiple controllers for disk firmware upgrades however upgrades are handled one controller at a time Take this into consideration when scheduling the upgrade To download disk drive firmware 1 In the GVG Disk Utility right click a controller in the tree view then select Advanced Download Firmware in the context menu NOTE You can download firmware to a single disk by right clicking a disk icon in the tree view 2 In the Open dialog box locate the c profilelmicrocode directory then select the latest file for your disk drive type To determine drive type and current firmware version select a drive in the tree view then note the drive properties reported in the right hand pane 13 May 2005 Profile XP System Guide 113 a T Chapter 3 Working with RAID Storage Using GVG Disk Utility 3 Click Open The Progress Report window appears showing the disk firmware download task and the percentage completion 4 Perform step 1 through step 3 to upgrade disk drives for the remaining controllers 5 When finished reboot the RAID storage and the Profile XP Media Platform Refer to System reboot procedure on page 94 NOTE If your PFR 700 is
194. he video I Os used by a channel on page 155 VITC Incorrect VITC timecode on the video output There may be two sets of VITC on the video output and the external reader is reading the wrong timecode signal Two VITC signals can occur when there is VITC on the video input or playback signal and at the same time the video output is generating VITC Erase the VITC signal on the video output refer to Erasing video input VBI information on page 171 or turn off the VITC generator on the output refer to Setting up the VITC generator on a video output on page 225 and choose Do not generate VITC VITC Two sets of VITC signals are present on the output There may be two sets of VITC because there is VITC on the video input or playback signal and also the video output is generating VITC Erase the VITC signal on the video output refer to Deleting unwanted VITC and other VBI signals on page 226 or turn off the VITC generator on the output refer to Setting up the VITC generator on a video output on page 225 and choose Do not generate VITC Recorded timecode reads XX XX XX XX No timecode source for the channel Select a timecode source Refer to Selecting timecode I O for each timecode track on page 140 This is normal in Profile Applications when there is no clip cued Profile XP System Guide 13 May 2005 13 May 2005 VITC Record P
195. ia Manager No Fibre Channel connectivity Refer to Testing the Fibre Channel Video network on page 299 In Media Manager files transfer only one direction There may be an incorrect entry in the HOSTS file on the Profile XP systems Verify all Ethernet and Fibre Channel entries in the HOSTS file on both systems refer to Manually Edit the hosts file on each Profile XP on page 270 Media Manager can t find a Profile XP when you try to add it to the network hosts list PortServer is not running on the remote Profile XP system Start PortServer on the remote system refer to Running PortServer to enable remote operation on page 251 Media Manager can t find the Profile XP when you try to add it to the network hosts list Unable to resolve Ethernet name There may be an incorrect Ethernet name entry in the HOSTS file Verify all Ethernet and Fibre Channel entries in the HOSTS file on both systems refer to Manually Edit the hosts file on each Profile XP on page 270 Media Manager can t find a Profile XP when you try to add it to the network hosts list No Ethernet connectivity Refer to Testing the Fibre Channel Video network on page 299 Profile XP System Guide 13 May 2005 Testing the Fibre Channel Video network Testing the Fibre Channel Video network Use this procedure to test your video network setup Tests are included for the Ethe
196. iaa eee 288 Problems With VId 0 ssssses sus set estr senems sferaat tas c la dara dekas ea sada se 289 Problems With aUdi Onirin eiieeii did sens cdcadaiceexseiedsaseceiraganrsiacacascegeteaaieess 290 Problems with tim 6cOd i ssvas seria tesasiusasta setvitetuc esere ainsi i rasa set 292 MITC Recorde stas a as s s a driz asia aeaa eaaa aAa sms p s eee as Ls cita asari 292 Storage ystem probl ms iiras aaoi sia ata ies das tern eA 294 Problems using Configuration Manager iiaia aa 295 Channel control problems ais s cis ira isee ss s mes es sesisk sa t ss 296 Common Ethernet network problems iidai aa 297 Common Fibre Channel video network problems ida a 298 Testing the Fibre Channel Video network iiiiaa ar 299 Common Ethernet video network problems ecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeteeaeeeenaeeeseneeeeteeeees 303 Testing the Ethernet Video network eeeeneeeeneeeeneeeeeeneeeteneeeseneeeseaeeeteeeeeneaeeeee 304 Appendix A Electrical and Environmental Specifications General Inforrmation c cecccsecceesesceeeseeeeeseneeneeneeeseenemseeeensueeerseoeeenaneceseeesesoeseseenenseees 309 Test EQUIPMENT iconen a a aa e a aE 309 Electrical SpecificatonS sssri Ei a ede eee 310 Profile XP System Power Specifications 315 PAC 216 Power Reguirements idaaaa eee 315 Environmental Citeam aara ra Oia g rasta E 316 AppendixB Connector Pin outs SVGA CONN
197. ibre Channel ID dialog box enter IDs as shown then click OK c Click OK in the Operation Successful dialog box d Reboot the PFR 500 or PFR 600 RAID storage system and the Profile XP media platform using the System reboot procedure on page 94 then proceed to step e 78 Profile XP System Guide 13 May 2005 Binding disks and creating a video file system e On the Profile XP media platform start Configuration Manager using the desktop shortcut or by selecting Start Programs Profile Applications Configuration Manager f In Configuration Manager click File System to start the GVG Disk Utility 4 Expand the tree view and identify bound LUNs and unbound disks by their placement in the hierarchy of the tree view 5 If there are unbound disks displayed in the tree view you must perform the following steps otherwise proceed to step 6 a To bind unbound disks right click the Unbound node for a controller then select Bind LUNs in the context menu Peer controllers that share the same set of disks are automatically selected as a pair The Binding LUN dialog box opens showing all unbound disks for the controller listed in the Available Disk list Binding LUN on ControllerO x LUN TYPE RAID 3 hd Available Disks r Selected Disks Flashes the drive lights Identify Disks Cancel OK b Select RAID 3 using the LUN TYPE drop down box c Select five contiguous disks then click th
198. ic needs of our system This manual assumes you have already installed your Profile XP system using the Installation Guide shipped with your unit Using the Profile XP Documentation Set This manual is part of a full set of support documentation for the Profile XP Media Platform The following illustrates how to use the Profile XP documentation depending on the task you are performing Path for the Installer Release Notes Installation Guide System Guide Contains the latest Contains essential steps for Contains the product description information about Profile XP installing your Profile XP and step by step instructions for Other Manuals hardware and software system with local storage modifying system settings These manuals include shipped with your system using factory default settings PFC500 Instruction Manual PFR500 Instruction Manual 4 A PFR600 Instruction Manual Use alternate procedures PFR700 Instruction Manual for shared storage option Profile XP Service Manual Open SAN Instruction Manual and Release Notes Contains instructions for installing storage that is shared by multiple Profile XP systems Installers consult the User Manuals Path for the Operator as needed Release Notes User Manuals Contains the latest Contains complete instructions for using information about Profile XP Profile applications These manuals include hardware and software Profile XP User Manual shipped with your system
199. ich need flexibility in performing insert edits Use I frame only for off speed play 13 May 2005 Profile XP System Guide 157 T Chapter 5 Modifying a Channel Video Settings Selecting video quality settings for a channel To select channel video quality 1 Choose Channel Configuration in the Configuration Manual window The Channel Configuration dialog box appears Channel Configuration Profile1 x g vii Vtr2 33 VideoOr AudioOnly Name Type Add Channel in MPEG Player Recorder 7 Remove Channel aA vti B Video H Track1 Add Track Audio ly Timecode Delete Track Summary Configuration for Video Track 1 Encoder Decoder Video Quality i feNone gt MPEG Play 1 Medium 15 Mb s zj R Browse video High 24 Mb s Video Input Medium 15 Mb s Black Browse Video VBI Encoding Advanced Crosspoints 2 Select the tab for the channel you want to modify then use the Video Quality drop down list to select the video quality preset you want to use 3 To view the properties for the video quality preset you select click the Video Quality settings button Fj next to the Video Quality drop down list 158 Profile XP System Guide 13 May 2005 Selecting video quality settings for a channel MPEG SD Video Quality Settings 4 If you are configuring an MPEG D10 Recorder or Player Recorder channel you should select the desired D10 bitrate 30
200. ick the Audio icon to expand the configuration tree 2 Select the audio Track icon in the configuration tree Channel Configuration Profile1 MPEG Recorde e a B Audio Ch 15 amp 16 3 For each pair of audio tracks select an audio channel pair by placing a check in the appropriate check box You can change the audio format for the audio channels using Configuration Manager refer to Changing the audio I O format on page 197 13 May 2005 Profile XP System Guide 139 T Chapter 4 Adding or Removing Channels Selecting timecode I O for each timecode track To select timecode inputs and outputs for each timecode track 1 Double click the Timecode icon to expand the configuration tree 2 Click the Crosspoints button and then select a timecode input from the Timecode Input list If you choose TC Generator refer to Using the internal timecode generators on page 212 for instructions on setting up the timecode generator Channel Configuration P S 3000 x By vet S ve y vs By ves Name Type Add Channel ia HD SD MPEG Player 7 Remove Channel Virl H Video H Track 1 Add Track H A Audio Q Track 1 amp 2 Delete Track E ly Timecode um ey Data Summary Configuration for Timecode Track 1 Timecode Input Timecode Outputs lt None gt TC Generator Any Refln VITC 1n4J3 SDI VITC IndJ5 SDI VITC nBJ5 HD ANC VITC In4J7 RJ SDI V
201. ifying a Channel Video Settings Using multiple video tracks for one channel You can assign multiple video tracks of the same compression type to a single channel You can use this feature when working with key and fill To play out all tracks simultaneously you must be sure to play the clip on a play channel configured for at least the same number of video tracks To add a video track to a channel 1 Select Channel Configuration in the Configuration Manager window The Channel Configuration dialog box appears 2 Click the tab for the channel you want to modify then click Add Track The Add Track dialog box appears Add Track Ea Ter Add track of type Video C Audio C Timecode C Data E Cancel 3 Select Video then Add The new video track icon configuration tree will appear in the 188 Profile XP System Guide 13 May 2005 Using multiple video tracks for one channel Channel Configuration Profile1 x a v 8 vez Name Type Add Channel in MPEG Player Recorder 7 Remove Channel Video H Track 1 mE Track 2 Audio Q Track 1 amp 2 Add Track i Track 34 Delete Track 13 Timecode BO Track 1 v Summary Configuration for Video Track 2 Encoder Decoder Video Quality Any Any High 24 Mb s 5 Video Input Video Output s EX lt None gt SDI OutaJ7 SDI DutB J7 O SDI OutaJ9 O SDI OutB J9 VBI Encoding Advanc
202. ight hand pane The tree view displays the hardware that make up the storage system connected The context menus in the tree view are used to configure storage The right hand status pane displays information about the item selected in the tree view The tree view hierarchy is as follows RAID Controller Model Provides a logical grouping of RAID chassis models i e all PFR 500 RAID Controller Chassis connected are listed under the PFR500 icon Controller Represents the RAID Controllers found These are numbered in the order discovered The controller icon represents both RAID Controller A and if installed RAID Controller B To determine if an optional RAID Controller B is installed select the Controller icon in the tree view then examine the status pane for peer status Bound LUNs Expanding the Bound node displays all bound LUNs LUN Represents a bound LUN Expanding the LUN node displays the disk modules that make up the LUN UnBound disks Expanding the UnBound node displays all unbound disk modules Disks Represents the disk modules A GYG Disk Utility iof x File View Tools Help Controllers getras Miespcode Verdon B ns D Peer ID Controller O Correct 7 86 56 1 Controller0 a Bound 3 8 LUNO RAID Controller Model Controller Node s ene Both A and B if installed eae Disk3 6 Disk4 Bound LUNs UnBound 8 Disk5 LUN 8 Disk 8 Disk
203. iguration Profile1 Pr MPEG Payer Recor Track 1 amp 2 Q Track 3 amp 4 Timecode fH Track 1 b For channel types that include a Player select video outputs from the Video Output s check boxes 6 Click Finish to save your changes and close the Channel Configuration dialog box 190 Profile XP System Guide 13 May 2005 Chapter 6 Modifying a Channel Audio Settings You can customize audio settings for record or play channels For example you can change the number of audio tracks per channel or change the input or output audio format for a channel This chapter describes how to modify your audio settings About Profile XP Audio The Profile XP Media Platform supports from 16 to 32 channels of audio I O and the following audio formats Embedded audio up to 8 channels per video I O e AES EBU interface chassis required e Analog interface chassis required Determining the number of audio channels available The Profile XP Media Platform audio system is built around the Audio board A Profile XP audio board provides 16 channels of audio I O A Profile XP may have up to 2 audio boards 13 May 2005 Profile XP System Guide 191 a T Chapter 6 Modifying a Channel Audio Settings 192 Determining the audio formats available The Profile XP system can be configured to operate with analog AES EBU digital and digital embedded SMPTE 272M Level A audio An interface chassis is requi
204. iguration Manager Window The Video Input dialog box appears 2 Click Next to navigate to Video Input page 2 of 3 Video Input Page 2 of 3 x VITC Setup What lines should be used to read VITC timecode Look for timecode between lines ae fio fa 10 21 and Which lines should be erased in the vertical blanking interval VBI after timecode is read Erase lines between and r rein ma i 3 Select a video input from the list or click Select All to configure all the video inputs at the same time 4 Perform one of the following If you do not want to erase any lines clear the Erase lines between check box Ifyou want to erase lines in the vertical interval select the Erase lines between check box then select the starting and ending lines numbers using the sliders 13 May 2005 Profile XP System Guide 171 T Chapter 5 Modifying a Channel Video Settings 5 Click Finish to saving your settings 172 Profile XP System Guide 13 May 2005 Selecting freeze or black upon video input loss Selecting freeze or black upon video input loss 13 May 2005 You can select whether you want the Profile XP system to output black or freeze on the last frame of video when the video input signal is lost To configure setting for loss of video input 1 Choose Video Input in the Configuration Manager window The Video Input dialog box appears 2 Click Next to navigate
205. iguration dialog box Profile XP System Guide 343 T Index 344 in use resources shown 122 dimmed text 122 red text 122 channels about channels 119 adding 126 adding removing ancillary data 232 audio channel pairs selecting 139 audio tracks adding or removing 193 default settings 26 default settings for channels you add 121 description text box 126 importing and exporting settings 59 maximum number of 70 121 multiple video tracks adding 188 removing 141 renaming 126 restoring channel settings 57 58 saving channel settings 57 selecting video I Os 155 summary dialog box 125 timecode I O internal generators selecting 212 LTC selecting 228 VITC input selecting 217 VITC output selecting 223 type selecting 128 video quality selecting 130 136 VITC generator setup 225 VITC input selecting 217 working with 121 channels settings saving and restoring 57 chassis dimensions peripheral equipment 330 Profile XP 330 chrominance sampling method 156 chrominance sampling method guidelines for selecting 157 clip editing In Out points 255 clipping audio 205 common setup problems audio 290 channel control problems 296 Profile XP System Guide Ethernet video network 303 Fibre Channel network 298 playing recording 288 timecode 292 using Configuration Manager 295 video 289 Windows NT network 297 Configuration Manager common setup problems 295 remote configuration 62 tour of 48 configuring storage see Fibre Chan
206. igurations the Fibre Channel RAID storage system is connected directly to the Fibre Channel Disk board In centralized storage configurations this board is connected to a Fibre Channel switch fabric to provide access to a centralized pool of Fibre Channel RAID storage systems When the RAID storage systems are configured with an optional second controller board Port B of the Fibre Channel Disk board can be connected to provide a redundant path to the disks Both ports use hot swappable copper or optical Small Form Factor Pluggable interfaces SFPs to connect to Fibre Channel cables Copper connections allow transfers at up to 1Gb s while optical cables and SFPs support up to 2Gb s rates Fibre Channel RAID Chassis The high performance RAID storage system provides the Profile XP a low profile compact storage system with either 36 73 or 146 GB Fibre Channel drives The Fibre Channel RAID Chassis is a Fibre Channel disk array with RAID drives hot spares dual power supplies optional redundant controllers optional and spare fans The Fibre Channel RAID Chassis comes with either 36 73 or 146 GB drives You can expand the RAID storage system with the Expansion chassis which houses 5 10 or 15 drives but does not need a RAID controller The Fibre Channel RAID Chassis offers optional redundant RAID controllers If one fails the system will automatically switch over to the second controller within a few seconds 42 Profile XP System G
207. ile XP Media Platform to switch between video inputs and decoder outputs playback you must set the output timing mode to E to E Timed Outputs For more information see Adjusting video output timing on page 143 150 Profile XP System Guide 13 May 2005 Changing the system video standard Changing the system video standard Changing the system video standard resets the Profile XP system hardware for operation with one of the following line standards e 525 60 Standard definition NTSC e 625 50 Standard definition PAL e 10801 High definition interlaced e 720p High definition progressive To change the system video standard 1 Choose Video Timing in the Configuration Manager window Page 1 of the Video Timing dialog box System Reference appears Video Timing Page 1 of 5 x System Reference Warming What type of signal is providing the system reference source Genlock input If you change the system reference applications that are currently using the system must be restarted Reference Black 25 frames sec lt Back Finish Cancel i 2 Select the reference signal that will be used with your system on the Genlock input and click Next to go to the next page 13 May 2005 Profile XP System Guide 151 T Chapter 5 Modifying a Channel Video Settings 3 Select the video standard that you wish to use for your HD channels If you have installed an Agile Output license this is the format
208. io Routing gra l License Configuration A Channel Configuration This chapter gives a brief tour of Configuration Manager Also included are instructions for remote configuration and saving restoring configuration settings Sections in this chapter include Tour of Configuration Manager Viewing board location information Saving and restoring your system settings Importing system settings Remote configuration Profile XP System Guide 47 T Chapter 2 Working with Configuration Manager Tour of Configuration Manager Configuration Manager provides a central graphical user interface for all system configuration tasks Configuration Manager includes the following selection items File System used to configure the media storage system Network used to set up the video network option Video setup items used to configure video input and output settings and on the models that have them video codecs Audio setup items used to configure audio input and output settings Channel Configuration used to add and modify channels File System Choosing File System in Configuration Manager opens the Disk Utility dialog box Use the pages in the Disk Utility to configure local storage connected directly to the Profile XP system IMPORTANT If your Profile XP Media Platform is part of an Open SAN follow the instructions in the Open SAN Instruction Manual for configuring storage For more information on co
209. ions in the Open SAN Instruction Manual for powering off and powering on the Open SAN 106 Profile XP System Guide 13 May 2005 Performing PF R600 maintenance tasks Performing PFR600 maintenance tasks PFR600 maintenance tasks include e Downloading PFR 600 disk drive firmware on page 107 e Replacing a failed disk module on page 108 e Starting disk rebuild manually on page 108 e Starting and Stopping disk initialization on page 109 e Checking and restoring default PFR600 RAID Controller settings on page 109 e Disabling a PFR600 RAID controller for removal on page 110 e Enabling a PFR600 RAID controller on page 111 e Disabling a PFR600 disk module for removal on page 112 Downloading PFR600 disk drive firmware 13 May 2005 When upgrading your Profile XP System Software you may be instructed in the software release notes to upgrade the PFR600 disk drive firmware This allows you to take advantage of the disk drive enhancements and benefit from improved performance and reliability To determine your disk drive type and current firmware version select a disk drive icon in the GVG Disk Utility tree view then note the drive properties reported in the right hand pane Use the following procedure if you need to download disk drive firmware NOTE The disk drives on each controller are upgraded one at a time which can take as long as 2 minutes per drive Also the Disk Utility allows sele
210. is sections lock into the intermediate sections 4 Press the stop latches in the intermediate sections and push the chassis toward the rack until the latches snap into their holes Stop Latch 5 Again press the stop latches and push the cabinet fully into the rack 6 Insert and tighten the front panel retaining screws Making Rack Slide Adjustments After installation binding may occur if the slide tracks are not properly adjusted To adjust the tracks 1 Slide the chassis out approximately 10 inches 2 Slightly loosen the mounting screws holding the tracks to the front of the rails and allow the tracks to seek an unbound position 3 Tighten the mounting screws and check the tracks for smooth operation by sliding the chassis in and out of the rack several times 4 Tighten the front panel retaining screws once the cabinet is in place within the rack to complete the installation 334 Profile XP System Guide 13 May 2005 Mounting Panels and Audio Chassis Mounting Panels and Audio Chassis 13 May 2005 Refer to the information that follows when mounting panels and the Profile XP audio chassis The I O Panel is 1 RU high with the mounting holes spaced 1 250 inches 3 175 cm apart The XLR216 is 2 RUs high with holes spaced 3 000 inches 7 62 cm apart The BNC216 is 1 RU high with the mounting holes spaced 1 250 inches 3 175 cm apart The PAC216 audio chassis is 2 RU high with holes spaced 3 00 inches
211. ks Still Play Mode Line Double C Interlaced Video Setup Cancel Help 4 Select the still play mode you want to use 5 Choose Finish to save your change and to close the Channel Configuration dialog box NOTE If the channel is currently in use by an application it must be reacquired within the application before your changes will take effect Refer to the User Manual for the Profile application you are using Profile XP System Guide 167 T Chapter 5 Modifying a Channel Video Settings Viewing video input status You can use Configuration Manager to check the status of the video input signal To check video input status 1 Choose Video Input in the Configuration Manager window The Video Input dialog box appears Video Input Page 1 of 3 x Input Attributes Video Input Name SDI InB J5 HD SDI In J7 SDI In J5 HD SDI In J9 Physical Location Slot 5 BNC 1 top G Video signal is present VITC timecode is present Ancillary data is present VITE is present in ancillary data G LTC is present in ancillary data Embedded audio groups Oa ac ac ac ren ma 2 Select a video input from the Video Input list The following table gives a description of the video input status indicators Status Indicators Description Embedded Audio Status Indicates which embedded audio groups are present on the video input Video input status Indicates the status of
212. l message click OK 13 May 2005 Profile XP System Guide 117 T Chapter 3 Working with RAID Storage Using GVG Disk Utility 118 Profile XP System Guide 13 May 2005 Chapter 4 Adding or Removing Channels Profile applications use channels to control disk recording and playback A channel defines a logical collection of Profile video audio and timecode resources and is identified by a unique name This chapter describes how you can remove channels you no longer use and how to add and configure new channels for your specific needs Once you add and configure a new channel it becomes available for use by Profile applications Using the Channel Configuration dialog box You use the Channel Configuration dialog box in Configuration Manager to remove add and configure channels The Channel Configuration dialog box allows you to define channel properties including e Channel name e Channel type DVCAM Player Recorder DVCPRO 25 Player Recorder DVCPRO 50 Player Recorder MPEG D10 Player Recorder MPEG Player MPEG Recorder MPEG Player Recorder MPEG Player Recorder Dec Enc HD SD MPEG Player HD MPEG Player HD MPEG Recorder HD MPEG Player Recorder Video inputs and outputs e Aspect ratio conversion for up and down conversion e Audio inputs and outputs Timecode sources inputs and outputs The Channel Configuration dialog box also allows you to enable Browse Video for a video track Browse video i
213. layer Recorder Channel HD MPEG Player HD Decoder only Can only play clips HD MPEG HD Decoder and HD Can record and play clips but not at the same Player Recorder Encoder time The channel types that appear in the drop down list depend on the hardware capabilities of the media platform DVCAM DVCPRO 25 and 50 channels only appear when Video Processor boards are present HD SD and HD MPEG channel types appear only when high definition encoders decoders and I O boards are present The channel types you choose will affect how many channels you can operate at the same time On Profile XP systems with separate MPEG encoders and decoders an MPEG Player Recorder channel consumes both an encoder and decoder but uses only one at a time Defining channels that can only play or only record uses resources more 128 Profile XP System Guide 13 May 2005 Selecting the channel type efficiently but does not allow you to play and record using a single channel Enabling browse video consumes a standard definition encoder preventing it from being used with broadcast quality video To change the channel type 1 Select Channel Configuration in the Configuration Manager window The Channel Configuration dialog box appears 2 Select the tab for the channel you want to modify 3 Select an appropriate channel type Depending on the channel type different codec or encoder decoder information is displayed below the configuration tree
214. lessly back to back without any configuration changes DVCPRO 25 Codec This type uses the DVCPRO compression format at 25Mbps To configure a channel as DVCPRO 25 you must have at least one codec configured as this type DVCPRO 50 Codec This type uses the DVCPRO compression format at 50Mbps This codec type is available as a selection only if you have the license for 50Mbps operation To configure a channel as DVCPRO 50 you must have at least one codec configured as this type MPEG Encoder This type configures the codec to be an MPEG encoder for use with MPEG recorder and MPEG D10 recorder channel types It is important to remember that these encoders have different capabilities than the encoders on the Profile XP MPEG Encoder board Video is encoded only at bit rates up to 25Mbps or with the license up to SOMbps MPEG Decoder This type configures the codec to be an MPEG decoder for use in playing out standard definition MPEG video MPEG Codec This type configures the codec to be an MPEG codec able to switch from Play to Record without using a second codec resource The MPEG codec supports video at bit rates up to 25Mbps or with the license up to SOMbps including MPEG D10 Choose this configuration for use with MPEG Player Recorder or MPEG D10 Player Recorder channels NOTE When you select or change a video codec type you must restart the media platform for the change to take effect To configure a video co
215. lex Cable type duplex zip cord plenum grade Fiber Typical Length meters 50 125 300 62 5 125 500 326 Profile XP System Guide 13 May 2005 Audio board connector Audio board connector 13 May 2005 The Audio Board accepts 16 channels of digital audio input and provides 16 channels of digital audio output via a 80 pin connector on the rear panel The cable to this connector is from the Profile Audio Chassis PAC or from the XLR BNC 216 Digital Audio Breakout Box O 1 7 3 41 Female 40 ta 80 O 0624 36 Profile XP System Guide 327 Chapter B Pin Signal Description Pin Signal Description Pin Signal Description 1 Ch 1 2 AES Out P 28 nc 55 Ch 15 16 AES Out P 2 Ch1 2 AES Out N 29 Ch 13 14 AES In P 56 Ch 15 16 AES Out N 3 Chassis Ground 30 Ch 13 14 AES In N 57 Ch 1 4 ADC Clock Out P 4 Chassis Ground 31 AES Reference In P 58 Ch 1 4 ADC Clock Out N 5 Ch 5 6 AES Out P 32 AES Reference In N 59 Ch3 4 AES In P 6 Ch5 6 AES Out N 33 AES Monitor Out P 60 Ch3 4 AES In N 7 nc 34 AES Monitor Out N 61 Ch 5 8 ADC Clock Out P 8 nc 35 ne 62 Ch 5 8 ADC Clock Out N 9 Ch9 10 AES Out P 36 nc 63 Ch7 8 AES In P 10 Ch9 10 AES Out N 37 UART Receive P 64 Ch7 8 AES In N 11 nc 38 UART Receive N 65 Ch9 12 ADC Clock Out P 12 nc 39
216. lick Tools Make File System The File System wizard appears 80 Profile XP System Guide 13 May 2005 Binding disks and creating a video file system File System Wizard Page 1 of 2 x Volume Name Enter a volume name for the file system The volume name may have up to 7 characters and is not case mn sensitive A trailing colon will be added if one is not supplied Use only alphanumeric characters AZ dashes and underscores Ei You can change the volume name t any time without aftecting the media files stored on the system 7 Enter a volume name or accept the default name then click Next File System Wizard Page 2 of 2 x RAID3 LUNs This wizard can create a video file system using all LUNs bound as RAID3 Creating a new file system deletes all media files if a file system already exists Should the wizard create a new file system C No set the volume name only lt Back Cancel 8 Select Yes create a file system using all RAID3 LUNs then click Finish 9 Click OK in the warning message box The Progress Report window appears showing the create file system task status 13 May 2005 Profile XP System Guide 81 T Chapter 3 Working with RAID Storage Using GVG Disk Utility Current Progress Not Busy Commands List Comment Progress Completed Making file system Done 100 15 16 58 10 When the reboot message appears click OK to
217. lient host 127 0 0 1 localhost 192 168 99 1 Profile 192 168 101 1 Profile1_leO 192 168 99 2 Profile2 192 168 101 2 Profile2_leO 3 Save the file and exit the text editor 4 Reboot your Profile XP unit 5 Copy the new hosts file onto all the other machine to save you editing it again 280 Profile XP System Guide 13 May 2005 Power off and connect proper Ethernet cabling Connector Pin outs for cabling specifications and 2 Ethernet cables were provided with your Profile XP system If these cables are not used Profile XP Media Platform The Ethernet interface connector for the video network is located on the rear panel as shown The video network option provides a standard RJ 45 connector be sure to refer to Appendix B Power off and connect proper Ethernet cabling pinouts S pe go lt Es E 2 AN lt o Oo ot TG O ie pe 3s l os at ee i D E38 7 50 Z Los 6 o won Q5 iu E O S 3 2 m g gt 4 i m S 5 2G 99 y ss 2 OCO o J a 6 qn 8 lO is lt ota gt O0000000000000000 na fj ooo oo OO OOOO OOOO OO o Edo o N Hit 00000000000000000 o O00000000000000000 00000000000000000 2 jas gt O o L br o S eI B m o 8 e oooo0o000000000000 a l iii Ml 00000000000000000 n II 0000000000000000 0 E2 oY on
218. list or click Select All 4 Select a fixed audio delay preset using the drop down list Audio presets shown are for the 525 video standard Presets for 625 video standard are 0 samples 0 fields 960 samples 1 field and 1020 samples 2 fields 5 Click Finish to save your settings 13 May 2005 Profile XP System Guide 203 T Chapter 6 Modifying a Channel Audio Settings Selecting custom audio delay To select custom audio delay 1 Select Audio Routing in the Configuration Manager window The Audio Routing dialog box appears 2 Click Next to navigate to Audio Routing page 3 AudioR outing Page 3 of 3 x Audio Timing A Use the following digital audio format 16 bit PCM Audio Channels 7 amp 8 J14 C 24 bit PCM Audio Channels 9 10 J14 Audio Channels 11 amp 12 J14 Audio Channels 13 amp 14 J14 Audio Channels 15 amp 16 14 Delay the audio by the following number of samples 0 samples 0 fields x samples 0 fields 800 samples 1 field 1600 samples 2 fields Sekt N lt Back Newt gt Finish Cancel Ea 3 Select an audio pair from the list or click Select All 4 Select Custom in the audio delay drop down list The audio samples edit box appears Delay the audio by the following number of samples Custom bd 960 samples 5 Enter the fixed audio delay in number of audio samples from 0 to 2 fields in the samples text box Audio Delay 525 6
219. ll the video outputs at the same time 4 Select the Blank horizontal interval check box 5 Click Finish to saving your settings 180 Profile XP System Guide 13 May 2005 Renaming video I Os in crosspoint lists Renaming video I Os in crosspoint lists You can change the names of video inputs and outputs This allows you to use more meaningful names for them in the Channel Configuration dialog box Renaming the video inputs To rename the video input 1 Choose Video Input in the Configuration Manager window The Video Input dialog box appears Video Input Page 1 of 3 x Input Attributes Wideo Input Name Physical Location Slot 5 BNC 1 top Video signal is present QO VITC timecode is present Ancillary Data Checksum error Parity error The following embedded audio groups were detected Oa ac ac ac 2 Select a video input in the Video Inputs list 3 Enter a name for the video input in the Video Input Name box or click Default to restore the factory default video input name 4 Select another video input or click Finish to saving your settings 13 May 2005 Profile XP System Guide 181 T Chapter 5 Modifving a Channel Video Settings Renaming the video outputs To rename the video output 1 Choose Video Output in the Configuration Manager window The Video Output dialog box appears Video Output Page 1 of 3 SDI Out4J5 2 Select a video output in the
220. loop and associated circuits along with all other active components are on redundant separate hot swappable modules This improves serviceability and increases fault tolerance by eliminating any single point of failure The PFR700 controllers provide enhanced performance of up to 2 Gb s transfer rates using SCSI protocol Optical cables connect to hosts such as to a Profile XP Media Platform equipped with a Fibre Channel Disk II card or to a Fibre Channel switch in an Open SAN installation Copper cables connect a PFR700 to the PFR700E RAID Expansion Chassis NOTE Grass Valley does not support mixing disk drives of differing capacities in any RAID chassis For example if a PFR 700 and PFR700E are connected to a Profile XP system all the disk drives in both chassis must be of the same capacity If a qualified drive of a different capacity is added all the drives in the chassis will take on the characteristics of the smallest drive Refer to the PFR 700 Instruction Manual for service information including monitoring the front and rear panel LED status indicators and replacing serviceable modules 68 Profile XP System Guide 13 May 2005 Estimating storage capacity The storage capacity is determined by the number and size of disk drives in system and the video data rate selected to record video The Fibre Channel RAID storage system can be configured with five to thirty disk drives including the Expansion chassis Estimating storage c
221. lt AES EBU Audio Profile XP Optional item 8112 3 Block diagram for PVS1000 standard definition system Profile XP System Guide 13 May 2005 Board level block diagram Real Time Subsystem Media Storage Subsystem Fibre Channel Disk Interface A A NOT Not Available when Embedded Audio is used NTSC PAL SD SDI HD out Video Compression HD MPEG 2 Encoder HD MPEG 2 Decoder Applications Subsystem 7 i oo SVGA j oooi s I Add Encoder ee Mouse lt HD SDI aa Decoder Boards ira E a r gt y 1 plus Windows NT lt I I Needed only when ae SSS Crosspoint Embedded Audio is used K Examples 8 z Add I O Boards 2 n eee Ej dio Real Time i a System Board RS 422 Pry Real Time Interface S i Video Audio Processor Crosspoint Fabric S LTC amp GPI Ethernet I Os Video Network Net Genlock lt Video Fibre Ch lt Embedded Video Audio gt Network Embedded audio requires extra SDI board lt AES EBU Audio Profile XP Optional item 0624 65 Block diagram for PVS 2000 high definition system 13 May 2005 Profile XP System Guide 37 a T Chapter 1 Introducing the Profile XP Media Platform Real Time Subsystem Media Storage Subsystem Fibre Chann
222. m ancillary data eee eeeeeeseeeeeneeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeneeeeee 218 Setting up the VITC reader on a Video Input 0 eee eeee eee a 219 Setting up the VITC reader on the Reference Input 00 adds 221 Generating VITC on a video OULDUL eee cence tenet eeenneeteneeeetneeeeeeeeeetesaeeeenaeeesnaeeeee 223 Selecting the video output as a timecode output for the channel 223 Setting up the VITC generator on a video outpUt a asas 225 Deleting unwanted VITC and other VBI signals 1s aid 226 Recording or generating LTC sii adas 228 Select a timecode source for timecode burn in asassass saeima 229 Modifying a Channel Ancillary Data About Profile XP series ancillary data ii aid 231 Adding an ancillary data track i isia as 232 Selecting the video I Os used for ancillary data did 233 Removing an ancillary data track iiaas eee 235 Managing Optional Licenses Enabling optional features 2 ccicescecescicceiecttnanste case seevescussdecestuaneeasceeevsciaeeseectevseneenecete 237 Requesting a license 238 Adding a IC N sironnan aa a e aaa g A AAEE d ities d adds 242 Deleting licenses 243 Arehivina licens riroraa aieeaa m res R a ste 243 Controlling the Profile XP Remotely Setting up RS 422 remote control in VdrPanel iia aaa 246 Setting up RS 422 remote control using Prolink a sii 249 How to set p ProlihK x ieg si seraset s n age
223. me is added to the network host list as shown Add Remove Machine Network Host List Add Remove Profile2 f Click OK to close the Add Remove Machine window The Connection Status message box appears showing the progress of new connection then the Media Manager window reappears including the machine name just added 13 May 2005 Profile XP System Guide 275 T Chapter 11 7 Setting up a Simple Network Untitled Media Manager Of x File Edit View Tools Help d Protie1 E Pes xe Fe Contents of Proifle1 EXT default El sf Profile Network Modified Profilel Local pim 00 00 05 20 MPEG 03 02 00 07 47 AM nes a ae dik 45 2 00 00 05 15 MPEG 03 02 00 05 15 PM QA default_back ey Recycled Profile2 clip icon EXT p gt default default_back ft Recycled default bin volume icon contents pane Power on the next Profile XP system and wait for it to initialize then repeat step 2 Continue adding one system at a time until all Profile XP systems have been added to Media Manager Use the following steps to transfer a clip over the network a Double click on the icon of another machine on the network b Double click on the volume icon default name is Ext in the same machine A default bin should be displayed c Double click on the icon of the local machine on the network and then the volume icon If there are no clip
224. me name You can change the video file system volume name at any time without affecting the media files stored on the system Changing the volume name may be required with some third party Profile XP control software which requires a specific volume name To change the file system volume name 1 Start Configuration Manager using the desktop shortcut or by selecting Start Programs Profile Applications Configuration Manager t4 Profile1 Oe x File View Help Sack A GYG Disk Utility Jol x File View Tools Help Eaka Setinge Mitooede Version Primer Peer ID Controller0 Controller0 Corect 7 86 56 0 E B Bound LUNO By LUN1 amp LUN2 S UnBound grass valley 2 In Configuration Manager click File System to start GVG Disk Utility 3 In GVG Disk Utility click Tools Make File System The File System wizard appears 13 May 2005 Profile XP System Guide 85 T Chapter 3 Working with RAID Storage Using GVG Disk Utility File System Wizard Page 1 of 2 4 Enter a new volume name then click Next File System Wizard Page 2 of 2 5 Select No set the volume name only then click Finish The Progress Report window appears showing the change volume name task status 6 Upon 100 completion click Close in Progress Report window Be sure to restart applications that access disk storage on the P
225. n files Later you can easily restore settings by opening the saved configuration files Configuration Manager also allows you to restore factory default settings Using the Save a copy Open feature you can e Easily modify Profile XP system configuration for a different use e Revert to a known good configuration e Duplicate configurations on Profile XP systems Saving a copy of your system configuration 13 May 2005 Use the Save a Copy command in the Configuration Manager File menu to save the current configuration to a named configuration file You can choose to save the current channel and hardware settings or just channel settings by saving the appropriate file type To save a copy of your system configuration 1 In Configuration Manager select File Save a Copy The Save As dialog box appears 2 Choose whether to save hardware and channel configuration cfg or the channel configuration only cdf using the Save as type drop down list NOTE Opening a cfg file changes both channel and hardware configuration while opening a cdf file changes only channel configuration Save As Save in 5 profile r c Dogs diag 2 evntsch cfg drivers extras flash lib File name config ctg Save as type Hardware and Channel Configuration cfa Cancel Hardware and Channel Configuration cfa Channel Contiquration Only cdf 3 Enter the file name then click Save Your configuration is
226. n the Configuration Manager window The Video Output dialog box appears 2 Click Next to navigate to Video Output page 2 of 3 Video Output Page 2 of 3 x Vertical Interval Setup Vertical Ancillary Data Packets SDI OutB J5 Which lines will be reserved for vertical ancillary data packets V Clear lines between m VITE Generation Which lines should be used after vertical ancillary data packet insertion V Generate VITC timecode on Line 4 112 7 Line 2 14 v Einish Cancel El 3 Select a video outputs from the list or click Select All to configure all video outputs at the same time 174 Profile XP System Guide 13 May 2005 Setting up the VITC generator 4 Select the line numbers where the VITC pair should be generated using the Line 1 Line 2 drop down lists Which lines should be used when generating VITC timecode Line 1 16 Line 2 f18 7 17 18 h 5 Click Finish to saving your settings 13 May 2005 Profile XP System Guide 175 T Chapter 5 Modifying a Channel Video Settings Erasing video output VBI information NOTE This information applies only to standard definition MPEG video You can remove unwanted VBI information that may be present in a recorded video clip or on the output during E to E You can select which VBI lines are erased by selecting the starting and ending line numbers between line 1 and line 32 Blanking occurs before
227. n the following table Characteristics Safety Rating Supplemental Data Mains Voltage Steady 100 240Vpmg 87 264 VRMS State Amplitude Mains Frequency 60 50Hz 47 63Hz Range Mains Steady State 7A max 100 Vems 5A max 120 Vems Current 3A max 240 Vems Mains Inrush Current 70A 240 Vpmgs max 35A 120 VRMS max Supply Type Single Phase Supply Connection Detachable cord set IEC320 filtered inlet connector Efficiency gt 70 Power Output Rating Thermal Output 430 W maximum 2100BTU h max assuming max configuration Per power supply PAC 216 Power Requirements The following table lists the power requirements for the PAC216 audio chassis 13 May 2005 Characteristic Specification Voltages current from power supply 5V 1 9 A maximum Typical Total Power 9 0 Watts typical Maximum Heat Dissipation 32 42 BTU hour 9 5 watts Profile XP System Guide 315 Chapter A 316 Environmental Criteria The following table lists the environmental criteria for the Profile XP Media Platform RAID storage Chassis and the PAC 216 Characteristics Description Operating Temperature Requirement 10 to 40 C Storage Temperature Requirement 40 to 65 C Operating Altitude Requirement To 10 000 feet Supplemental Data IEC 950 compliant to 2000 meters Storage Altitude Requirement To
228. ncillary Data is not line specific To set up the VITC generator 1 Choose Video Output in the Configuration Manager window The Video Output dialog box appears 2 Click Next to navigate to Video Output page 2 of 3 Video Output Page 2 of 3 x Vertical Interval Setup m Vertical Ancillary Data Packets SDI OutBJ5 Which lines will be reserved for vertical ancillary data packets V Clear lines between 32 Defaut and 12 m VITC Generation Which lines should be used after vertical ancillary data packet insertion V Generate VITC timecode on Line 1 12 Line 2 14 Defaut 3 Select a video output from the list or click Select All to configure all video inputs at the same time Sect Al lt Back 6 Type or select the line numbers where the VITC signals should be generated using the Line 1 Line 2 drop down lists Which lines should be used when generating VITC timecode Line 1 116 ba 4 Click Finish save your settings 13 May 2005 Profile XP System Guide 225 226 T Chapter 7 Modifying a Channel Timecode Settings Deleting unwanted VITC and other VBI signals You can remove unwanted VITC signals that may be present in a recorded video clip or on the output during E to E You can select which lines are cleared which you would typically do if you are inserting ancillary data on your output Blanking level is inserted in plac
229. nd 12 GPI In4 25 Signal Ground 13 Signal Ground 322 Profile XP System Guide 13 May 2005 GPI output connector on I O Panel 13 May 2005 13 Female GPI output connector on I O Panel O GT O 0624 32 25 14 Pin Signal Pin Signal 1 Signal Ground 14 GPI In5 2 Signal Ground 15 Signal Ground 3 GPI Outl 16 Signal Ground 4 Signal Ground 17 GPI Out6 5 Signal Ground 18 Signal Ground 6 GPI Out2 19 Signal Ground 7 Signal Ground 20 GPI Out7 8 Signal Ground 21 Signal Ground 9 GPI Out3 22 Signal Ground 10 Signal Ground 23 GPI Out8 11 Signal Ground 24 Signal Ground 12 GPI Out4 25 Signal Ground 13 Signal Ground Profile XP System Guide 323 Chapter B I O Panel LTC connectors The I O Panel provides four female XLR connectors for LTC In and four male XLR connectors for LTC Out LTC In fa LTC Out Connector 2 1 1 2 Connector female L N A male 3 3 0624 9 Pin LTC In Pin LTC Out 1 Signal Ground 1 Signal Ground 2 2 3 3 324 Profile XP System Guide 13 May 2005 Fibre Channel Disk board connectors Fibre Channel Disk board connectors The Fibre Channel Disk board has two connectors labeled Port A and Port B Both connectors have the same pin out The interconnect cable has a Amphenal Metagig connector on one end and DB 9 on the other Pinouts for both ends of the cable are shown
230. nd the Profile XP media platform without re encoding the compressed video Video compression for high definition 13 May 2005 The PVS2000 uses MPEG 2 4 2 0 Main Level encoding with selectable bit rates from 20 Mb s to 80 Mb s Profile XP System Guide 27 T Chapter 1 Introducing the Profile XP Media Platform Fibre Channel RAID storage IMPORTANT If your Profile XP Media Platform is part of an Open SAN refer to the Open SAN Instruction Manual for information about media storage The Profile XP Media Platform supports two storage options distributed and centralized Distributed Storage Distributed storage is implemented using RAID storage systems connected directly to each Profile XP Media Platform Each Profile XP system accesses media on its own dedicated storage system Increased availability to storage is provided by an optional redundant RAID controller board available for the RAID storage system If the primary connection fails the system automatically switches over and uses the redundant connection Media is shared in the distributed storage model by transferring the media files over an optional video network adapter With Profile streaming protocol media playout can begin before the video network transfer is complete Centralized Storage The Profile XP centralized storage solution the Open SAN is implemented using a Fibre Channel switch fabric to connect all RAID storage chassis and Profile XP Media Platforms
231. ndows NT Ethernet and video Ethernet entries in the HOSTS file on both systems refer to Manually Edit the hosts file on each Profile XP on page 279 Media Manager can t find a Profile XP when you try to add it to the network hosts list PortServer is not running on the remote Profile XP system Start PortServer on the remote system refer to Running PortServer to enable remote operation on page 251 Media Manager can t find the Profile XP when you try to add it to the network hosts list Unable to resolve Windows NT Ethernet name There may be an incorrect Windows NT Ethernet name entry in the HOSTS file Verify all Windows NT Ethernet and video Ethernet entries in the HOSTS file on both systems refer to Manually Edit the hosts file on each Profile XP on page 279 Media Manager can t find a Profile XP when you try to add it to the network hosts list No Windows NT Ethernet connectivity Refer to Testing the Ethernet Video network on page 304 Profile XP System Guide 303 T Chapter 12 Solving Common Setup Problems Testing the Ethernet Video network Use this procedure to test your video network setup Tests are included for the Windows NT Ethernet and video Ethernet networks Testing the Windows NT Ethernet name resolution and connectivity The video Ethernet video network relies on Windows NT Ethernet connectivity and name resolution This procedure u
232. nel RAID Chassis connector pin outs Audio board connector 327 Ethernet connector 318 Fibre Channel disk connector 325 Fibre Channel network connector 326 GPI connector pinouts 322 LTC connector I O Panel 324 Parallel Port connector 319 RS 232 connector 320 RS 422 connector I O Panel 321 S VGA connector 317 creating new channels 126 creating video file system 72 77 crosspoints video renaming 181 182 D data rate see video quality delay in E to E 143 description channel 126 dimmed text resources displayed in 122 disk firmware downloading PFR500 101 downloading PFR600 107 downloading PFR700 113 disk rebuild forcing rebuild PFR500 103 starting rebuild PFR600 108 Disk Utility 71 100 107 113 Dolby D 202 drop frame timecode timecode generator 13 May 2005 setting 216 Dupli disk controls and indicators 31 DVCPRO 25 27 DVCPRO 50 27 E E to E delay 143 E to E timed mode 143 146 editing a clip 255 electrical specifications 310 analog audio 314 digital audio 314 GPI I O 313 LTC VO 313 PAC216 power reguirements 315 Profile XP power specifications 315 Reference Genlock 313 Serial Digital I O 310 Serial Digital Output 311 Video Monitor 312 embedded audio I O input status 168 selecting 197 EN55022 Class A Warning 17 environmental criteria 316 Error Detection Handling EDH removing 180 Ethernet hubs and switches 259 261 266 267 Ethernet connector 318 Ethernet switch 282 Ethernet video network
233. nfigure 3 Click on a timecode track in the configuration tree or click Add Track to add a new one 4 Click the Crosspoints button then select the video source containing the ancillary data in the Timecode Input list Channel Configuration P S3000 x a v ve ves vea Neme Mize Add Channel in HD SD MPEG Player Remove Channel 3 Virl Video H Track 1 Add Track Audio Q Track 1 amp 2 Delete Track ly Timecode E Brack 1 E Data Summary Configuration for Timecode Track 1 Timecode Input Timecode Output s L TC Generator Any Refln VITC IndJ3 DJ SDI VITC OutaJ5 HD ANC LTC ndJ TE Generator 1 HD ANC LTC In J9 eee cree ue 5 Click Finish to save your settings and close the Channel Configuration dialog box 218 Profile XP System Guide 13 May 2005 Setting up the VITC reader on a Video Input Setting up the VITC reader on a Video Input NOTE This page appears only if the system reference source is Reference Black and one or more standard definition SDI boards are installed HD SDI inputs do not appear in the VITC Setup list because VITC as Ancillary Data is not line specific The VITC reader has two detection modes Automatic and Manual When you select automatic detection you can set the range of vertical interval lines scanned to find the VITC signal pair lines 10 to 21 by default Manual allows you to choose specific
234. nfiguring storage see Chapter 3 Working with RAID Storage Using GVG Disk Utility ty Profile1 Oi x File View Help Video Timing Fr Video Input K Video Output 4 Audio Reference amp Audio Input J Audio Output J Audio Routing ly License Configuration A Channel Configuration 48 Profile XP System Guide GYG Disk Utility File View Tools Help Er PFC500 ij Controler 3 Bound amp LUNO E LUN1 483 UnBound ET Controller 3 8 Bound 346 UnBound Disk10 IES Disk11 Disk12 EG Disk13 IES Disk14 Cabinet ID Slot ID Microcode Version Number of Reads Number of Writes 13 May 2005 Network Network Choosing Network in Configuration Manager opens the video network configuration pages Use these pages to configure the settings for the optional video network For more information on setting up the video network option see Chapter 11 Setting up a Simple Network Profile Network Page 1 of 1 Fibre Network 13 May 2005 Profile XP System Guide 49 T Chapter 2 Working with Configuration Manager Video setup items Configuration Manager includes four items used for configuring the video input output settings These include e Video Timing used to select the video standard and for setting up reference genlock and video output timing e Video Input used to configure th
235. ngle disk array storage system with a total of 60 drives and 3 6 TB 7 3 TB or 14 6 TB of storage depending on disk drive option The built in chassis daisy chaining capabilities provide for cost effective storage expansion as requirements grow The PFR600 utilizes dual FC AL technology allowing two loop configurations within a single chassis Port Bypass Circuits have been added to maintain loop integrity during failures without user intervention Each loop and associated Port Bypass Circuits along with all other active components are on redundant separate modules This improves serviceability and increases fault tolerance by eliminating any single point of failure With two RAID Controllers the two loops within a single standard chassis are configured as a single loop with a backup loop in standby mode PFR600 host interface supports 1Gb or 2Gb Fibre Channel physical layers The physical layer is determined by the type of Small Form Factor Pluggable transceiver SFP installed in the host port 2Gb operation requires the optical SFP Copper SFPs are used for 1Gb operation NOTE Grass Valley does not support mixing disk drives of differing capacities in any RAID chassis For example if a PFR600 and PFR600E are connected toa Profile XP system all the disk drives in both chassis must be of the same capacity If a qualified drive of a different capacity is added all the drives in the chassis will take on the characteristics of the smallest drive
236. nnector for Windows NT networking is an RJ 45 connector located on cabling specifications and pinouts Power off and connect proper cabling Profile XP Media Platform Chapter 11 Setting up a Simple Network From Ethernet ra network hub or switch o fd i A O BHE O OG o amp ot I Fl ogame O oo000000000000000 O0000000000000000 O0000000000000000 Profile3 Profile1 Profile2 al 00000000000000000 O otso 00000000000000000 00000000000000000 00000000000000000 00000000000000000 oo oo 00000000000000000 00000000000000000 Porro D000 D000 0000 00000000000000000 O00000000000000000 O0000000000000000 00000000000000000 O0000000000000000 00900000000000000 O00000000000000000 o Ethernet Hub or Switch Network O00000000000000000 00000000000000000 O0000000000000000 00000000000000000 O00000000000000000 O0000000000000000 O00000000000000000 00000000000000000 O00000000000000000 00000000000000000 Windows NT You can connect your Profile XP systems together using an Ethernet hub or switch An Ethernet hub is used in most simple Ethernet networks 0624 27 13 May 2005 Profile XP System Guide 266 Power on the hub or switch and configure if necessary Power on the hub or switch and configure if necessary Refer to the your device s vendor documentation to
237. nnel or Switch S Switch EE Power on the switch and configure if necessary Refer to the your device s vendor documentation to power on and configure as required Test the Fibre Channel network using Media Manager 13 May 2005 Use this procedure to perform a quick test of your video network setup with Media Manager Media Manager allows you to have access to media stored anywhere on your network and provides tools for managing that media such as explore cut copy paste delete and transfer You can manage media stored locally on the disk array attached to the Profile XP system or on any Profile XP system connected to the network You can also transfer media stored on any Profile XP system on your video network via the video network connection For detailed information on using all the features of Media Manager refer to the Profile XP User Manual This procedure tests the Fibre Channel network starting with only two Profile XP systems then continues by adding one Profile XP system at a time until all systems are on and tested NOTE If you encounter a problem during any portion of this test procedure refer to Chapter 12 Solving Common Setup Problems on page 287 To test the Fibre Channel video network 1 Power on two Profile XP systems 2 Perform the following test on each Profile XP system a Double click on the Port Server icon This starts the Fibre Channel communication tool It must always be running
238. nnels and their settings as you scroll through the channel summary list When the dialog box opens the display automatically scrolls to show the properties of the channel tab you have selected Channel definitions Use for TimeDelay Record Channel MPEG Recorder Medium 15 Mb s SDl IndJ SDI Dut 7 Audio Audio Channels 1 amp 2 Audio Channels 3 amp 4 Timecode TC Gen 0 SDI VITC OutaJ7 tr2 Use tor TimeDelay Play Channel MPEG Player Medium 15 Mb s Video SDI 1nB J7 SDI OutB J7 Audio Audio Channels 5 amp 6 Audio Channels 7 amp 8 Timecode lt No Input gt SDI VITC OutB J7 ver x A similar summary dialog box appears in Profile applications to help you when you are selecting channels 13 May 2005 Profile XP System Guide 125 E Chapter 4 Adding or Removing Channels Adding and configuring a new channel Adding a channel involves naming the channel choosing the channel type and number of video audio and timecode tracks along with the crosspoints for each track To add a channel Use the Add Channel button in the Channel Configuration dialog box to add a new channel When you click the Add Channel button a new channel is created with the same properties as the current channel tab selected 1 Click the channel tab most similar to the channel you want to configure in the Channel Configuration dialog box 2 Click the Add Channel button Entering channel name and description You
239. not assigned to the video channel you are using Verify the audio channel pair s assigned to the channel you re using Refer to Selecting audio channels for an audio track on page 196 AES EBU or analog audio No audio I O The incorrect audio input format is selected for the audio channels you are using Determine the audio channels assigned the channel by referring to Selecting audio channels for an audio track on page 196 then verify that the correct audio input format is selected Refer to Changing the audio I O format on page 197 Analog audio Audio is present on audio level meters in applications but there is no audio output signal Analog audio out is muted Un mute the audio output Refer to Muting analog audio outputs on page 207 Analog audio Both E to E and playback audio output are distorted Audio input signal clipping caused by excessive audio input level or wrong input impedance setting PAC216 input impedance is set to Hi Z by default Check for input audio clipping and reduce the input audio level using the input gain adjustment Refer to Adjusting analog audio input level on page 205 Change input impedance to 600 ohms if required in your system Analog audio Audio level is too low Analog input and output level can be adjusted in the Profile XP system user interface Adjust the input or output audio level as required Refer to A
240. not create or play master clips complex movies that include both standard and high definition material This definition independent software option Agile Output can be installed on a PVS 2000 or a PVS3000 although up or down conversion is dependent on your output hardware For example your PVS2000 cannot down convert HD material without adding standard definition output cards Profile XP System Guide 19 T Chapter 1 Introducing the Profile XP Media Platform All inputs both standard and high definition can record ancillary data When you play these clips the ancillary data is inserted on the specified lines If your chosen output does not support as much ancillary data as was recorded on each line the data is truncated at the maximum for that output This occurs for example when you play HD clips on an SD output 20 Profile XP System Guide 13 May 2005 Profile XP Media Platform features Features common to all media platforms 16 8 AES Pairs 32 16 AES pairs channel audio AES EBU embedded or analog uncompressed audio Dolby E and AC 3 compressed audio 600 Mb s System Bandwidth Redundant power supply Windows NT system disk cooling fans for reliability Fibre Channel attached high performance RAID storage Storage capability supported includes distributed storage for hundreds of channels as well as centralized storage for up to 64 channels NetCentral provides remote error reporting and monitoring via SNMP
241. ntinue with step 3 Profile XP System Guide 299 T Chapter 12 Solving Common Setup Problems 3 Type ping then this time use the IP address of one of the Profile XP systems on the network then press Enter For Example ping 192 168 99 100 If this command returns Pinging 192 168 99 100 with 32 bytes of data Reply from 192 168 99 100 bytes 32 time lt 10ms TTL 128 Reply from 192 168 99 100 bytes 32 time lt 10ms TTL 128 Reply from 192 168 99 100 bytes 32 time lt 10ms TTL 128 Reply from 192 168 99 100 bytes 32 time lt 10ms TTL 128 You have connectivity to the network so there must be a name resolution problem for the IP address You need to re check your HOSTS file for accuracy Refer to Manually Edit the hosts file on each Profile XP on page 270 NOTE You may want to re boot to ensure that any changes have taken effect If however the ping command returns Pinging 192 168 99 100 with 32 bytes of data Request timed out Request timed out Request timed out Request timed out One or both of the Profile XP systems appears to have a network connectivity problem Re check the cabling and try again If this does not solve the problem refer to the Profile XP Service Manual for more help with solving Ethernet network problems 4 Repeat step 2 on all Profile XP systems on the network then proceed with Testing Fibre Channel name resolution and connectivity on page 301 300 Profile XP System Guide 13
242. nual PFR500 product description The PFR500 contains five or ten half height 3 5 Fibre Channel Arbitrated Loop FC AL disk drives The chassis also supports one or two hardware RAID Controllers in one 3U high rack mountable chassis The PFR500 currently uses 73 GB or 146 GB drive capacities With ten drives one chassis holds up to 730 GB or 1 46 TB depending on disk drive option The PFR500E RAID Expansion Chassis provides additional storage capacity It is an identical chassis with two Loop Bypass Board installed Up to nine PFR500E RAID Expansion Chassis can be connected to a single PFR 500 comprising a single disk array storage system with a total of 100 drives and 7 3 TB or 14 6 TB of storage depending on disk drive option The built in chassis daisy chaining capabilities provide for cost effective storage expansion as requirements grow The PFR500 utilizes dual FC AL technology allowing two loop configurations within a single chassis Port Bypass Circuits have been added to maintain loop integrity during failures without user intervention Each loop and associated Port Bypass Circuits along 66 Profile XP System Guide 13 May 2005 PFR600 product description with all other active components are on redundant separate hot swappable modules This improves serviceability and increases fault tolerance by eliminating any single point of failure With two RAID Controllers the two loops within a single standard chassis are configured as a
243. nue 13 May 2005 Profile XP System Guide 239 Chapter 9 Managing Optional Licenses License Request Wizard License Enter the details of the license you wish to purchase NB These values will affect the cost License Type NodeLacked 7 How Many fi How long would you like the license to last Forever For the following period E Months 7 If the license is for Grass Valley equipment Please enter the system serial number avi 23456 5 Enter the requested information Your system serial number is located on the rear panel label and is required to obtain a license Most licenses are NodeLocked apply to 1 system and are valid Forever Choose these options unless otherwise instructed by your Grass Valley representative Click Next to continue License Request Wizard Terms amp Conditions 240 Profile XP System Guide You must agree to the following terms and conditions before continuing to use this service DISCLAIMER Thomson Broadcast amp Media Solutions Inc is not responsible for any import duties fees or taxes associated with this purchase Any such fees incurred will be the sole responsibility of the Purchaser Any such fees charged to Thomson Broadcast amp Media Solutions Inc in regards to this purchase will be billed directly to the Purchaser The Purchaser is responsible for complying with their local and governmental regulations regarding the purchase of this
244. o System reboot procedure on page 94 NOTE If your PFR600 is part of an Open SAN disregard the previous step and refer to the instructions in the Open SAN Instruction Manual for powering off and powering on the Open SAN This concludes the Loading Disk Firmware procedure Replacing a failed disk module In the event of a disk drive failure you ll repair the system by replacing the disk module as soon as possible Refer to the PFR 600 Instruction Manual for information on removing and replacing disk modules NOTE Always use GVG Disk Utility to physically identify the failed disk module Accidently removing the wrong disk module can destroy all media on the disk drives See Identifying disk modules prior to removal on page 3 98 On inserting the replacement disk module the RAID controller automatically starts rebuilding the drive You can verify rebuild status by looking at the disk access LED on the front of the disk module or by checking disk status in GVG Disk Utility To check disk status in GVG Disk Utility select the disk module icon in the device tree Status is reported in the right hand pane On completion the disk drive status changes from Rebuilding to Online You may need to refresh the GVG Disk Utility display Starting disk rebuild manually You may need to start disk rebuild manually in the following cases e Ifa disk rebuild is interrupted for any reason such as a controller failover or power inter
245. ocessor board or the system hard disk or its contents drive rebuild If the system is repaired you must obtain a new permanent license The typical licensing sequence is as follows 1 Use the License Request Wizard to generate a License Request file 2 Provide the License Request file to your Grass Valley representative and purchase the desired license 3 When you receive your license add it to the SabreTooth license manager Profile XP System Guide 237 T Chapter 9 Managing Optional Licenses Requesting a license Optional software licenses are unique to the system for which they are purchased They cannot be used on any other system This requires that you provide a generated unique ID for the desired system to Grass Valley which is then used to create your unique license To obtain an optional software license 1 Open the Licensing page by clicking License Configuration in Configuration Manager Licensing Page 1 of 1 x Licensing Setup Licensable Components Primary License Server AE Profile XP Agile Decoding focahost Request License localhost Available localhost In Use Backup License Server localhost localhost Available localhost Not In Use Show Non Applicable Licenses Ay Licensed 4 From backup server X Unlicensed fi Running without license ss lenas ey toes i 2 Right click the desired optional software feature then choose Request License
246. ocked Error AES EBU In9J14 Validity Error AES EBU 4n10J14 AES EBU 4n11J14 Parity Error AES EBU ln12 14 AES EBU n1314 Acc AES EBU n14 14 ES EBU n15J14 Emphasis AES EBU n16 J14 Cancel i 3 Select the AES EBU pair The following signal status is shown Indicator Description Unlocked Error receiver locked Validity Error AES receiver validity Parity Error parity error CRC CRC subframe errors Emphasis detected emphasis 4 Click Finish or Cancel 13 May 2005 Profile XP System Guide 201 T Chapter 6 Modifying a Channel Audio Settings Selecting incoming digital audio coding format The Profile XP Media Platform provides a choice of compressed or uncompressed audio T O formats which provide flexibility in managing the quality and storage needs of your system The digital audio coding formats supported include e 16 bit or 24 bit PCM PAC216 requires one of these e AC 3 Dolby D Dolby E e Data You must select the coding format for each audio channel I O pair to meet the requirements of your system For example select Dolby E if your incoming audio is compressed using Dolby E Selecting an audio coding format ensures the audio is processed and stored appropriately To select incoming digital audio coding format 1 Select Audio Routing in the Configuration Manager window The Audio Routing dialog box appears 2 Click Next to navigate to Audio Routing page 3 AudioR outing
247. ocols 245 BVW 246 Odetics 246 Profile protocol 249 VDCP 246 removing channels 141 renaming channels 126 renaming video inputs 181 renaming video outputs 182 replacing failed disk Profile XP System Guide PFR600 108 PFR700 114 resource conflicts 124 restoring channels settings 57 hardware settings 57 system settings 57 RS232 connector pinouts 320 RS 422 BVW protocol 246 Odetics protocol 246 Profile protocol 249 remote control protocols 245 VDCP 246 RS 422 board description 39 RS 422 connector I O Panel connector pin outs 321 S SabreTooth License Manager 242 safety terms and symbols 16 saving channel settings 57 hardware settings 57 system settings 57 selecting timecode I O 140 selecting browse video guality 160 selecting channel type 128 setup on video monitor 184 SFP 42 shutdown turning power off 46 signal loss video input 173 video output 179 specifications 309 electrical 310 environmental 316 Fibre Channel disk cable 325 standard accessories 33 still play mode 167 Storage common setup problems 294 storage capacity 69 13 May 2005 Summary dialog box 125 summary dialog boxes about 54 show or hide 55 support Grass Valley 13 S VGA connector 317 switch Fibre Channel 259 switching between video inputs and decoder outputs 143 system bandwidth 70 system clock PFC 500 117 system reference offset adjusting 148 system settings importing and exporting 59 restoring 58 restoring defaults
248. odify a browse video setting click the Browse Video button 3 Select one of the custom presets in the Video Quality drop down list 4 Click the Video Quality Settings button H The MPEG Video Quality Settings dialog box on the left or the MPEG 1 Browse Video Quality Settings dialog box on the right appears MPEG SD ideo Quality Settings kt l 4 MPEG 1 Browse Video Quality Settings x Video Quality Video Quality Custom Custom high Chrominance high Chrominance ERASAN ee alta al alae esa Jigs ne _ 4 2 0 oa oE _ waa gt Jow low h Data Rate 22 Mb s Data Rate 1 5 Mb s GOP GOP IBBPBBPBBPBBPBBP Cancel Help Cancel Help 5 Click and drag the diamond on the grid to change the bit rate and group of pictures GoP settings and click the button for the desired chrominance sampling note that you cannot change the chrominance setting for browse video The settings used for the High Medium Low and Draft presets can be used as reference points when you are making a custom setting You can change the preset name while in the dialog box 6 Click OK when you are finished 7 Click Finish to save your settings and close the Channel Configuration dialog box NOTE If the channel is currently in use by an application it must be reacquired within the application be
249. oftware release 071 8194 00 July 21 2003 Updated to support version 5 2 Profile XP system software release 071 8248 00 February 23 2004 Updated to support version 5 4 Profile XP system software release PVS 3000 PVS 3500 Long GoP on Video Processor board new Fibre Channel Disk II board Agile Output option PFR600 and PFR700 Fibre Channel RAID storage 071 8289 00 23 July 2004 New video standard procedures 13 May 2005 Removed SDTI information 13 May 2005 Contents Chapter 1 Chapter 2 13 May 2005 Preface About this martial vs 28 fede cheeses aed A EE ee gas 9 Using the Profile XP Documentation Set aida 9 Mangal Descriptions iesin akr digg seta v ata v ra oda t v 10 How this manual iS organized daaaaa asas 11 Getting more information aaa 12 Grass Valley Product Support sidssa esere 13 Safety Summaries General Safety Summary 15 Safety Terms and Symbols iiaia eee etssssssser rrer 16 service s iely SUMMAIV aaa srosa kisera ea r ana gar s iiaei S rO aiia 17 Certifications and Compliances asaa ease 17 Introducing the Profile XP Media Platform Profile XP Media Platform features idai ea 19 About channels and factory default configuration siassaa aaa 26 Video compression for standard definition asas 27 Video compression for high definition cccceeeceeeececeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeceaeeceeseeeee
250. og off Windows NT dialog box appears c Press and hold down the Shift key on the Profile XP keyboard then click OK NOTE You must hold down the shift key to over ride auto logon d When the Begin Logon dialog box appears release the Shift key then press the Control Alt Del key sequence e Enter the following then click OK Username Administrator Password triton You are now logged on as Administrator and can modify system settings Logging on as Profile After performing system administrative tasks using the Administrator user account Profile account to enable the automatic logon feature for future system boots To logon as profile 1 Power up or log off the Profile XP System 2 When the logon error message appears click OK 3 Enter the following then click OK Username Profile Password profile Windows NT will now perform automatic logon the next time the system is restarted 13 May 2005 Profile XP System Guide 45 T Chapter 1 Introducing the Profile XP Media Platform Shutting down the Profile XP system To shut down your Profile XP system without loss of data you must 1 Quit all Profile applications by selecting Quit or Exit from the File menu 2 Exit or Quit any other processes which may be running in the same way 3 Shutdown Windows NT by pressing the CTRL ALT DEL key sequence and choosing Shutdown 4 When Windows NT displays a message that it is safe to turn off the system turn the front panel swit
251. om 24 Mb s Video Input Video Output s li HD SDI Outd I7 C HB SDI OutaJ9 Up Conversion Down Wonversion Advanced Crosspoints Cancel Help 136 Profile XP System Guide 13 May 2005 Selecting playout aspect ratio conversion Setting up conversion aspect ratio 13 May 2005 To select set the aspect ratio conversion for SD material on an HD SD MPEG Player channel on an HD output 1 Double click the video icon to expand the configuration tree 2 Choose a video track in the configuration tree such as Track 1 3 Click the Up Conversion button to see the aspect ratio choices Channel Configuration P S 3000 x a vert vez By vis ves Name Type Add Channel in HD SD MPEG Player Remove Channel g virl J Video i Hi Track 1 Add Track E Audio Q Track1 2 Delete Track ld Timecode BoE Track 1 J Data Summary Configuration for Video Track 1 Default Up Conversion Method OO Pillarbox 2 KON Black bars at the left and right c U4 Half Pillarbox Smaller bars some detail lost c Up Conversion R p Conversion pa No bars even more detail lost RE c Stretch to Fit Advanced oO O 4 3 image expanded to 16 9 frame FHA Crosspoints Cancel Help 4 Select the desired aspect ratio conversion from the available options Pillarbox The 4 3 aspect ratio is maintained centered on the screen
252. on any machine where you are using Fibre Channel If you want you can place Port Server in StartUp folder and set it to run minimized Make sure it s running on the other Profile machine too b Start Media Manager by double clicking the shortcut on the desktop or by choosing Start Programs Profile Applications Media Manager The Media Manager window appears Profile XP System Guide T Chapter 11 Setting up a Simple Network V l Untitled Media Manager File Edit View Tools Help Per el fe Contents of Proifle1 EXT detault nat Profile Network Profile1 Local EXT ig default KA default_back ey Recycled Modified 00 00 05 20 MPEG 03 02 00 07 47 AM 00 00 05 15 MPEG 03 02 00 05 15 PM NOTE You will not automatically see the other machine on the network For example if you are running Media Manager on Profile1 you will only see Profile1 c Choose File Add Remove Machine The Add Remove Machine dialog box appears The Local label follows the name of the current machine Add Remove Machine Network Host List Add Remove coos d Click Add The Add Network Host dialog box appears 274 Profile XP System Guide 13 May 2005 Test the Fibre Channel network using Media Manager Add Network Host New Host Name e Enter the name of the other machine in the New Host Name box Profile2 for example then click OK The new host na
253. on the media platform and accessed concurrently by different channels MPEG 2 support The PVS 1000 uses MPEG 2 4 2 2 Main Level encoding with selectable bit rates from 4 Mb s to 50 Mb s The additional chroma resolution that 4 2 2 sampling gives provides good multi generation capability as well as up conversion quality 4 2 0 chroma sampling is also available allowing the creation of clips that can be up converted to HD resolutions on an HD decoder with the Definition Independent option which is included on the PVS3500 Seamless play and cuts editing at any bit rate and any GoP is made possible by the Profile XP dual MPEG decoder architecture that allows storage efficiencies of a long GoP and maintains the ability to cut on any frame and play clips back to back seamlessly This provides all of the advantages of long GoP encoding without the limitations The PVS1100 provides MPEG 2 4 2 2 support at bit rates up to 25 Mb s and up to 50 Mb s with the 50 Mb s option The PVS 1100 also provides MPEG D10 compatibility MPEG D10 is an MPEG format that was developed for tape It is characterized by a selectable fixed bit rate 30 40 or 50 Mb s and constrained byte GoP CBG that prevents the size of a field from exceeding the physical size of the tape scan DVCPRO support The PVS1100 provides DVCPRO 25 and optional DVCPRO 50 compression formats These formats improve work flow by allowing the transfer of material between other equipment a
254. on the rear specifications Connect the fiber optic cable between the Fibre Channel switch and the Profile XP network connectors as shown NOTE Power down and connect proper Fibre Channel cabling T Chapter 11 Setting up a Simple Network From Fibre Channel network hub or switch jo oo oma O O0O0000000000000000 00000000000000000 9 6 otsen O0000000000000000 o 00000000000000000 i O00000000000000000 00000000000000000 O0000000000000000 00000000000000000 O0000000000000000 0O0000000000000000 O0000000000000000 O0000000000000000 O0000000000000000 O0O0000000000000000 00000000000000000 O0000000000000000 O0000000000000000 O0000000000000000 00000000000000000 O0000000000000000 00090900000000000000 O00000000000000000 00000000000000000 O00000000000000000 00000000000000000 Do not force the fiber optic plug into the Fibre Channel board connector as you may damage the connector the plug or both Make certain the fiber surface is Profile XP Media Platform clean free of dust or debris before inserting the connector into the Fibre Channel board connector 13 May 2005 You can connect your Profile XP systems together using a Fibre Channel switch Profile XP System Guide 272 Power on the switch and configure if necessary Ethernet Hub Profile1 Fibre Cha
255. or Finish Cancel i 3 Enter the IP address and Subnet mask for the video network Ethernet interface NOTE Be sure to read all the information about choosing IP addresses for the Fibre Channel video network option on page 262 Choosing machine names and IP addresses for your Ethernet video network 4 Enter the IP address for the gateway if used 5 Select the error detection options you want to use Enabling extra error detection insures data transfer without corruption Disabling extra error detection speeds up network transfers 6 Click Finish to save your settings Profile XP System Guide 13 May 2005 Manually Edit the hosts file on each Profile XP Manually Edit the hosts file on each Profile XP NOTE Perform this step if you disabled Autohost file administration earlier The hosts file is used by the video network to determine the IP address of devices on the network when only a the device name is given The steps that follow describe how to edit the hosts file located at c winnt system32 drivers etc hosts If you include the names and addresses of all the devices on the network then you can copy the same file onto all the other Profile XP systems instead of editing the hosts file on each Profile XP system NOTE An alternative to manually editing the hosts file is to use the Autohosts file administration feature discussed earlier To update your Hosts file manually 1 Open the following file using Note
256. or in the HOSTS file Refer to Manually Edit the hosts file on each Profile XP on page 270 NOTE You can use the Ping the Site option to ping a specific Profile system using it s IP address or name for example Profilel_fc0 Pinging by name requires the HOSTS file to be correct Pinging by IP address does not require the HOSTS file 302 Profile XP System Guide 13 May 2005 Common Ethernet video network problems Common Ethernet video network problems 13 May 2005 This troubleshooting aid provides corrective action for some common Ethernet video network problems Search the table for the problem you are experiencing then try the corrective action Some problems have more than one corrective action Problem Possible Cause s Corrective Action Can t transfer files in Media Manager There may be an incorrect network name entry in the HOSTS file on the Profile XP system Verify all Windows NT Ethernet and video Ethernet entries in the HOSTS all systems Make sure video Ethernet names use _le that is zero and not the letter O Refer to Manually Edit the hosts file on each Profile XP on page 279 Can t transfer files in Media Manager No video Ethernet connectivity Refer to Testing the Ethernet Video network on page 304 In Media Manager files transfer only one direction There may be an incorrect entry in the HOSTS file on the Profile XP systems Verify all Wi
257. or the tracks Removing audio tracks To remove audio tracks 1 Select Channel Configuration in the Configuration Manager window 2 Select the tab for the channel you want to configure 3 Select an audio Track pair under the Audio icon in the configuration tree Channel Configuration Profile1 Pu E E Video i IE Track 1 lt Q Audio i Track 3 amp 4 a Timecode SE Track 1 L Audio Ch 11 amp 12 J14 L Audio Ch 13 amp 14 J14 C Audio Ch 15 amp 16 J14 4 Click the Delete Track button in the configuration tree 5 Click Finish to save your changes 13 May 2005 Profile XP System Guide 193 T Chapter 6 Modifying a Channel Audio Settings Adding audio tracks To add audio tracks 1 Select Channel Configuration in the Configuration Manager window 2 Select the tab for the channel you want to configure 3 Select Audio icon in the configuration tree The Audio Channels list appears at the bottom of the Channel Configuration dialog box 4 Click the Add Track button The Add Track dialog box that appears Add Track x Add track of type C Video Audio Timecode Data 194 Profile XP System Guide 13 May 2005 13 May 2005 Adding audio tracks 5 Select Audio then click Add The new audio track pair icon appears in the configuration tree Channel Configuration Profile1 par v apavos a Viel Ey Video off Track 1 aij Tra
258. p a simple video network Ethernet on page 277 13 May 2005 Profile XP System Guide 263 d T Chapter 11 Setting up a Simple Network 264 Setting up a simple Windows NT network The Windows NT operating system on all Profile XP systems comes pre configured for connection to Ethernet using TCP IP protocol on either 10BaseT or 100BaseT networks The Profile XP Ethernet adapter is set up to auto sense the correct network speed so all you have to do is perform the following steps on each Profile XP system you ll be connecting to the network Steps to perform Set machine name and IP address on each Profile XP system e Power off and connect proper cabling e Power on the hub or switch and configure if necessary e Power on and test each Profile XP system on the network NOTE If you are integrating your Profile XP system into an existing local or wide area network you may require more steps than those listed here You must consult with the network administrator to obtain the information you need to configure the Profile XP for an existing network Set machine name and IP address on each Profile XP system Use these steps to set the machine name and IP address on each Profile XP system 1 Set up the machine name as follows a Log on as Administrator see Logging on Windows NT on page 44 b Open the Control Panel by clicking Start Settings Control Panel c Double click Network d On the Identification tab click the
259. p completes at which point the preview clip becomes the active clip Configuring AMP protocol control To configure a Profile XP channel for control by the AMP protocol do the following 1 Make sure that the channel you intend to control by the AMP protocol is not currently allocated to an application 2 Open C profile ampclient exe The AMP application opens 252 Profile XP System Guide 13 May 2005 13 May 2005 Configuring AMP protocol control 3 Click the Configure button or On the File menu click Configure The Configure dialog box opens Configure x Server DEVMAN_XP1 Browse Channel in 7 RS422 Port P1 M C Ethernet Cancel 4 On the Channel drop down list select the local Profile XP channel to be controlled by AMP protocol 5 Select either RS422 or Ethernet for the type of communication you are using for AMP protocol If you select RS422 also select the Port you are using 6 Click OK to save changes and close If the selected channel is currently allocated to another application a message informs you that it is not available After a pause indicated by Connecting Please wait in the status bar the selected channel is allocated to the AMP protocol The channel remains allocated as long as the AMP application remains open You can now control the Profile XP channel with the AMP protocol using a remote AMP application or device To control the channel with the
260. pacity selecting 130 136 158 189 selecting for browse video 156 VBI uncompressed 163 video compression 27 video standard changing 151 Profile XP System Guide 349 350 T Index video tracks adding 188 video common setup problems 289 viewing board location information 56 board status 56 channel summary dialog box 125 hardware settings summary 54 hardware version numbers 56 VITC common setup problems 292 deleting unwanted VITC signals 226 generating VITC on a video output 223 Profile XP System Guide generator setup 174 225 input status 168 reader setup 169 221 recording 217 volume name changing 85 X XLR216 audio breakout box 192 rear panel drawing 336 Z Zero timed mode 143 13 May 2005
261. pad or some other text editing application c winnt system32 drivers etc hosts 2 The text format is simple First type the Ethernet IP address then use the TAB key or Space bar to insert a few spaces Now type the machine name such as Profile1 On the next line type the IP address of the video network Ethernet interface of the same Profile XP followed by the machine name again only this time add the characters _le0 Here is an example 192 168 99 1 Profilel 192 168 101 1 Profilel leo 192 168 99 2 Profile2 192 168 101 2 Profile2 led 13 May 2005 Profile XP System Guide 279 T Chapter 11 Setting up a Simple Network The following shows the content of the default Windows NT hosts file with the new lines added All lines beginning with a are comments and can be ignored or deleted Copyright c 1993 1995 Microsoft Corp This is a sample HOSTS file used by Microsoft TCP IP for Windows NT This file contains the mappings of IP addresses to host names Each entry should be kept on an individual line The IP address should be placed in the first column followed by the corresponding host name The IP address and the host name should be separated by at least one space Additionally comments such as these may be inserted on individual lines or following the machine name denoted by a symbol For example 102 54 94 97 rhino acme com source server 38 25 63 10 x acme com x c
262. perating system Wait for auto logon or refer to Logging on Windows NT on page 44 94 Profile XP System Guide 13 May 2005 Checking RAID controller microcode version Checking RAID controller microcode version 13 May 2005 To determine RAID controller microcode version 1 Start GVG Disk Utility then select a controller node in the tree view NOTE Redundant controllers which share the same set of disks are displayed in GVG Disk Utility as a single controller and the microcode version is reported for the pair 2 The controller microcode version is displayed in the right hand pane To upgrade microcode refer to Loading RAID controller microcode All models on page 96 A GYG Disk Utility Jol x File View Tools Help fm PFREOO Property Value gt a Microcode Version P332 P332 Controller Settings Up to date with 1 0 Settings ieies Serial Number 2000002046217379 e UnBound Slot A lower IP Address 10 16 42 63 Peer Controller Status Active Peer Microcode Version P332 P332 Peer Controller Settings Up to date with 1 0 Settings Peer Serial Number 200000204621 7933 Peer Slot Blupper Peer IP Address 10 16 42 64 4 gt Ready NUM V Profile XP System Guide 95 GE T Chapter 3 Working with RAID Storage Using GVG Disk Utility Loading RAID controller microcode All models Ifyou upgrade your Profile system software you may be instructed in the software release note
263. play channels in VdrPanel you can configure them for RS 422 remote control The RS 422 protocols available in VdrPanel include e VDCP e Odetics Protocol e BVW Protocol Make RS 422 connections as described in the installation guide you received with your Profile XP Series system then use the information in this section to select the control protocol and communications port you want to use To setup VdrPanel for RS 422 remote control 1 Start VdrPanel using the desktop shortcut or by selecting Start Programs Profile Applications VdrPanel The VdrPanel window appears VdiPanel Panel D Ytr4 Panel Control iof x File VideoClip Controller Options Window Help 3 Panel A Vtrl Panel Control ioj xi 3 Panel B Vtr2 Panel Control 0 x Panel D Ytr4 Panel Control 2 In VdrPanel click in the panel you want to set up for remote control 246 Profile XP System Guide 13 May 2005 Setting up RS 422 remote control in VdrPanel 3 Choose Controller Configure to open the Channel Configuration dialog box then select a control protocol using the Protocol drop down list as shown Channel Configuration Panel D Fi few meo Panel Control Louth Automation Odetics Broadcast C N 4 Select a serial port using the port select drop down list as shown COM1 and COM2 are RS 232 ports on the Profile XP rear panel P1 through P8 are RS 422 ports on the I O Panel Channel Configuration Pan
264. plications e Audio Input used to adjust the analog audio input gain and monitor the status of AES EBU input signals e Audio Output used to adjust the analog audio output gain e Audio Routing used to set up audio sources and destinations for Profile XP audio channels See Chapter 6 Modifying a Channel Audio Settings for more information on modifying audio settings Profile Audio Reference Page 1 of 1 13 May 2005 Profile XP System Guide 51 T Chapter 2 Working with Configuration Manager License Configuration Choosing License Configuration in Configuration Manager opens the SabreTooth License Request wizard The SabreTooth License Manager is used to obtain install and manage licenses required to enable some of the optional features of your Profile XP Media Platform See Chapter 9 Managing Optional Licenses for more information on using Channel Configuration tu Profile1 oy x File View Help K File System Network Video Timing a Video Input License Configuration QA Channel Configuration 52 Profile XP System Guide 13 May 2005 Channel Configuration Channel Configuration Choosing Channel Configuration in Configuration Manager opens the Channel Configuration window Channel Configuration is used to modify or create channels that are used by Profile applications See Chapter 4 Adding or Removing Channels
265. power on and configure as required Power on and test each Profile XP system on the network Use Network Neighborhood to test network configuration and connectivity To test the network 1 Power on two Profile XP systems 2 Perform the following test on each Profile XP system a On the desktop click Network Neighborhood b Verify that all systems on the network are listed If the Workgroup icon appears you may have to double click the Workgroup icon Ss Network Neighborhood 0 x File Edt View Help Hae e xal E Network Neighborhood fel les Entire Network 5 object s 7 3 Power on the next Profile XP system and wait for it to initialize then repeat step 2 Continue adding one system at a time until all Profile XP systems have been tested You may have to refresh the Network Neighborhood window to see new systems displayed NOTE If you have a problem refer to Chapter 12 Solving Common Setup Problems on page 287 Now that you have tested the network connections for all Profile XP systems you are ready to use the Ethernet network If you are setting up an optional video network return to one of the following procedures Setting up a simple video network Fibre Channel on page 268 Setting up a simple video network Ethernet on page 277 13 May 2005 Profile XP System Guide 267 T Chapter 11 Setting up a Simple Network Setting up a simple video network Fibre Channel Th
266. put The VITC reader has two detection modes Automatic and Manual When you select automatic detection you can set the range of vertical interval lines scanned to find the VITC signal pair lines 10 to 21 by default Manual allows you to choose specific line numbers to detect the VITC signals Automatic detection is the default setting Use automatic detection unless there are two sets of VITC on the input signal To set up the Reference Input VITC reader 1 Select Video Timing in the Configuration Manager window The Video Timing dialog box appears 2 Click Next to navigate to Video Timing page 3 of 3 Video Timing Page 3 of 3 x System Reference Like other video inputs the What lines should be used to read VITC timecode reference signal may provide a VITC MV Detect the VITC signal automatically source Look for timecode between lines 10 afro ant g ______ a 1 For all video outputs What playback timing mode should be used Zero timed Playback matches intemal reference defaul em c E to E Playback matches E to E 16 line delay lt Back HE Finish Cancel El 13 May 2005 Profile XP System Guide 221 T Chapter 7 Modifying a Channel Timecode Settings 3 Select one of the VITC timecode options as follows Auto Detection Select the Detect the VITC signal automatically check box then enter the range of lines you want the system to search for VITC using the sliders
267. rails 00 ee eee eect ee teneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 334 Making Rack Slide Adjustments 000 eee ceeeeeeneeeeeneeeeeseeeeecaeeeeeaeeeeeeeeesenaeeeesaeeeeaaes 334 13 May 2005 Profile XP System Guide 7 A Contents Mounting Panels and Audio ChassSis cccccceseceeseneeeeeneeenneeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeseeesneeeeee 335 R ar Panel Direawit QS saree sci ace es cbse de cna ietaises ads A taads 336 Profile XP Media Platform Chassis aaa 336 XLR216 and BNC216 AES EBU Breakout Panels iiiii aa 336 PAC216 Profil6 Audio CHASSIS osei ienee a iade 337 VO Panel sienien aa a sast an s sat eDi 337 PFC500 Fibre Channel RAID Chassis 338 PFC500E Expansion Chassis 0 00 0 ccceccceeeseeeeeeneeseneeeseeeeeseneeeeaeeseneeeeseeeeseneeseneeees 338 PFR500 Fibre Channel RAID Chassis 339 PFR500E Expansion Chassis cccccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeseneeeeeesenaeeeseteeecneeeeeeeeees 339 PFR600 Fibre Channel RAID Chassis 340 PFR6OOE Expansion Chassis ccccccccceeeeeecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeesenaaeeeeeeeeenineeeeteeee 340 PFR700 Fibre Channel RAID Chassis 341 PFR700E Expansion Chassis cccccccccceeeeecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseneeeeeesenaeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeee 341 Index Profile XP System Guide 13 May 2005 Preface About this manual This Profile XP System Guide describes the features of the Profile XP Media Platform and presents step by step procedures for modifying system settings to meet the specif
268. re Fibre Channel links Resources The platform resources provide the infrastructure necessary to operate interconnect and integrate all the Application Subsystem Real Time Subsystem components The elements that comprise the Platform Resources are Multi slot PCI bus video amp audio crosspoint fabric power supply and system cooling Board level block diagram 13 May 2005 This section describes the Profile XP architecture in more detail using a board level block diagram From this discussion you ll gain an understanding of the basic signal flow in the Profile XP system Use this information when you are installing and setting up the Profile XP Media Platform Profile XP System Guide 35 Audio Interface Audio Interface T Chapter 1 Introducing the Profile XP Media Platform Real Time Subsystem Media Storage Subsystem Fibre Channel Disk Interface x x SDI V A Nant B 2in 20ut Video Local or Shared Storage Compression up to 8 channels total Crosspoint Examples MPEG 2 Encoder 2Ch SD MPEG 2 Applications Subsystem Decoder SVGA 2Ch SD Applications pute ae ii ft Add Encoder apis endows NN Ethernet Decoder Boards lt gt Crosson Reale Fabric y RS 422 Real Time Interface Processor Ethernet Video gt Network LTC amp GPI 1 0s Video Fibre Ch lt Embedded Video Genlock A Net EE
269. re embedded in the video signal To set up the VITC reader 1 Choose Video Input in the Configuration Manager window The Video Input dialog box appears 2 Click Next to navigate to Video Input page 2 of 3 Profile XP System Guide 169 T Chapter 5 Modifving a Channel Video Settings Video Input Page 2 of 3 SDI In J5 3 Select a video input from the list or click Select All to configure all video inputs at the same time 4 Select one of the VITC timecode options as follows Auto Detection Select the Detect the VITC signal automatically check box then enter the range of lines you want the system to search for VITC using the sliders Manual Detection Clear the Detect the VITC signal automatically check box then type or select the line numbers where the VITC pair can be found 5 Click Finish to saving your settings 170 Profile XP System Guide 13 May 2005 Erasing video input VBI information Erasing video input VBI information NOTE This information applies only to standard definition MPEG video You can remove unwanted VBI information that may be present on video inputs so that the information is not recorded or fed through the system in E to E You can select which VBI lines are erased by selecting the starting and ending line numbers between line 1 and line 32 Blanking occurs after VITC is read To blank lines in the vertical interval 1 Choose Video Input in the Conf
270. re specifications and requirements feature changes from the previous releases helpful system administrative information and any known problems e PFC500 Instruction Manual Contains information for servicing the PFC 500 Fibre Channel RAID Chassis including step by step procedures for replacing field replaceable units e PFR500 Instruction Manual Contains information for servicing the PFR 500 Fibre Channel RAID Chassis including step by step procedures for replacing field replaceable units e PFR600 Instruction Manual Contains information for servicing the PFR 600 Fibre Channel RAID Chassis including step by step procedures for replacing field replaceable units e PFR700 Instruction Manual Contains information for servicing the PFR 700 Fibre Channel RAID Chassis including step by step procedures for replacing field replaceable units e Open SAN Instruction Manual Contains instructions for installing storage that is shared by multiple Profile XP systems 10 Profile XP System Guide 13 May 2005 How this manual is organized How this manual is organized 13 May 2005 The Profile XP System Guide is organized around the tasks you ll be performing to customize the Profile XP settings to meet your system needs You can see this reflected in the chapter titles chosen for this manual The following identifies and describes the chapters included in this manual Chapter 1 Introducing the Profile XP Media Platform Introduces the Profile
271. rease the binding time to 10 hours or more NOTE If you want to use hot spare drives in your system refer to the procedures in Configuring hot spare drives on page 83 To create a video file system 1 Start Configuration Manager using the desktop shortcut or by selecting Start Programs Profile Applications Configuration Manager Profile XP System Guide 77 T Chapter 3 Working with RAID Storage Using GVG Disk Utility tu Profile1 oy x File View Help A GYG Disk Utility lolx File View Tools Help EE Micooode Version Primer DJ Eee ControllerO Correct 7 86 56 Controller0 B Bound LUNO 3 LUNI GB Disk5 Disk6 6 Disk Disk8 6 Disks 7 UnBound 6 Disk10 8 Disk11 Disk12 Disk13 Disk 4 Disk16 Disk17 Disk18 Disk19 Note For PFR700 only there is no Disk 15 2 In Configuration Manager click File System to start the GVG Disk Utility 3 If you are configuring a PFR500 or PFR600 storage system perform the following steps to set the Fibre Channel ID otherwise proceed to step 4 a Expand the tree view and right click the Controller0 icon under PFR 500 or PFR600 then select Set Fibre Channel ID in the context menu Set Fibre Channel ID x Controller A Fibre Channel ID jo Controller B Fibre Channel ID fi Cancel b In the Set F
272. red for analog audio and AES EBU digital audio as shown in the table If you are using only embedded audio no interface chassis is required NOTE Interface chassis must be connected to both Audio boards for operation with 32 channels of analog or AES EBU digital audio Audio Chassis Number of Number of Comments Models Analog AES EBU Audio Audio Channels Channels PAC216 16 16 The 16 audio channels on the Profile XP audio includes PACXLR board are divided into eight audio pairs You breakout chassis can assign the input for each audio pair to either the analog or digital inputs of the PAC216 For example the input to channels 1 amp 2 can be assigned to analog input 1 amp 2 or digital input 1 amp 2 on the PAC216 The audio output channels 1 to 16 are always assigned to both analog and digital outputs 1 to 16 on the PAC216 XLR216 none 16 Provides digital audio interface using XLR connectors BNC216 none 16 Provides digital audio interface using BNC connectors See Appendix C for detailed rear panel views of the audio interface chassis Profile XP System Guide 13 May 2005 Adding or removing audio tracks Adding or removing audio tracks All audio configuration is done using audio channel pairs Therefore adding or removing audio tracks in the Channel Configuration dialog box adds or removes a pair of audio tracks After adding audio tracks you must select an audio channel pair to use f
273. rise Search the table for the problem you are experiencing then try the corrective action Some problems have more than one corrective action 13 May 2005 Problem Possible Cause s Corrective Action Configuration Manager does not display the effect of your crosspoint selections as you make them Another application is using the channel or a channel which uses one or more of the same resources Terminate the use of the channel by the application After using import or export the two Profile XP systems do not have the same configuration There may be hardware differences between the Profile XP systems which include circuit board locations in the motherboard Compare the hardware configurations of the two systems Refer to Viewing board location information on page 56 When attempting to connect to a remote system the remote Profile XP system does not appear in the Remote Host List No network connection Refer to Common Ethernet network problems on page 297 Cannot connect to a remote machine after selecting it in the Remote Host List PortServer not running on the remote machine Start PortServer on remote Profile XP system Refer to Running PortServer to enable remote operation on page 251 A message appears that states that Configuration Manager is already running Configuration Manager already running or some one is running Configuration
274. rnet and Fibre Channel networks Testing the Ethernet name resolution and connectivity 13 May 2005 The Fibre Channel video network relies on Ethernet connectivity and name resolution This procedure uses the ping command which requests a response from the named Profile XP system If the remote system does not respond you 11 try ping using the IP address of the remote system If the system responds you have a name resolution problem If there is no response refer to the Profile XP Service Manual for help with solving problems with the Ethernet adapter or cabling To test the Ethernet network 1 Open the Windows NT command prompt by selecting Start Programs Command Prompt 2 Type ping then the Ethernet name of one of the Profile XP systems on the network then press Enter For Example ping Profile1 If this command returns Pinging Profile1 with 32 bytes of data Reply from 192 168 99 100 bytes 32 time lt 10ms TTL 128 Reply from 192 168 99 100 bytes 32 time lt 10ms TTL 128 Reply from 192 168 99 100 bytes 32 time lt 10ms TTL 128 Reply from 192 168 99 100 bytes 32 time lt 10ms TTL 128 You have successfully resolved the name Profile1 and you have Ethernet network connectivity If however the ping command returns Pinging Profile1 with 32 bytes of data Request timed out Request timed out Request timed out Request timed out There is a connectivity problem or the Ethernet IP address could not resolve properly Co
275. roblem Possible Cause s Corrective Action LTC No time code or incorrect time code The incorrect LTC input is assigned to the channel you re using Determine the LTC input assigned to the channel by referring to Recording or generating LTC on page 228 then modify if needed LTC No time code or incorrect time code The LTC output you re monitoring is not assigned to the channel Determine the LTC output assigned to the channel by referring to Recording or generating LTC on page 228 then verify cable connections Timecode Burn in Video Monitor timecode burn in doesn t change The Video Monitor output is not selected as the timecode output for the channel Make sure the video monitor you are connected to is selected as a timecode output for the channel Refer to Select a timecode source for timecode burn in on page 229 Profile XP System Guide 293 a T Chapter 12 Solving Common Setup Problems 294 Storage system problems IMPORTANT If your Profile XP Media Platform is part of an Open SAN refer to the Open SAN Instruction Manual for information about troubleshooting storage system problems This troubleshooting aid provides corrective action for some common storage system problems Search the table for the problem you are experiencing then try the corrective action Some problems have more than one corrective action Problem Possible Caus
276. rofile XP System Guide 13 May 2005 13 May 2005 Front panel controls and indicators The following describes the storage devices in a Profile XP system with the redundant system disk option Primary System Drive contains Windows NT operating system and Profile XP software and applications Mirror System Disk mirrors primary system disk and provides automatic fail over in the event the primary system disk fails Drive Mirroring Controller and Indicator Panel The Indicator Panel status LEDs indicate the operating mode of the mirroring system as follows Green Drives are in Mirror mode Red Drives in Single mode Orange Drive activity The Buzzer Off switch can be used to silence the buzzer which sounds under the following conditions Short beep during power on indicates successful boot up Second beep indicates the mirroring system is running in single mode Continuous or intermittent beep to indicate a drive failure O CD ROM Drive for maintaining the Windows NT operating system and performing Profile XP system software upgrades 1 44MB Floppy Disk Drive Primary System Mirrored System Disk Drive Disk Drive
277. rofile XP system 86 Profile XP System Guide 13 May 2005 Expanding storage Expanding storage You can expand storage by installing additional disk modules in empty disk slots or by connecting additional storage chassis To use the additional storage you must bind unbound LUNs and create a new video file system which includes the new disk modules AN CAUTION Back up all media on existing drives before creating a new video file system Creating a new video file system destroys all media files and other data on the disk modules Ifyou are adding additional storage chassis refer to the Installation Guide for your Profile XP Media Platform to make hardware connections then return to this procedure to configure the storage system To create a video file system on expanded storage 1 Start Configuration Manager using the desktop shortcut or by selecting Start Programs Profile Applications Configuration Manager ts Prof le1 x File View Help A GYG Disk Utility Jol x File View Tools Help Centrales Setinge Microcode Version mes ID Poari ControllerO Correct 7 86 56 lt Video Codec Ce Video Monitor gt 2 P P UnBound A ey Audio Output 6 Disk15 g 2 Audio Routing 8 Disk16 Diskt7 4 License Configuration Diskt8 Channel Configuration 8 Disk19 2 In Configuration Manager click File
278. rowse Video VBI Encoding Advanced Crosspoints Cancel Help Click the tab for the channel you want to modify Click the Video icon then click the video track you want to modify Click the Crosspoints button then select the video input and video outputs you want to use For information on why resources appear dimmed red or in use refer to Why resources appear dimmed red or in use on page 122 Click Finish to save your changes and close the Channel Configuration dialog box NOTE If the channel is currently in use by an application it must be reselected within the application before your changes will take effect Refer to the user manual for the Profile application you are using Profile XP System Guide 155 T Chapter 5 Modifying a Channel Video Settings Selecting video quality for a channel NOTE Quality selections are not applicable to DVCPRO channels You can manage storage capacity and video quality by adjusting the channel MPEG 2 compression settings If you have enabled browse video for the channel you can adjust the MPEG 1 settings in a similar manner Using the Video Quality and Browse Video Quality drop down lists you can change compression settings by selecting one of the video quality presets provided shown in the table or you can define and select a custom preset Selecting a preset determines the data rate chrominance sampling method and group of pictures GoP structur
279. rt all Profile applications currently using the system 4 Some playout timing adjustment may be required to satisfy downstream timing requirements in your system If so adjust playout timing as follows a Select Video Timing in the Configuration Manager window The Video Timing dialog box appears b Click Next to navigate to Video Timing page 3 of 5 NOTE The video output timing page can show HD outputs SD outputs or both depending on the system reference and video standard selected 144 Profile XP System Guide 13 May 2005 Adjusting playout timing to match zero time Video Timing Page 3 of 5 SDI OutaJ5 SDI OutBJ5 SDI OutAJ HD SDI OutaJ9 HD SDI Out J11 c Select a video output from the Video Output Timing list or click Select All to adjust all outputs at the same time d Use the Output Timing Offset controls to adjust playout timing to meet your timing requirements e Repeat step c and step d for the remaining video outputs if required then select Finish 13 May 2005 Profile XP System Guide 145 T Chapter 5 Modifying a Channel Video Settings Adjusting playout timing to match E to E timing In E to E Timed Output mode all playout timing is delayed from the system reference by 16 lines to match the E to E delay through the system This ensures clean switching between video inputs and decoders outputs You can use the Output Timing Offset adjustment provided for each video output to m
280. ruption you must start rebuild again manually Failed rebuilds do not resume automatically e Ifyou manually disable a disk before removing it see Disabling a PFR 600 disk module for removal on page 112 you must manually start rebuild after the disk module is replaced To start disk rebuild manually 1 In GVG Disk Utility right click the LUN icon for the affected LUN then select Advanced Start Rebuild 2 To check rebuild status do one of the following Select the replacement disk icon in GVG Disk Utility then view the disk status in the right hand pane You may need to refresh the GVG Disk Utility display On completion the drive status changes from Rebuilding to Online 108 Profile XP System Guide 13 May 2005 Performing PF R600 maintenance tasks e Open the Progress dialog box by selecting View Progress Report Starting and Stopping disk initialization Initializing the disk array aligns the physical disk drive heads and where applicable sets the striping and parity across the disk drives in a newly created logical unit It takes a very long time to complete and is rarely needed Initialize disk modules only when instructed to do so by Grass Valley product support Checking and restoring default PFR600 RAID Controller settings 13 May 2005 RAID Controller settings are checked every time the GVG Disk Utility is started When the Disk Utility starts you may receive a warning message stating that current
281. s hours Afterhours phone support is available for warranty and contract customers United States 800 547 8949 Toll Free France 33 1 34 20 77 77 Latin America 800 547 8949 Toll Free Germany 49 6155 870 606 Eastern Europe 49 6155 870 606 Greece 33 1 34 20 77 77 Southern Europe 33 1 34 20 77 77 Hong Kong 852 2531 3058 Middle East 33 1 34 20 77 77 Italy 39 06 8720351 Australia 6139721 3737 Netherlands 31 35 6238421 Belgium 32 2 3349031 Poland 49 6155 870 606 Brazil 55 11 5509 3440 Russia 49 6155 870 606 Canada 800 547 8949 Toll Free Singapore 656379 1390 China 86 106615 9450 Spain 34915120350 Denmark 45 45968800 Sweden 46 87680705 Dubai 9714299 64 40 Switzerland 41 1 487 80 02 Finland 35 9 68284600 UK 44 870 903 2022 Authorized Support Representative A local authorized support representative may be available in your country To locate the support representative for your country visit the product support Web page on the Grass Valley Web site Profile Users Group You can connect with other Profile XP Media Platform users to ask questions or share advice tips and hints Send e mail to profile users thomson net to join the community and benefit from the experience of others 13 May 2005 Profile XP System Guide 13 da Preface 14 Profile XP System Guide 13 May 2005 Safety Summaries General Safety Summary Review the following safety precautions to avoid injury and prevent dam
282. s unusable configuration items are ignored Also the settings for video inputs outputs are assigned beginning with the video board closest to slot 1 Profile XP System Guide 59 60 T Chapter 2 Working with Configuration Manager Importing a configuration To import a configuration 1 In Configuration Manager choose File Import 4 Profile File Import Profile XP System Guide 13 May 2005 Importing a configuration 2 In the Import Configuration dialog box select the Profile XP system from which you want to import the configuration Configuration Manager Import Configuration Import From PROFILE2 PROFILES PROFILE 4 PROFILES PROFILE6 Components Hardware and Channel Configuration 7 Cancel Hardware and Channel Configuration Hardware Configuration Only Channel Configuration Onl 3 In the Components drop down list select whether you want to import hardware or channel configuration or both then click the Import button The remote configuration is imported to the local Profile XP system 13 May 2005 Profile XP System Guide 61 62 T Chapter 2 Working with Configuration Manager Remote configuration You can remotely configure Profile XP systems connected to the Ethernet network with Configuration Manager running on a Profile XP or on a standard Windows NT workstation The Windows NT workstation must have Profile XP software and Windows NT version 4 0 or later installed Re
283. s MPEG 1 proxy video that is recorded along with the track 13 May 2005 Profile XP System Guide 119 120 Chapter 4 Adding or Removing Channels Displaying the Channel Configuration dialog box To display the Channel Configuration dialog box In the Configuration Manager window choose Channel Configuration The Channel Configuration dialog box appears y Profile1 yx File View Help Channel Configuration Profile1 a vet vez amp VideoOnly amp AudioOny Name Type Add Channel in MPEG Player Recorder Remove Channel vtri B Video 4 HI Track 1 Add Track Audio I9 Timecode Delete Track Summary Configuration for Video Track 1 P Encoder Decoder Video Quality n C Channel Configuation BEG Rect MPEG Play M Medium 15 Mb s C Feest ka Video Input Video Output s lt None gt X SDI Out J5 SDI DutB J5 Browse Video VBI Encoding Advanced Crosspoints Profile XP System Guide 13 May 2005 Working with channels Working with channels Listed here are a few things to consider when working with channels and the Channel Configuration dialog box e Clicking the Finish button saves the changes you ve made to the channels and closes the Configuration Manager dialog box Ifyou make changes to a channel while it is in use by an application you must reacquire the channel in the appli
284. s are enabled and the channel can be controlled by the local AMP application OR by a remote AMP application or device Setting Options 1 In the local control mode select Options The Options dialog box opens Options x Timecode mode C Internal Generator C viTC LTC Current working folder default vw E to E C E Eon F E Eo Cancel 2 Specify the current working folder This is the folder to which clips are recorded and from which clips are loaded 3 Select the Timecode mode and the E to E mode 4 Click OK to save settings and close 13 May 2005 Profile XP System Guide 255 T Chapter 10 Controlling the Profile XP Remotely Loading a clip 1 Open the Load dialog using one of the following e Select the Load button e Select the File menu then choose Load The Load dialog box opens Look in default PT Clip name Cancel 6 Enter a clip name or select a clip in the list 7 Click OK The clip is loaded Playing a clip 1 Click the Active Preview button to put the Active button in front 2 Load a clip 3 Click the Play transport control button Recording a clip 1 Click the Record transport control button A new clip with a default name is created 2 When the desired material has been recorded click the Stop transport control button If a previously recorded clip is loaded when record is clicked it is ejected and a new clip with a
285. s likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense Changes or modifications not expressly approved by Thomson Broadcast and Media Solutions Inc can affect emission compliance and could void the user s authority to operate this equipment This digital apparatus does not exceed the Class A limits for radio noise emissions from digital apparatus set out in the Radio Interference Regulations of the Canadian Department of Communications Le pr sent appareil num rique n met pas de bruits radio lectriques d passant les limites applicables aux appareils num riques de la classe A pr scrites dans le R glement sur le brouillage radio lectrique dict par le minist re des Communications du Canada Canadian approval includes the AC adapters appropriate for use in the North America power network All other AC adapters supplied are approved for the country of use For products that comply with Class A In a domestic environment this product may cause radio interference in which case the user may be required to take adequate measures Profile XP System Guide 17 Safety Summaries Laser Compliance Laser Safety The device used in this product is a Class 1 certified laser product Operating Requirements this product outside specifications or altering its original design may result in hazardous radiation exposure and may be considered an act of modifying or n
286. s on any machines you can open VdrPanel and create some See Profile XP User Manual for VdrPanel information d Click and drag a clip to a bin on another machine Dragging a clip to a different machine always results in a copy the original clip is not deleted e Repeat steps a through d until you have tested the network to your satisfaction NOTE You can select the transfer monitor icon on the toolbar to open the transfer monitor and watch the progress of the network transfer Now that you have tested the network connections for all Profile XP systems you are ready to use the video network 276 Profile XP System Guide 13 May 2005 Setting up a simple video network Ethernet Setting up a simple video network Ethernet The Ethernet video network option provides a 10 100BaseT Ethernet interface for transfer of video clips among devices connected to the network Network devices can include other Profile XP systems near on line video servers and video archive systems to name a few Use the procedures in this section to set up your Profile XP systems on a Ethernet video network Here is a list of the steps you will perform Set up the Windows NT Ethernet network e Configure the video network on each Profile XP Ethernet e Manually Edit the hosts file on each Profile XP Power off and connect proper Ethernet cabling e Power on the hub or switch and configure if necessary Test the Ethernet video network using Media Mana
287. s to upgrade the RAID Controller microcode on all the RAID chassis This allows you to take advantage of the RAID enhancements and benefit from improved reliability To upgrade RAID Controller microcode 1 In the GVG Disk Utility do one of the following To upgrade a single RAID controller chassis right click a controller in the tree view then select Advanced Load Microcode Redundant controllers that share the same set of disks are automatically selected and upgraded as a pair To upgrade all RAID controllers chassis right click the RAID model node in the tree view such as the PFC500 or PFR600 icon then select Load Microcode Redundant controllers that share the same set of disks are upgraded as a pair The Open dialog box appears 2 In the Open dialog box locate the c profile microcode directory then select the latest controller microcode file for your controller Refer to the following table RAID Model Microcode File Types PFC500 bin PFR500 ima PFR600 fs2200 lt versiont gt bin RAID controller microcode app lt version gt bin LBB microcode PFR700 bin a PFR600 RAID controller microcode upgrades may include two firmware files RAID controller microcode and LBB microcode See step 4 3 Click Open 4 Ifyou are upgrading a model PFR 600 RAID controller continue with the following steps for all other models skip to step 5 a The Open dialog box is displayed again this
288. ses the ping command which requests a response from the named Profile XP system If the remote system does not respond you ll try ping using the IP address of the remote system If the system responds you have a name resolution problem If there is no response refer to the Profile XP Service Manual for help with solving problems with the Windows NT Ethernet adapter or cabling To test the Windows NT Ethernet network 1 Open the Windows NT command prompt by selecting Start Programs Command Prompt 2 Type ping then the Windows NT Ethernet name of one of the Profile XP systems on the network then press Enter For Example ping Profile1 If this command returns Pinging Profile1 with 32 bytes of data Reply from 192 168 99 100 bytes 32 time lt 10ms TTL 128 Reply from 192 168 99 100 bytes 32 time lt 10ms TTL 128 Reply from 192 168 99 100 bytes 32 time lt 10ms TTL 128 Reply from 192 168 99 100 bytes 32 time lt 10ms TTL 128 You have successfully resolved the name Profile1 and you have Windows NT Ethernet network connectivity If however the ping command returns Pinging Profile1 with 32 bytes of data Request timed out Request timed out Request timed out Request timed out There is a connectivity problem or the Windows NT Ethernet IP address could not resolve properly Continue with step 3 304 Profile XP System Guide 13 May 2005 13 May 2005 Testing the Ethernet Video network 3 Type ping then this time
289. stored in the file you named You may want to copy your file to floppy disk and store it in a safe place NOTE You can quickly duplicate a configuration on two Profile XP systems by placing a copy of the saved configuration files on the other machine and then using the File menu Open command See Opening saved configuration files on page 58 Profile XP System Guide 57 T Chapter 2 Working with Configuration Manager Opening saved configuration files You can restore system hardware settings and channels using configuration files you saved earlier You can choose to restore the channels and hardware settings or just the hardware settings by selecting the file type to open NOTE When a configuration file is opened the current configuration is lost Be sure to use the Save a copy command in the File menu if you want to save the current system configuration To open a saved configuration 1 In Configuration Manager select File Open The Open dialog box appears 2 Choose the file type you want to open either cdf or cfg using the File of type drop down list Opening a cdf file changes the channel configuration settings and keeps the existing hardware settings Opening a cfg file changes both channel and hardware settings Open 2 x Lookin E profile q E a E configs C logs diag 3 evntsch cfg drivers extras flash lib File name config cfg Files of type Hardware and Chann
290. t You can connect your Profile XP systems together using an Ethernet hub or switch An Ethernet hub is used in most simple Ethernet networks The Profile XP system provides a 10 100BaseT Ethernet interface and uses a standard RJ 45 connector Make sure the hub or switch you are using provides RJ 45 connectors Ethernet Hub Fibre Channel or Switch Switch oo saisi lii o Fibre Channel network layout Fibre Channel connections are provided by a Fibre Channel switch Fibre Channel hubs are not supported A Fibre Channel switch provides a full 1Gbs connection between devices on the network Using a switch enables multicasting Multicasting allows transfers of the same file from one to multiple max of 8 Profile XP systems 13 May 2005 Profile XP System Guide 259 T Chapter 11 Setting up a Simple Network Choosing machine names and IP addresses for your Fibre Channel network The default machine name for each Profile XP system is the unit serial number You may want to change the name to something more meaningful such as Profile1 or Profile2 The video network option also requires you to set up two IP addresses for each Profile XP unit one for the Ethernet interface and the other for the Fibre Channel interface A common mistake is to choose IP addresses for the Fibre Channel and Ethernet interfaces using the same network ID This is wrong the IP addresses for each network must be unique Here is an example of IP address
291. tain the information you need to set up each Profile XP on the network For new networks All network devices are connected to a hub or switch and are running Windows NT Workstation If you are installing a server for example Windows NT Server you must consult the vendor documentation Whatever your networking need or level of expertise Grass Valley can help you when you are ready to expand your network More information about networking can be obtained from Grass Valley your consultant advisor and commercially available books Profile XP systems with both video network options installed The Profile XP supports installation of both the Fibre Channel and Ethernet video network options This allows greater flexibility in how you move media within your system You may choose to use Fibre Channel connectivity for local high speed transfers while Ethernet provides transfer capability over commercially available networks When both Fibre Channel and Ethernet video network connections exist between two Profile XP systems the system software will always use the Fibre Channel network to perform the transfer request If you are setting up a Profile XP system with both network options installed it is recommended you install and test one network then set up and test the other Refer to either of the following procedures when you are ready to get started e Setting up a simple video network Fibre Channel on page 268 e Setting u
292. tem Guide 269 T Chapter 11 Setting up a Simple Network 270 Manually Edit the hosts file on each Profile XP NOTE Perform this step if you disabled Autohost file administration earlier The hosts file is used by the video network to determine the Ethernet and Fibre Channel IP address of devices on the network when only a the device name is given The steps that follow describe how to edit the hosts file located at c winnt system32 drivers etc hosts If you include the names and addresses of all the devices on the network then you can copy the same file onto all the other Profile XP systems instead of editing the hosts file on each Profile XP system NOTE An alternative to manually editing the hosts file is to use the Autohosts file administration feature discussed earlier To edit the hosts file manually 1 Open the following file using Notepad or some other text editing application c winnt system32 drivers etc hosts 2 The text format is simple First type the Ethernet IP address then use the TAB key or Space bar to insert a few spaces Now type the machine name such as Profile1 On the next line type the IP address of the Fibre Channel interface of the same Profile XP followed by the machine name again only this time add the characters fc0 Here is an example 192 168 99 1 Profilel 192 168 100 1 Profilel fc0 192 168 99 2 Profile2 192 168 100 2 Profile2 _ fc0 Profile XP System Guide 13 May 2005 13 May
293. tem at a time until all systems are on and tested NOTE If you encounter a problem during any portion of this test procedure refer to Chapter 12 Solving Common Setup Problems on page 287 To test the video network 1 Power on two Profile XP systems 2 Perform the following test on each Profile XP system a Double click on the Port Server icon This starts the video network communication tool It must always be running on any machine where you are using video network If you want you can place Port Server in StartUp folder and set it to run minimized Make sure it s running on the other Profile machine too 282 Profile XP System Guide 13 May 2005 Test the Ethernet video network using Media Manager b Start Media Manager by double clicking the shortcut on the desktop or by choosing Start Programs Profile Applications Media Manager The Media Manager window appears Untitled Media Manager File Edit View Tools Help Por of ef xl Contents of Proifle1 EXT detault Profile Network Profile Local EXT ig default QA default_back GY Recycled Modified 00 00 05 20 MPEG 03 02 00 07 47 AM 00 00 05 15 MPEG 03 02 00 05 15 PM NOTE You will not automatically see the other machine on the network For example if you are running Media Manager on Profile1 you will only see Profile1 c Choose File Add Remove Machine The Add Remove Machine dialog box
294. terface and choose the network options you want to use To configure the Fibre Channel network settings 1 Open Configuration Manager using the desktop shortcut or by choosing Start Programs Profile Applications Configuration Manager 2 Choose Network in the Configuration Manager window The Network dialog box appears Network Page 1 of 1 x Video Network Setup Ask your network administrator to assign an IP address for your Fibre Channel Interface and enter it below This Fibre Chanel IP address should be different from any other Ethernet IP address assigned to this machine IP Address 192 168 100 1 Subnet mask 255 255 255 System Gateway 0 0 What kind of extra error detection should be used None transmit as fast as possible default Use checksums and re transmit on error Finish Cancel ea 3 Enter the IP address and Subnet mask for the Fibre Channel interface NOTE Be sure to read all the information about choosing IP addresses for the Fibre Channel video network option on page 260 Choosing machine names and IP addresses for your Fibre Channel network 4 Enter the IP address for the system gateway if used 5 Select the error detection options you want to use Enabling extra error detection insures data transfer without corruption Disabling extra error detection speeds up network transfers 6 Click Finish to save your settings 13 May 2005 Profile XP Sys
295. the Profile XP Media Platform chroma sampling or 4 15 Mb s at 4 2 0 chroma sampling With the 50 Mb s software option installed each codec can be configured for DVCPRO 50 operation MPEG D10 operation at 30 40 or 50 Mb s or MPEG operation up to 50 Mb s When a codec is reconfigured the media platform must be restarted to put the change into effect However any codec can play all formats of SD clip seamlessly back to back without any configuration changes For record mode video is routed from the Video I O boards over the video transport fabric to the Video Processor board Compressed data is moved over the PCI bus to the Media Storage Subsystem For play mode compressed data is routed from the Media Storage Subsystem over PCI bus to the Video Processor board where the data is processed Full bandwidth video is routed from the Video Processor board over the video transport fabric to the Video I O boards Video Network Adapter Optional The Video Network Adapter is a 1 Gb s Fibre Channel board or 100BaseT Ethernet board for video network connections Both provide faster than real time transfers of video data Media Storage Subsystem The Media Storage Subsystem includes the following components Fibre Channel Disk Board This is a dual port Fibre Channel Disk board for connecting the Profile XP system to the external Fibre Channel RAID storage system in either a local or centralized storage configuration In local storage conf
296. the display 5 Remove and replace the disabled RAID controller module Refer to procedures in the PFR 700 Instruction Manual 6 On inserting the replacement RAID controller it initializes and is automatically enabled to become the backup RAID controller This concludes the Disabling a PFR 700 RAID controller for removal procedure NOTE If you accidentally disable the wrong controller you can enable it again by removing it and then replacing it in the chassis Disabling a PFR700 disk module for removal 13 May 2005 In the event that one of the PFR 700 disk modules is operational but begins to report faults through various log files and status indicators you can choose to disable the disk module and remove it Disabling the disk module and removing it in this way avoids momentary interruptions in signal output that can occur if the disk fails The disabled state is persistent and the disk remains disabled even if the RAID chassis is restarted After replacing the disabled disk module the disk rebuild process starts automatically which also enables the disk module To disable a PFR 700 disk module for removal 1 Start GVG Disk Utility 2 Expand the tree view to display bound disks 3 Right click the disk module icon then select Advanced Disable Drive Profile XP System Guide 115 GE T Chapter 3 Working with RAID Storage Using GVG Disk Utility NOTE Disks modules may not be visible in the tree view if they are
297. these addresses if you want but if you are connecting either Ethernet interface to an existing network check with your system administrator for the correct names and IP addresses to use Use the table below to enter information you ll need when you configure your networks Machine Name Windows NT Ethernet Video Network Ethernet Interface IP Address Interface IP Address Refer to the procedures in Setting up a simple video network Ethernet on page 277 when you to set up the Ethernet video network 262 Profile XP System Guide 13 May 2005 Simple Networks Simple Networks Both the Windows NT network and the Profile video network can accommodate large local area networks and wide area networks which can require advanced computer systems expertise to design install and maintain Setting up these kinds of networks is beyond the scope of this chapter However in many applications a simple network is all that s needed For example you may want a video network connection between the main and backup Profile XP systems or perhaps you need a simple ethernet connection between a Profile XP system and a PC to run Profile applications remotely This chapter was designed with these applications in mind Procedures in this chapter make these assumptions e For existing networks If you are connecting to an existing local or wide area network you will consult with the network administrator to ob
298. time select the latest LBB microcode file app lt version gt bin then click Open b Click OK to confirm download c Click OK to start the download 5 The Progress Report window appears showing the microcode upgrade task and the percentage completion NOTE Progress remains at 0 until completed 96 Profile XP System Guide 13 May 2005 13 May 2005 Loading RAID controller microcode All models Progress Report Current Progress All Done Commands List Load Microcode Completed Successfully Power cycle 100 10 10 43 8 2 01 6 On 100 completion perform one of the following steps If PFR600 or PFR700 chassis with redundant controllers The RAID storage is ready for operation Proceed to step 7 All other models Power cycle the RAID controller chassis then restart the Profile XP Media Platform Refer to System reboot procedure on page 94 NOTE If your RAID chassis is part of an Open SAN refer to the instructions in the Open SAN Instruction Manual for power off and power on procedures 7 Itis recommended that you create labeling for the controller s rear panel indicating the current microcode version This completes the RAID controller firmware upgrade Profile XP System Guide 97 T Chapter 3 Working with RAID Storage Using GVG Disk Utility Identifying disk modules prior to removal The Disk Utility Identify feature allows you to flash the disk access LEDs so that you c
299. timecode burn in 1080 and 720p line rates for HD 50 59 94 and 60 fps accepts house black and tri level sync reference DVCAM video compression for SD DVCPRO 25 video compression for SD DVCPRO 50 video compression with 50 Mb s option for SD MPEG 2 4 2 0 Main Level from 4 to 15 Mb s long GoP MPEG 2 4 2 2 Main Level from 4 25 Mb s long GoP or up to 50 Mb s with 50 Mb s option for SD MPEG D10 I frame at 30 40 or 50 Mb s CBG with 50 Mb s option for SD Back to back playout of all SD formats on any SD codec Up conversion of SD MPEG 2 4 2 0 clips with aspect ratio configuration Down conversion of HD clips with aspect ratio configuration 13 May 2005 Profile XP System Guide 25 26 Chapter 1 Introducing the Profile XP Media Platform About channels and factory default configuration Profile applications use channels to control disk recording and playback A channel defines a grouping of video audio and timecode resources and is identified by a unique name Profile XP software supports three channel types Recorder channel Player channel or Player Recorder channel Your Profile XP system is shipped with default Recorder Player or Recorder Player channels These default channels are named Vtrl Vtr2 Vtr3 and so on The following table describes the video and audio connections you II make for the channel types The Installation Guide contains specifics about the type and number of default channels in your Profile XP model
300. timecode source To select internal generators as the source for timecode 1 Select Channel Configuration in the Configuration Manager window 2 Select the tab for the channel you want to configure 3 Select a timecode Track under the Timecode icon l in the configuration tree then click the Crosspoints button The Timecode Input and Output check boxes appear at the bottom of the Channel Configuration dialog box Channel Configuration P S 3000 x a vert S vez By ves amp vea Name Type Add Channel ia HD SD MPEG Player Remove Channel 4 Add Track a Audio Q Track1 2 Delete Track E ly Timecode bi ij Data Summary Configuration for Timecode Track 1 Timecode Input Timecode Outputs lt None gt TC Generator Any Retln VITC In 13 SDI VITCIndJ5 O SDI VITC nBJ5 L LTC Out4J3 HD ANC VITC In4J7 RJ SDI VITC OutaJ5 HD ANC VITC n4J9 LTC ln1 J3 LTC ln2J3 LTC In3 J3 LTC In4 J3 HD ANC LTC In J7 HD 4NC LTC In J9 TE Generator LUT TTL LR Crosspoints Finish Cancel Help Fish 4 Select the TC Generator check box under Timecode Input list 5 Proceed to Setting up an internal timecode generator on page 215 to set up the timecode generator or click Finish to save your settings and close the Channel Configuration dialog box 212 Profile XP System Guide 13 May 2005 Using the same TC generator for multiple channels Using the same TC genera
301. ting freeze or black for video output signal lOSS 0 0 0 is 179 Erasing the horizontal blanking interval iiaidd as 180 Renaming video I Os in crosspoint lists adia aa 181 Renaming the video inputs siirinsesi onead aniisi 181 Renaming the video outputs eee esere 182 Configuring the video monitor output 2 ass eae 183 Enabling or disabling dither on the Video Monitor output 183 Enabling or disabling NTSC pedestal ccceceeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeseneneeeeees 184 Configuring Text Overlay on the Video Monitor OUtpUt eee as 185 Enabling Video Monitor timecode burn in adaa aaa 186 Using multiple video tracks for one channel 188 Modifying a Channel Audio Settings Ao t Profile XP AUGIO rorirori Ge testticnsquscetewncitanadtesdeuieraddxcteniastamdaecseigieraste 191 Determining the number of audio channels available ec eeseeeeeeeeeseeeeeseeeeenes 191 Determining the audio formats available iia desa 192 Adding or removing audio traCKkS eee sia 193 REMOVING audio tracks eee eee ease nenna 193 Addin a dio ifack sssssis sserau tenkas tesgatukiss u tec t sisa sd bist akesis gta k sis segti 194 Selecting audio channels for an audio trACK eee a 196 Changing the audio I O format iidiidd aaa 197 Select audio input form t sss ss as s t ss sv ts es s d s s s s t s 197 Select audio output format ee ae ease
302. tion dialog box Video Output s in use bo lt None gt w lt the resource is in bea SDI E in use use by an application SDI OutB J5 in use O SDI ous LJ SDI DutB J7 O You can use Tool Tips to find out which application is using the resource that is marked in use See Using Tool Tips to manage resources on page 123 NOTE You can select a resource marked in use but you won t see the crosspoint change because the resource is in use by an application 122 Profile XP System Guide 13 May 2005 Using Tool Tips to manage resources Using Tool Tips to manage resources The Channel Configuration dialog box uses Tool Tips to provide additional information about how a resource is used When you hold the cursor for a short period of time over a resource displayed as gray red or in use a Tool Tip will appear showing status of the resource Ifthe resource is assigned to another channel dimmed or red the Tool Tip displays the channel name Video Output s L lt None gt DX SDI OutaJ5 SDI 01NB6 J5 LJ SDI 04 J7 LJ SDI Outfytr2 LJ Ifthe current channel has selected a resource that is in use the Tool Tip displays the name of the application using the resource and the name of the machine running the application Video Output s 5 J5 in use UTimeDelay on NT1007 ULIG 13 May 2005 Profile XP System Guide 123 T Chapter 4 Adding or Removing Chann
303. to start the License Request Wizard NOTE The Licensing page displays only those software options that may be installed on your current hardware To view all available options including those that require hardware upgrades select Show Non Applicable Licenses 238 Profile XP System Guide 13 May 2005 Requesting a license License Request Wizard Welcome A A Welcome to the License Request Wizard The License Request Wizard will run through the information needed by Thomson to create a license for this product When complete the wizard will generate a block of text that should be provided to Thomson Once Thomson has received this license request we will email you with a confirmation of receipt and pricing information If you agree to purchase the license you should respond with an email containing the purchase order and a copy of the confirmation receipt 3 Read the on screen instructions then click Next to proceed to the customer information screen License Request Wizard CG u sto m e r Enter the details of you or the person that will be using the product Name Your Name Email Address Your Name yourcompany com Company Your Company Inc 1234 Any Street Address nytown OR Country United States of America Phone a 23 456 7890 4 Enter all of the information requested on this page You must provide a valid email address to receive your license file Click Next to conti
304. to Video Input page 3 of 3 Video Input Page 3 of 3 x Input ptions How should the system time this video input Auto time using the internal frame syne default What should the system do if the input signal is lost Show black default C Freeze frame lt Back EYES Cancel i 3 Select a video input from the list or click Select All to configure all video inputs at the same time 4 Under What should the system do if the input signal is lost choose the option you want to use 5 Choose Finish to saving your settings Profile XP System Guide 173 T Chapter 5 Modifying a Channel Video Settings Modifying video output settings Use Configuration Manager to change video output settings Setup the VITC generator e Erase unwanted lines in the vertical blanking interval e Choose the lines that will contain Ancillary Data e Erase the horizontal blanking interval e Select whether the video output will freeze or display black when the video output is lost Setting up the VITC generator NOTE The VITC Blanking Setup page is only available when the system reference is Reference Black and the system has one or more SD output boards Even when present in the system HD outputs do not appear on this page to prevent confusion All video outputs include VITC generators You can select the line number used to insert the VITC signals To set up the VITC generator 1 Choose Video Output i
305. to save your settings 198 Profile XP System Guide 13 May 2005 Select audio output format Select audio output format 13 May 2005 There are no output routing selections to make if you are using Analog or AES EBU audio These formats are selected automatically when the system sees the audio interface attached If you are using embedded audio you must make embedded audio selections as follows To select embedded audio output selections 1 Click Audio Routing in the Configuration Manager window The Audio Routing dialog box appears 2 Click Next to navigate to Page 2 of the Audio Routing dialog box as shown AudioRouting Page 2 of 3 M M E M M T v M m 5 M E M T M M M d M M 3 Select the check box in the Embedded column for all Profile XP audio channels that require embedded audio Profile XP System Guide 199 T Chapter 6 Modifying a Channel Audio Settings 7 Click the left hand drop down list arrow in the Embedded column for the channel pair you want to configure and select a video output as shown NOTE With one audio board only the first 4 video outputs are selectable since embedded audio can only be allocated by groups of 4 channels With two audio boards up to 8 video outputs are selectable In some cases two audio boards and either three 2In 2Out boards or one 2In 2Out and one 4Out board you may have to select embedded audio outputs first then select the audio inputs for each audio
306. to use it for all subseguent channels you configure Channel Configuration Profile1 jr rtums zZz lt None gt Gen 2 Gen 3 Gen 4 Gen 5 Gen 6 Gen 7 Gen 8 CGen 9 C Gen 10 C Gen 11 OONOOAO LJ LI Ds O O O O O O O O O O prp rrr 6 Repeat step 2 through step 5 for each channel that will use the same timecode generator 7 Click Finish to save your settings and close the Channel Configuration dialog box Refer to Setting up an internal timecode generator on page 215 to configure the timecode generator 214 Profile XP System Guide 13 May 2005 Setting up an internal timecode generator Setting up an internal timecode generator When you select TC Generator as your timecode source there are several other settings that you can make to the timecode generator The controls for making these settings are available only when the timecode input is TC Generator otherwise the generator controls are dimmed Changes you make to the timecode generator apply only to the current channel unless you have selected the same time code generator for another channel see Using the same TC generator for multiple channels on page 213 To change the timecode generator settings 1 With a timecode Track selected in the configuration tree click the TC Generator button The timecode generator panel appears The controls are dimmed except when TC Generator
307. to which your SD material will be up converted when you play it on an HD output through an HD decoder NOTE The choice of system references determines which video standards are available for selection on the Video Standard page Video Timing Page 2 of 5 X Video Standard Warming Video Format If pou change the system video 2 Sys The system reference you have chosen allows you to standard all applications that are currently using the system must be restarted record in SD and more than one HD video format Please select an HD video format from the list below Standard Definition 525 lines NTSC High Definition 1080i C High Definition 720p The following video formats are supported for playout on an Agile Output SD 525 lines NTSC HD 1080 29 97 fps 720p 59 94 fps NOTE After changing the system reference or video standard you must restart all Profile control applications currently using the system resources 4 Click Finish to save your settings 152 Profile XP System Guide 13 May 2005 Configuring the video codec type Configuring the video codec type 13 May 2005 On the Profile XP media platforms equipped with one or more Video Processor boards you can configure each of the codecs to be one of five types The type principally applies to the video compression used when recording Any of these codecs can play all standard definition clips of any of these supported format seam
308. tor h Audio Reference Audio Input QT Audio Output Audio Routing ly License Configuration QA Channel Configuration 6 Configure the remote machine using Configuration Manager Then use step 4 and step 5 to configure other remote Profile XP systems as required 13 May 2005 Profile XP System Guide 63 T Chapter 2 Working with Configuration Manager 64 Profile XP System Guide 13 May 2005 Chapter 3 Working with RAID Storage Using GVG Disk Utility 13 May 2005 The information here introduces the Fibre Channel RAID storage systems used with the Profile XP Media Platform Also included are procedures for configuring and maintaining the RAID storage systems using GVG Disk Utility Topics included are RAID chassis product descriptions on page 66 Estimating storage capacity on page 69 Determining maximum video data rate per channel on page 70 Connecting RAID chassis cabling on page 70 Configuring RAID storage using GVG Disk Utility on page 71 Performing RAID storage maintenance using GVG Disk Utility on page 93 Profile XP System Guide 65 a T Chapter 3 Working with RAID Storage Using GVG Disk Utility RAID chassis product descriptions e PFC500 product description on page 66 e PFR500 product description on page 66 e PFR600 product description on page 67 e PFR700 product description on page 68 PFC500 product description The PFC50
309. tor for multiple channels To use the same timecode generator on two or more channels you must use the TC Generator button on each channel tab to select the same timecode codec for each channel To select the same internal generator 1 Select Channel Configuration in the Configuration Manager window 2 Click the tab for the channel you want to configure 3 Select a Timecode icon g in the configuration tree 4 Click the Crosspoints button then select the TC Generator check box in the Timecode Input list This enables the TC Generator button Channel Configuration P S 3000 x a vert vez By vis amp vea Name Type Add Channel in HD SD MPEG Player 7 Remove Channel vtri Video 6 IH Track 1 Add Track J Audio Q Track 1 amp 2 Delete Track ly Timecode 4 Data Summary Configuration for Timecode Track 1 Timecode Input Timecode Output s EJ TC Generator Any O Refln VITC IndJ3 O SDI VITC 4n4J5 O SDI VITC 4nBJ5 A HD ANC VITC In 7 RI SDI VITC Dut J5 HD ANC VITC n4J9 LTC In4 J3 LI HD ANC LTC ln J7 J HD ANC LT C In J9 TE Generator Crosspoints Ces __ 13 May 2005 Profile XP System Guide 213 T Chapter 7 Modifying a Channel Timecode Settings 5 Click the TC Generator button then select a TC Generator from the list NOTE Do not select Any Choose a specific timecode generator and then remember
310. ty to lock system clocks and frame reference pulses to tri level sync or to NTSC PAL bi level sync reference video input LTC In reader and LTC Out generator VITC reader for reference video input e GPI 8 In 8 Out e Black generator and Colorbar generator used for loss of input or output video conditions SD only Serial Digital Video Boards These boards provide four serial digital video 270 Mb s SMPTE 259M either 2In 2Out or 4 Out through four BNC connectors on the rear of the board An internal frame buffer is provided for each video input on the board for auto timing synchronous and asynchronous inputs Embedded audio is supported maximum of 8 channels audio per video input and is routed over the video routing fabric VITC can be read from each input and generated on each output High Definition Serial Digital Video Board This board through four BNC connectors provides one SMPTE292M serial digital video input one SMPTE292M serial digital video output a standard SDI SMPTE 259M output and a composite analog NTSC or PAL monitor output The HD SDI board can function as both input and output if AES EBU audio is in use but when embedded audio is used the board functions either as input or output but not both The output on the standard SDI port and monitor port is down converted from the high definition output signal The composite analog monitor output includes Text Overlay and Timecode burn in Video Monitor
311. ty x A The controller settings are NOT correct Do you want to restore to default controller settings Select OK to continue or Cancel to abort Ifyou do not receive an incorrect RAID Controller settings message when GVG Disk Utility opens your settings are correct 2 In the incorrect settings message box click OK to restore default settings 104 Profile XP System Guide 13 May 2005 Performing PFR500 maintenance tasks 3 On receiving operation successful message click OK RAID Controller status is now reported as Correct in the right hand status pane A GYG Disk Utility lof x File View Tools Help Contotes Songs Micooade Version mes ID TE ControllerO Correct 7 86 56 F UnBound gt Ready NM 2 4 Reboot the RAID storage and Profile XP media platform using the System reboot procedure on page 94 NOTE Ifyour PFR500 is part of an Open SAN disregard the previous step and refer to the instructions in the Open SAN Instruction Manual for powering off and powering on the Open SAN 13 May 2005 Profile XP System Guide 105 T Chapter 3 Working with RAID Storage Using GVG Disk Utility Checking PFR500 disk settings You can check disk drive settings to verify that they are set to factory default and are appropriate for operation in Profile XP installations To check disk drive settings
312. ual 6 Wait approximately 1 minute for the disk to initialize The disk access LED is steady blue 7 In GVG Disk Utility right click the LUN icon for the affected LUN then select Advanced Start Rebuild 8 To check rebuild status do one of the following e Select the replacement disk icon in GVG Disk Utility then view the disk status in the right hand pane You may need to refresh the GVG Disk Utility display On completion the drive status changes from Rebuilding to Online Open the Progress dialog box by clicking View Progress Report 112 Profile XP System Guide 13 May 2005 Performing PFR700 maintenance tasks Performing PFR700 maintenance tasks PFR700 maintenance tasks include e Downloading PFR 700 disk drive firmware on page 113 e Replacing a failed disk module on page 114 e Disabling a PFR700 RAID controller for removal on page 114 e Disabling a PFR 700 disk module for removal on page 115 e Configuring PFR 700 network and SNMP settings on page 116 Downloading PFR700 disk drive firmware When upgrading your Profile XP System Software you may be instructed in the software release notes to upgrade the PFR 700 disk drive firmware This allows you to take advantage of the disk drive enhancements and benefit from improved performance and reliability To determine your disk drive type and current firmware version select a disk drive icon in the GVG Disk Utility tree view then note t
313. uide 13 May 2005 Starting the Profile XP system Starting the Profile XP system IMPORTANT If your Profile XP Media Platform is part of an Open SAN disregard these instructions and refer to the instructions Open SAN Instruction Manual for starting the Profile XP system When starting your system you must power on the RAID storage system and then the Profile XP Media Platform as described in the following procedure To power on the Profile XP system 1 Power on all peripheral devices connected to the Profile XP including all RAID storage chassis NOTE Always power on the RAID Expansion chassis prior to or at the same time as the RAID Controller chassis 2 Wait for RAID storage initialization as follows PFR700 RAID Storage systems Wait until all disk access LEDs are steady approximately 4 minutes The controller READY LED must be ON the front Power LED must be ON and the front Service LED must be OFF Refer to the PFR 700 Instruction Manual to interpret other disk access LED or status LED behavior PFR600 RAID Storage systems Wait until all disk access LEDs are steady green is illuminated approximately 4 minutes The rear panel 7 segment LED displays the chassis address Refer to the PFR 600 Instruction Manual to interpret other disk access LED or 7 segment LED behavior PFR500 RAID Storage systems Wait until all disk access LEDs are steady green and the HOST RDY LED is illuminated approximat
314. uide 309 310 Chapter A Electrical Specifications The Performance Requirements listed in the Electrical Specifications apply over an ambient temperature range of 20 5 C to 30 5 C The Performance Requirement tolerances listed in the Electrical Specification are doubled over the temperature range of 0 to 40 5 C unless there is a specific exception Serial Digital Interface board 2In 2Out Characteristics Description Number of Inputs Supplemental Data Two component serial digital Input Type Supplemental Data 750 terminated Number of Outputs Supplemental Data Two component serial digital Output Timing Range Requirement 21 2 H to 148 H Supplemental Data Independent for each output Supplemental Data Resolution 74 ns Digital Format Supplemental Data CCIR 601 Component 525 625 10 bit data Scrambled NRZI complies with SMPTE 259M and CCIR 656 Bit Rate Supplemental Data 270 Mb s Source Impedance Supplemental Data 750 Return Loss Supplemental Data 215 dB from 5 MHz to 270 MHz DC Offset Requirement 0 0 5V Rise and Fall Times Requirement 400 1500ps measured at the 20 and 80 amplitude points Jitter Requirement lt 740 ps p to p Input Level Supplemental Data 800 mV p p 10 Supplemental Data Input voltages outside this range may cause reduced receiver performance Serial Receiver Requirement Proper operation with up to 17 dB loss at 135 MHz Equalization Range using coa
315. ur changes and close the Channel Configuration dialog box NOTE If the channel is currently in use by an application it must be reselected within the application before your changes will take effect Refer to the user manual for the Profile application you are using 234 Profile XP System Guide 13 May 2005 Removing an ancillary data track Removing an ancillary data track 13 May 2005 To remove an ancillary data track from a channel 1 Choose Channel Configuration in the Configuration Manager window 2 Select the tab for the channel you want to configure 3 Select the data Track that you want to remove under the ancillary data icon in the configuration tree 4 Click the Delete Track button 5 Click Finish to save your settings and close the Channel Configuration dialog box Profile XP System Guide 235 T Chapter 8 Modifying a Channel Ancillary Data 236 Profile XP System Guide 13 May 2005 Chapter g Managing Optional Licenses Some of the features of the Profile XP Media Platform are enabled through a special software license For example the Agile Output Definition Independent capability of the MPEG HD decoder found in the PVS2000 PVS3000 and PVS3500 series is only available when you purchase and install the optional license In some cases such as the PVS3500 optional licenses are installed at the factory If you wish to add licenses after you receive your Profile XP Media Platform you must obt
316. ution This procedure uses the Test button in the Configuration Manager Network dialog box To verify name resolution and video Ethernet network connectivity 1 Open Configuration Manager then click Network Network Page 1 of 1 Ethernet Network 2 Click the Test 306 Profile XP System Guide 13 May 2005 13 May 2005 Testing the Ethernet Video network 3 In the Ping Window select the Ping the Interface option Ping Window x Ping Result C Ping the Site le0 S Ping the Interface Ping all the Interfaces Ping Close 4 Type le0 in the text box then click Ping Make sure to enter a zero not an O All Profile systems are asked to respond Wait for ping results 5 Check the Ping Results window then do one of the following a If only the local system responded there is a problem with the video Ethernet network connectivity Verify the video Ethernet connections for all systems then review all configuration steps under Setting up a simple video network Ethernet on page 277 Repeat step 4 If there is still a problem refer to the Profile XP Service Manual b Ifall systems responded but a Profile system name is missing or incorrect there is an error in the HOSTS file Refer to Manually Edit the hosts file on each Profile XP on page 279 NOTE You can use the Ping the Site option to ping a specific Profile system using it s IP address or n
317. utput signal is lost To configure the setting for the loss of video output 1 Choose Video Output in the Configuration Manager window The Video Output dialog box appears 2 Click Next to navigate to Video Output page 3 of 3 Video Output Page 3 of 3 x Output Options What should the system do if the output signal is lost Show black default Freeze frame Sect 3 Select a video output from the list or click Select All to configure all the video outputs at the same time 4 Select the output signal loss option you want to use 5 Click Finish to saving your settings 13 May 2005 Profile XP System Guide 179 T Chapter 5 Modifying a Channel Video Settings Erasing the horizontal blanking interval You can configure a video output to erase the horizontal blanking interval Use this feature to remove ancillary data such as Error Detection and Handling EDH information Embedded audio present on the output is not effected To erase the horizontal blanking interval 1 Choose Video Output in the Configuration Manager Window The Video Output dialog box appears 2 Click Next to navigate to Video Output page 3 of 3 Video Output Page 3 of 3 x Output Options What should the system do if the output signal is lost SDI OutBJ7 A HDSDL OutaJ9 Show black default HDSDI Out4J10 C Freeze frame Finish Cancel 3 Select a video output from the list or click Select All to configure a
318. vel Supplemental Data 1 V p p a 312 Profile XP System Guide The Video Monitor outputs are not broadcast guality These outputs are for monitoring only 13 May 2005 Electrical Specifications Reference Genlock Characteristics Description Color Field Detection Based on Requirement Correct color framing for signals having an SCH Phase average SCH phase 40 Lockup 10 Supplemental Data Once locked to color field it will stay locked over a range of 0 to 90 Burst Frequency Lock Range Requirement PAL 10 Hz at subcarrier NTSC 20 Hz at subcarrier Signal Amplitude Lock Range Requirement Stays locked to 6 dB and 3 dB Reference Genlock Input Return Requirement 240 dB to 5 MHz Loss Unlocked 27Mhz clock accuracy Requirement When not locked to a reference black 27Mhz will be within 25PPM Tri level sync Lock Range Requirement Stays locked to 6 dB and 3 dB at nominal high definition 300 mV signal LTC Timecode Characteristics Description Input Supplemental Data Longitudinal Time Code AC coupled differential input Input Impedance Supplemental Data 20 kO Input Amplitude Supplemental Data 0 1 V p p differential minimum Maximum Input Voltage Supplemental Data 2 5 V p p differential maximum GPI I O Characteristics Description GPI Input Supplemental Data Inputs set to TTL level high Compatible with 5 volts CMOS
319. verify video output routing To select input and output resources for each video track 1 Double click the video icon to expand the configuration tree 2 Choose a video track in the configuration tree such as Track 1 3 Click the Crosspoints button then select a video input from the Video Input check boxes You can choose only one video input for a video track Channel Configuration Profile1 x a vert 8 vez j videoOniy AudioOnly Name Type Add Channel ia MPEG Player Recorder 7 Remove Channel z AddIrack Audio ly Timecode Delete Track Summary Configuration for Video Track 1 Encoder Decoder Video Quality MPEG Rec 1 MPEG Play 1 Medium 15 Mb s 7 Video Input Video Output s lt None gt EX SDI DutaJ5 LJ SDI OutB J5 Browse Video VBI Encoding Advanced Crosspoints Cancel Help 4 With the video Crosspoints button still selected choose a video output from the Video Output s list You can choose one or more video outputs for a video track Each output corresponds to one of the video output connectors on the back of the Profile XP system NOTE You can temporarily select the internal colorbars only with SD to verify crosspoint routing Play channels in E to E mode will display colorbars if selected 130 Profile XP System Guide 13 May 2005 Selecting video quality and crosspoints NOTE Quality selections are not appli
320. want to operate using Profile protocol NOTE Some control devices require one physical RS 422 port for each channel operated by the controller while other controllers use only one RS 422 port to control all channels up to 8 total operated by the controller Refer to your vendor s documentation for instructions 4 Test the Profile XP system using your controller See the following section for an overview of the Prolink communications window Refer to Chapter 12 Solving Common Setup Problems for help if you have a problem Profile XP System Guide 249 T Chapter 10 Controlling the Profile XP Remotely Overview of the Prolink communications window The Prolink communications window is used to display information about the status of Profile XP system under control Status information displayed in the Prolink windows includes Channel Name A channel name is displayed when the controller or control application acquires channel resources using a predefined channel created in Profile Configuration Manager Connection Number A port number is displayed when the controller or control application acquires channel resources using the Profile API rather than using channels created in Profile Configuration Manager Channel or Port Status indicates transport status such as play record or idle Frame Count indicates the frame count of the current frame Clip Name shows the name of the clip currently loaded
321. wer Use Care When Servicing With Power On Do not perform internal service or adjustment of this product unless another person capable of rendering first aid and resuscitation is present To avoid electric shock disconnect the main power by means of the power cord or if provided the power switch Dangerous voltages or currents may exist in this product Disconnect power and remove battery if applicable before removing protective panels soldering or replacing components To avoid electric shock do not touch exposed connections Certifications and Compliances Canadian Certified Power Cords FCC Emission Control Canadian EMC Notice of Compliance Canadian Certified AC Adapter EN55022 Class A Warning 13 May 2005 Canadian approval includes the products and power cords appropriate for use in the North America power network All other power cords supplied are approved for the country of use This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual may cause harmful interference to radio communications Operation of this equipment in a residential area i
322. wse Video check box if you want to add MPEG 1 proxy video to the track NOTE The Browse Video option is available only in media platforms eguipped with standard definition MPEG encoder boards Browse video is not available with video codecs configured as MPEG encoders or with high definition MPEG encoders Channel Configuration Profile1 x a v 8 vez E VideoOnly Audion Name Type Add Channel i MPEG Player Recorder 7 Remove Channel 3 Virl J Video e HI Track 1 Add Track Audio ly Timecode Delete Track Summary Configuration for Video Track 1 Encoder Decoder Video Quality M MPEG Rec 1 MPEG Play 1 Medium 15 Mb s a Browse Video Video Input Video Outputfs L None gt DX SDI OutaJ5 SDI OutBJ5 Browse Video VBI Encoding Advanced Crosspoints Finish Cancel Help 132 Profile XP System Guide 13 May 2005 13 May 2005 Selecting video quality and crosspoints 7 Click Browse Video Select an encoder for the browse video The size of the MPEG 1 video image when played back is 352 x 240 for NTSC and 352 x 288 for PAL NOTE The MPEG encoder that you select for use with browse video is dedicated to that use and is no longer available for encoding broadcast quality video Channel Configuration GA4 VHS Quality 1 5 Mb s yy C MPEG Rec 4 Profile XP System Guide 133 T Chapter 4 Ad
323. xial cable having 1 Yr loss characteristics 800 mV launch amplitude Output Level Requirement 800 mV p p 10 Profile XP System Guide 13 May 2005 Electrical Specifications Serial Digital Interface board 4 Out Characteristics Description Number of Outputs Supplemental Data Four component serial digital Output Timing Range Requirement 21 2 H to 148 H Supplemental Data Independent for each output Supplemental Data Resolution 74 ns Digital Format Supplemental Data CCIR 601 Component 525 625 10 bit data Scrambled NRZI complies with SMPTE 259M and CCIR 656 Bit Rate Supplemental Data 270 Mb s Source Impedance Supplemental Data 750 Return Loss Supplemental Data 215 dB from 5 MHz to 270 MHz DC Offset Reguirement 0 0 5V Rise and Fall Times Reguirement 400 1500ps 20 to 80 amplitude slew rate Jitter Reguirement lt 740ps pk to pk Input Level Supplemental Data 800 mV p p 10 Supplemental Data Input voltages outside this range may cause reduced receiver performance Output Level Reguirement 800 mV p p 10 High Definition Serial Digital Interface board 13 May 2005 Characteristics Description Number of Inputs Supplemental Data One SMPTE 292M component serial digital Input Type Supplemental Data 750 terminated Number of Outputs Supplemental Data One SMPTE 292M component serial digital One SMPTE 259M component serial digital

Profile XP System Guide

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents